0% found this document useful (0 votes)

709 views

Using Installation Dialogs

This book replaces the previous edition, SA22-7815-13. Changes or additions to text and illustrations are indicated by a vertical line to the left of the change. This edition applies to Dialog Level 20, and to ServerPac (program number 5751-CS9)

Uploaded by

pkonduri

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

709 views

Using Installation Dialogs

Uploaded by

pkonduri

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 282

ServerPac

Using the Installation Dialog

Dialog Level: 20(September 2007)

SA22-7815-14

ServerPac

Using the Installation Dialog

Dialog Level: 20(September 2007)

SA22-7815-14

Note Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under Notices on page 243.

Fifteenth Edition, September 2007 This book replaces the previous edition, SA22-7815-13. Changes or additions to text and illustrations are indicated by a vertical line to the left of the change. This edition applies to Dialog Level 20, and to ServerPac (program number 5751-CS9), and to all subsequent releases and modifications, until otherwise indicated in new editions. IBM welcomes your comments. A form for readers comments may be provided at the back of this document, or you may address your comments to the following address: International Business Machines Corporation MHVRCFS, Mail Station P181 2455 South Road Poughkeepsie, NY 12601-5400 United States of America FAX (United States & Canada): 1+845+432-9405 FAX (Other Countries): Your International Access Code +1+845+432-9405 IBMLink (United States customers only): IBMUSM10(MHVRCFS) Internet e-mail: [email protected] World Wide Web: http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zos/webqs.html If you would like a reply, be sure to include your name, address, telephone number, or FAX number. Make sure to include the following in your comment or note: v Title and order number of this document v Page number or topic related to your comment When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1996, 2007. All rights reserved. US Government Users Restricted Rights Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

Contents
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi About this document . . . . Terms used in this document . . Marking your progress . . . . Where to find more information . Summary of changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii xiii xiii xiv

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii . 1 . 1 . 1 . 2 . 2 . 3 . 4 . 4 . 6 . 7 . 8 . 9 . 9 . 9 . 9 . 9 . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 13 13 14 15 16 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 25 25 25 27 28 29 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1. Introducing the installation dialog . . . . . Preparing to install your ServerPac order . . . . . . . . Orders from tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orders from an FTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . Security system considerations . . . . . . . . . . . Working with your order: an overview of the dialog activities . Receiving your order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing your order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving your orders configuration . . . . . . . . . . Using the installation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features of the dialog panels . . . . . . . . . . . . Language support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISPF edit CAPS setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2. Installing and starting the dialog . . . . . . . Summary of tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allocating and cataloging the dialog data sets . . . . . . . Updating your dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying the UPDATE job from tape . . . . . . . . . . Downloading the EUPDATE job from an FTP server . . . . Installing the dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying the LOADRIM job from tape . . . . . . . . . . Downloading the LOADRIM job from an FTP server . . . . Starting the dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option 1: Use a CLIST with LIBDEF statements . . . . . . Option 2: Start the dialog from the ISPF primary option menu. Option 3: Run CPPCISPF from the TSO/E command line . . Chapter 3. Receiving a new order . . Required migration step . . . . . . Beginning the receive process . . . . Receiving an order from tape . . . . Receiving an order from the file system . Receiving an order from an FTP server . Generating the RECEIVE job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4. Installing a new order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

iii

Selecting an order to install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Displaying the installation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Chapter 5. Creating a work configuration for the Choosing the installation type . . . . . . . . Selecting a JES for the configuration . . . . . . Creating the configuration . . . . . . . . . . Merging a configuration with a previous order . Chapter 6. Defining installation variables . . . Selecting new values for the variables in your order Browsing variable definitions . . . . . . . . . Editing variable definitions . . . . . . . . . . Inserting user variables . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting user variables . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring a variable to its shipped value . . . . order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 41 43 44 45 59 61 63 64 66 67 68 69 70 70 71

Chapter 7. Defining the SMP/E zone configuration. How zone names are used in your order . . . . . Changing the SMP/E zone names in your order . . . Confirming processing requirements . . . . . . .

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout . . . . . . . Creating the recommended system layout . . . . . . . Excluding specific data sets from automatic assignment . The role of volumes in automatic assignment . . . . . Examples of using automatic assignment . . . . . . Viewing and changing data sets . . . . . . . . . . Making changes to data sets . . . . . . . . . . . Virtual storage management and LPA-eligible data sets Merging and unmerging data sets . . . . . . . . Modifying a data sets attributes . . . . . . . . . Displaying device types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting or editing device types . . . . . . . . . Deleting device types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and defining user data sets . . . . . . . . . Displaying a summary of physical volumes . . . . . . Resolving over-allocated volume conditions . . . . . Changing the attributes of a physical volume . . . . Changing an SMS storage class . . . . . . . . . Confirming processing requirements . . . . . . . . Chapter 9. Defining HLQ-to-catalog relationships How SSAs are used during installation. . . . . . Default catalog structure for full system replacement Defining catalog data set names . . . . . . . . Inserting a user-defined alias . . . . . . . . . Confirming processing requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 73 . 75 . 75 . 75 . 83 . 95 . 98 . 101 . 102 . 109 . 114 . 115 . 116 . 117 . 118 . 120 . 121 . 122 . 123 . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 126 127 129 131 132 133 134 135 135 137 139

Chapter 10. Defining system-specific aliases (SSAs) . . Selecting the catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining SSA and catalog data . . . . . . . . . . . Defining SSA and catalog data for full system replacement Defining SSA data for software upgrade . . . . . . . Confirming processing requirements . . . . . . . . .

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Chapter 11. Submitting the installation jobs . . Using GENSKEL to generate the installation jobs . Selecting job output logging . . . . . . . . . Displaying the processing log . . . . . . . . Using line command B . . . . . . . . . . Using line command S . . . . . . . . . . Working with user-defined jobs . . . . . . . Inserting a user-defined job . . . . . . . . Editing a user-defined job . . . . . . . . Deleting a user-defined job . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

141 145 145 146 146 147 149 149 151 151

Chapter 12. Saving the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 13. Working with orders . . . . . Selecting an order . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying an order . . . . . . . . . . . Editing an order . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the products and features of an order Displaying the FMIDs for a product or feature . Requesting an order report . . . . . . . . Verifying the status of an order . . . . . . Appendix A. Primary command reference BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGE DSNAME. . . . . . . . . . CHANGE DSNAME *HLQ* . . . . . . . CHANGE DSNTYPE . . . . . . . . . CHANGE LVOL . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGE MCAT . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGE PVOL . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGE RENAME. . . . . . . . . . CHANGE SECOND. . . . . . . . . . CHANGE SMS . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGE SPACE . . . . . . . . . . CREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FINDCOMP . . . . . . . . . . . . GENSKEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OLIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PREVIOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPLACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SUMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VERBOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 157 157 159 161 161 162 163 165 165 165 167 168 169 171 171 173 174 175 176 178 180 181 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 189 189 190 190 191 193 193 194

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Contents

Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Figures
1. Overview of ServerPac Installation Dialog Activities . . . . . . 2. Panel: Installation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Panel displayed in terse format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Panel displayed in verbose format . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Copying the UPDATE job from the system and distribution tape . 6. Copying the LOADRIM job from the system and distribution tape 7. Panel: TSO/E logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. Starting the dialog: Using a CLIST with LIBDEF statements . . . 9. Sample TSO/E logon proc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. Starting the dialog with the TSO/E options processor . . . . . 11. Panel: Main installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. Panel: Receive an order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. Panel: Receive an order from tape . . . . . . . . . . . . 14. Panel: Receive an order from the file system . . . . . . . . 15. Panel: Download server information . . . . . . . . . . . . 16. Panel: Download file system information . . . . . . . . . . 17. Panel: Firewall commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18. Panel: CPPPEDIF panel with firewall commands . . . . . . . 19. Panel: Edit JOB statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. Panel: CPPPEDIF panel with JOB statement . . . . . . . . 21. Panel: Edit RECEIVE job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22. Panel: CPPPEDIF panel with RECEIVE job . . . . . . . . . 23. Panel: Order processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24. Panel: Order list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25. Panel: Installation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26. Panel: Type of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27. Software upgrade option preserves your existing operational data . 28. Panel: JES element selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29. Panel: Select configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30. Panel: Select configuration (configuration created) . . . . . . 31. Panel: Merge configurations - confirmation . . . . . . . . . 32. Panel: Merge configurations - DELETE an EXISTING configuration 33. Panel: Variable selection list - variable synonyms . . . . . . . 34. Panel: Update variable definition - value . . . . . . . . . . 35. Panel: Browse variable definition - usage . . . . . . . . . . 36. Panel: Update variable definition - value . . . . . . . . . . 37. Panel: Update variable definition - usage . . . . . . . . . . 38. Panel: Insert a user variable - value . . . . . . . . . . . . 39. Panel: Insert a user variable - usage . . . . . . . . . . . 40. Panel: Delete a user variable - confirmation . . . . . . . . . 41. Panel: Restore a variable to the shipped value - confirmation . . 42. Panel: Define zone names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43. Panel: Confirm processing requirements . . . . . . . . . . 44. Panel: Modify system layout options . . . . . . . . . . . . 45. Panel: Modify system layout options . . . . . . . . . . . . 46. Panel: Current volume configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 47. Panel: Display and change volume attributes . . . . . . . . 48. Panel: Modify system layout options . . . . . . . . . . . . 49. Panel: Current volume configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 50. Panel: Automatic assignment confirmation . . . . . . . . . 51. Panel: Automatic assignment progress panel . . . . . . . . 52. Panel: Current volume configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 53. Panel: Modify system layout options . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . 4 . . . 7 . . . 10 . . . 10 . . . 15 . . . 17 . . . 19 . . . 21 . . . 22 . . . 23 . . . 25 . . . 26 . . . 28 . . . 29 . . . 30 . . . 31 . . . 32 . . . 33 . . . 34 . . . 34 . . . 35 . . . 35 . . . 37 . . . 38 . . . 39 . . . 41 . . . 42 . . . 43 . . . 44 . . . 45 . . . 46 . . . 46 . . . 59 . . . 63 . . . 64 . . . 65 . . . 65 . . . 66 . . . 67 . . . 67 . . . 68 . . . 69 . . . 71 . . . 73 . . . 77 . . . 80 . . . 82 . . . 83 . . . 84 . . . 85 . . . 85 . . . 86 . . . 87

vii

54. Panel: Current volume configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55. Panel: Automatic assignment confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56. Panel: Current volume configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57. Panel: Modify system layout options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58. Panel: Current volume configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59. Panel: Current volume configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60. Panel: Modify system layout options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61. Panel: Current volume configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62. Panel: Current volume configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63. Panel: Select a data set view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64. Panel: Select values to display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65. Panel: Select values to display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66. Panel: Global change - candidate list for data set attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . 67. Panel: Global change - candidate list for data set space values . . . . . . . . . . 68. Panel: Data set merge candidates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69. Panel: Data set merge candidates for UNIX file system data sets . . . . . . . . . 70. Panel: Expansion of a merged data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71. Panel: Expansion of the merge component data set panel for UNIX file system data sets 72. Panel: Data set attributes 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73. Panel: Data set attributes 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74. Panel: Data set attributes 2 for a shipped VSAM data set . . . . . . . . . . . . 75. Panel: Data set attributes 2 for a UNIX file system data set . . . . . . . . . . . . 76. Panel: Device type table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77. Panel: Device type insertion/edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78. Panel: Device type deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79. Panel: Modify system layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80. Panel: Define a USER data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81. Panel: Summary of physical volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82. Panel: Display and change volume attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83. Panel: Assign a storage class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84. Panel: Confirm processing requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85. Default catalog structure for full system replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86. ServerPac installation dialog flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87. Panel: Define catalog data set names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88. Panel: Define catalog data set names (updated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89. Panel: Specify alias and catalog names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90. Panel: Catalog selection list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91. Panel: Define SSA and CATALOG data for full system replacement . . . . . . . . . 92. Panel: Define SSA and catalog data (software upgrade) master catalog . . . . . . . 93. Panel: Define SSA and catalog data (software upgrade) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94. Panel: Confirm processing requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95. Panel: Job selection list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96. Panel: Generate file-tailored installation jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97. Panel: Processing log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98. Panel: Edit backup member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99. Panel: Edit jobstream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100. Panel: Insert a user-defined job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101. Panel: Browse existing user job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102. Panel: Insert a user-defined job - confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103. Panel: Edit source member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104. Panel: Delete a user-defined job - confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105. Panel: Specify save configuration library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106. Panel: Deleting an Existing Configuration - Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107. Panel: Order selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108. Panel: Order list (terse mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109. Panel: Editing an order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 88 . 88 . 89 . 90 . 91 . 92 . 93 . 94 . 94 . 96 . 97 . 97 . 99 . 100 . 103 . 105 . 108 109 . 110 . 113 . 114 . 114 . 115 . 116 . 117 . 117 . 118 . 118 . 121 . 122 . 123 . 128 . 128 . 129 . 131 . 131 . 134 . 136 . 137 . 138 . 139 . 142 . 145 . 146 . 147 . 148 . 149 . 150 . 150 . 151 . 152 . 154 . 155 . 157 . 158 . 159

viii

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

110. 111. 112. 113. 114.

Panel: Shipped products/features . . . . Panel: Shipped FMIDs for a product/feature Panel: Specify a report data set . . . . . Panel: Status verification . . . . . . . Sample panel for SORT example . . . .

. . . . .

161 162 162 163 192

Figures

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Tables
1. 2. 3. Dialog data sets must remain in their original formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Values used in a merged configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Installation variables that require some planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

xii

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

About this document

This document explains how to use the CustomPac installation dialog to install a ServerPac order. Included is planning information to help you familiarize yourself with the dialog before you install an order. The examples in this document highlight the functions of the installation dialog that apply to a ServerPac order. Although the dialog also contains functions to support IBMs CustomPac offerings, such as SystemPac, FunctionPac, ProductPac, RefreshPac, and Selective Follow-on Services (SFS), these functions are not described in this document. If you install a CustomPac offering, refer to the CustomPac Installation Dialog Reference and Messages documents that were shipped with your order in softcopy and hardcopy format. When you finish reading this document, please let us know how you liked it and whether there is anything in particular we can do to improve it. You can use the postage-paid form for comments at the back of the document, or you can send your comments by e-mail (to [email protected]) or by FAX (see the Edition notice at the beginning of this book for details).

Terms used in this document

Throughout this document, the CustomPac installation dialog is called the installation dialog, the master dialog, or, simply, the dialog. The dialogs own data sets are sometimes referred to as the master dialog data sets. It is also important that you understand how the following terms are used in this document: Driving system Target system The system image (hardware and software) that you use to install the target system. The system software libraries and other data sets that you are installing.

If you are installing a subsystem order (CICS, DB2, IMS, or NCP), or WebSphere Application Server, the driving system and target system can be the same system.

Marking your progress

Installing an order is a multiple step process through an online dialog. To help you mark your progress through these steps, sign posts, such as the following, are displayed throughout this document:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

xiii

CPPPFLOW - - - - - - - - - - - Installation Options for Order ( MD053718 ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - OPTION ==> Complete these options to install the order:
C * * * * * * Create Variables Zones Modify Alias SSA Installation Create the Work Configuration Specify Values for Variables Specify SMP/E Zone Names Modify the System Layout Specify Catalogs for High-Level Qualifiers Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs Create and Submit Installation Jobs (Option not available until download complete)

You can use Save any time after creating the work configuration:
* Save Save the Current Work Configuration

Where to find more information

This document references information in the following documents:
Title z/OS DFSMS Access Method Services for Catalogs z/OS DFSMS Storage Administration Reference z/OS DFSMS Managing Catalogs z/OS DFSMS Using Data Sets z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros z/OS ISPF Users Guide Vol I z/OS ISPF Users Guide Vol II z/OS MVS JCL Users Guide z/OS MVS JCL Reference z/OS Planning for Installation ServerPac: Installing Your Order SMP/E Commands SMP/E Messages, Codes, and Diagnosis SMP/E Reference z/OS TSO/E Customization Order number SC26-7394 SC26-7402 SC26-7409 SC26-7410 SC34-4820 SC34-4822 SC34-4823 SA22-7598 SA22-7597 GA22-7504 N/A SA22-7771 GA22-7770 SA22-7772 SA22-7783

| | | | | |

Before you begin your ServerPac installation of z/OS (MVS SREL), see z/OS Planning for Installation to do the following things: v Develop migration and installation plans for z/OS v Ensure you have the hardware and software required to run the z/OS product set v Learn coexistence considerations for z/OS v Learn the levels of non-z/OS IBM products that run in the z/OS environment This document contains most of the information you need when you begin to install an order. During one stage of the process (submitting the installation jobs),

xiv

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

| | | | | | | | | | |

however, you need to refer to ServerPac: Installing Your Order for specific instructions for your particular order. Unlike a formal publication, ServerPac: Installing Your Order is tailored to match your individual z/OS ServerPac order. When you receive your ServerPac order using the CustomPac installation dialogs, the RECEIVE job copies the ServerPac: Installing Your Order document in two different formats into the following data sets: v The PDF format is copied to hlq.ordernum.SCPPLENU(PDFIYO) v The BookManager format is copied to hlq.ordernum.INSTGUID.BOOK You can choose either of the following two ways to download the manual to your workstation. v Download it directly from hlq.ordernum.SCPPLENU(PDFIYO) to your workstation, or v First copy the manual from hlq.ordernum.SCPPLENU(PDFIYO) into a sequential data set. Then download the sequential data set in binary format to a workstation into a file named xxxx.PDF. Note: To view the PDF file, use the Adobe Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher for the best resolution. Figure 1 on page 4 shows which document to use at each stage of the installation process. For complete titles and order numbers of the documents for all products that are part of z/OS, see z/OS Information Roadmap.

About this document

xvi

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Summary of changes
Summary of changes for SA22-7815-14 Dialog level 20 (September 2007) z/OS Version 1 Release 9 This document contains information previously presented in ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog, SA22-7815-13, which supports z/OS Version 1 Release 8. Changed information: v About this document on page xiii has been updated to reflect that a PDF version of the 'Installing Your Order' document is created and packaged with ServerPac orders. Deleted information: v About this document on page xiii has been updated to reflect that the LIST1403 and LIST3820 formats of the 'Installing Your Order' documents are eliminated from ServerPac orders. You may notice changes in the style and structure of some content in this documentfor example, headings that use uppercase for the first letter of initial words only, and procedures that have a different look and format. The changes are ongoing improvements to the consistency and retrievability of information in our documents This document contains terminology, maintenance, and editorial changes. Technical changes or additions to the text and illustrations are indicated by a vertical line to the left of the change. Summary of changes for SA22-7815-13 Dialog level 19 (September 2006) z/OS Version 1 Release 8 This document contains information previously presented in ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog, SA22-7815-12, which supports z/OS Version 1 Release 7. New information: The IBM TotalStorage 3592 Tape Drive, which is designed to provide high capacity and performance for storing mission critical data, is now supported in ServerPac. By offering significant advancements in capacity and data transfer rates, the 3592 Tape Drive helps address storage requirements that are often filled by two types of drives - those that provide fast access for data access and those that provide high capacity for backups. Changed information: v In an effort to reduce the number of tapes shipped with a physical order, ServerPac will no longer ship a separate RIM {Related Information Material} tape. The files that were contained on the separate RIM tape will now be contained as the first 13 files on the first system and distribution tape shipped with your order. Reference to the RIM tape has been updated to reflect this change.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

xvii

v Changed messages: The following message has been changed: CPP0605079E Deleted information: v Support for 9345 DASD device type has been removed from ServerPac, therefore all reference to 9345 as an allowable DASD device type has been removed from the ServerPac installation process and this documentation. v Documented guidelines governing data set name lengths in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165 have been removed. This document contains terminology, maintenance, and editorial changes. Summary of Changes for SA22-7815-12 as Updated (May 2006) This document contains terminology, maintenance, and editorial changes to the information previously presented in SA22-7815-11. New Information: New messages: The following new messages have been added: v CPP0605092I v CPP0605093I v CPP0605094E Summary of changes for SA22-7815-11 as updated (October 2005) This document contains terminology, maintenance, and editorial changes to the information previously presented in SA22-7815-10. Deleted information: References to the terms MVS and OS/390 have been removed EXCEPT in the following cases: v when discussing migration from OS/390 to z/OS v when referencing products or publications that contain the terms in their title or names v when using as historical reference - e.g. OS/390 was replaced by z/OS v when referencing MVS component of the BCP element v when referencing MVS SREL v when using general references - e.g. MVS messages, MVS commands, MVS data sets, etc. Summary of changes for SA22-7815-10 Dialog level 18 (September 2005) New information: v CHANGE SECOND command: The SECOND operand is added to the CHANGE command to allow you to override data sets that were shipped with no secondary space allocation, for example, link list data sets. With this operand the dialog will now allow you to override data sets shipped with no secondary to have a secondary allocation which is 10% of the primary allocation.

xviii

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

v Minimum system requirement: The minimum level of driving system for installing z/OS V1R7 orders is z/OS V1R4 or higher. v Merging file system data sets: The installation dialog now supports merging and unmerging eligible UNIX File System data sets. v Saved configuration: The installation dialog now restricts the selection of saved configurations to those which were created using your current dialog or up to three prior releases of the dialog. v New messages: The following new messages have been added: CPP0601009E CPP0605090E CPP0605204E CPP0605216E CPP0605217W v New panels: The following Installation Dialog panels are new: CPPP605V CPPP605W Changed information: v Changed messages: The following new messages have been changed: CPP0605031E CPP0605032E v Changed panels: The following Installation Dialog panels have been changed: CPPP6011 CPPP6013 CPPP605D CPPP605E CPPP605F CPPP605I CPPP605M CPPP605R CPPP605U CPPP605X CPPP6052 Deleted information: v Deleted messages: The following message has been deleted: CPP0605016I v Deleted panels: The following Installation Dialog panel has been deleted: CPPP6014

Summary of changes

xix

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Chapter 1. Introducing the installation dialog

Your ServerPac order includes the CustomPac installation dialog, an Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF) dialog that you use to install the order. This chapter presents some important concepts that you should understand before using the dialog to install your order.

Preparing to install your ServerPac order

| | The information that IBM provides to help you prepare for installation depends on whether you are installing z/OS, a subsystem order (CICS, DB2, IMS, or NCP), or WebSphere Application Server, as follows: For z/OS orders... Follow the instructions in z/OS Planning for Installation on preparing your system for a ServerPac installation. For example, you must have a driving system that meets certain requirements to perform the installation. z/OS Planning for Installation lists the hardware and software requirements for the driving system and also helps you determine how much DASD to use. Also, check the appropriate software preventive service planning (PSP) buckets for driving system requirements.

For subsystem orders and WebSphere Application Server orders... For the driving system requirements, see z/OS Planning for Installation. For instructions on preparing your system for a ServerPac installation, see the documentation that is provided with your order. Also, check the appropriate software preventive service planning (PSP) buckets for coexistence and fallback service requirements. See z/OS Planning for Installation for the PTFs that you might need to install on your existing system to allow it to coexist with the new release, and allow you to fall back to the existing system if necessary. | | Regardless of whether your order is z/OS or a z/OS-related subsystem product, use the installation dialog described in this book to install the order.

Orders from tape

If you received your order on tape, be sure to review the contents of the ServerPac shipment that you received from IBM before you install your order. Check the packing slip to ensure that you have a complete set of installation tapes and documentation. Also, take note of your order number, which is printed on the cover of ServerPac: Installing Your Order. You will later use this order number as input to the installation dialog.

For first-time users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

Introduction
tape. Instructions for installing the dialog are provided in Chapter 2, Installing and starting the dialog, on page 13. For subsequent orders, you do not need to reinstall the dialog.

For subsequent users

If you have a dialog level below Dialog Level 17 and are about to use Level 17 (or a subsequent level when available) for the first time, you must run the UPDATE job. You need only to run UPDATE once. Instructions for copying UPDATE are provided in Updating your dialogs on page 14. To determine whether you must update the dialog, start the dialog and look at the first panel {CPPPPOLI}. If it says This dialog supports electronic delivery at the bottom, you do not need to update your dialogs. If your dialog is at Dialog Level 17 or above, the master dialogs will be upgraded if required automatically by the RECEIVE job.

Orders from an FTP server

If you received your order from an FTP server, be sure to review the contents of the ServerPac shipment that you received from IBM before you install your order. Also, take note of the order number, server name, server directory, userid and password, and hash value. This data is located in the Dialog Data file on the ShopzSeries Download page for your order. You will use this information later as input to the installation dialog. Additional information on electronic delivery of orders can be found in z/OS Planning for Installation, SA232206.

For first-time users

If you are installing a ServerPac for the first time, you need to install the installation dialog and its associated data sets on your driving system. The dialog data sets are installed by a LOADRIM job that IBM provides as a file on the FTP server. Instructions for installing the dialog are provided in Chapter 2, Installing and starting the dialog, on page 13. For subsequent orders, you do not need to reinstall the dialog.

For subsequent users

If you are going to receive your order from an FTP server and your dialog is at a level below Dialog Level 17, you must first run the EUPDATE job to upgrade your dialogs to the current level. You can download the EUPDATE job to a workstation (for example, using File > Save As in a browser) or you can also copy it directly from the download FTP site. In either case, you must copy the EUPDATE job to your driving system. You need only to run EUPDATE once. See Updating your dialogs on page 14 for instructions on downloading EUPDATE. To determine whether you must update the dialog, start the dialog and look at the first panel {CPPPPOLI}. If it says This dialog supports electronic delivery at the bottom, you do not need to update your dialogs. If your dialog is at Dialog Level 17 or above, the master dialogs will be upgraded if required automatically by the RECEIVE job.

Security system considerations

To install the products delivered in ServerPac, you might need to create new definitions for your security system.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Introduction
| | | Later, during the installation jobs phase of the installation process, you can submit jobs RACFDRV and (for z/OS orders only) RACFTGT. These jobs issue RACF commands that require your user ID to have the RACF SPECIAL attribute. These jobs also require that your user ID have ALTER access for the data set high level qualifiers (HLQs) in the order. You will need ALTER access for the following HLQs: v CPAC v SYS1 (for z/OS orders) v Product-specific high-level qualifiers for the products in your order. For a listing of these qualifiers, use the A (ALIAS) option of the dialog after you finish modifying the system layout. For example, ServerPac uses the high-level qualifier ISP for the ISPF product data sets. If you change the ISP high-level qualifier to XYZ for those data sets, your userid must have ALTER authority for the XYZ high-level qualifier. v System-specific aliases named in the SSA panel. You will also need UPDATE access for the SSA qualifiers in the driving systems master catalog. For example, if you use an SSA of ABC for the ISPF data sets, and you use the default high-level qualifier, you will need ALTER access to ABC and UPDATE access to ISP. | | Review jobs RACFDRV and (for z/OS orders only) RACFTGT carefully before you submit them. Modify these jobs as necessary to suit your particular installation. Also, if you decide to use SMS to manage data sets in your order (as described in the CHANGE SMS command in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165), the userid that you later use to submit the installation jobs requires at least READ access to the FACILITY class profile for STGADMIN.IGG.DIRCAT, which allows you to direct a catalog request to a specific catalog. If you use a security product other than RACF, you should consult its documentation and perform the equivalent actions for that product.

Working with your order: an overview of the dialog activities

Figure 1 on page 4 summarizes the steps for using the dialog to install a ServerPac order. The book for each step is listed under Use this document .... Run each function in order. That is: 1. Receive an order 2. Install an order 3. Save the orders configuration. Following the figure is a summary of these steps.

Chapter 1. Introducing the installation dialog

Introduction

When youre doing this dialog activity...

Use this document...

Install the Dialog

R -- Receive an Order

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

I -- Install an Order
C V Z M A S I Create Work Configuration Define Variables Specify SMP/E Zone Names Modify System Layout Specify Catalogs for HLQ Specify Temporary Aliases Select, Edit, Submit, Back-Up Installation Jobs

ServerPac: Installing Your Order

Run post-installation jobs, IPL the target system and run IVP jobs.

S Save the Current Work Configuration

O -- Select Orders to Display

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Figure 1. Overview of ServerPac Installation Dialog Activities

Receiving your order

Use the dialog to receive your ServerPac order. The dialog generates a job to receive the new order by loading information from a tape, an FTP server, or a file system (local host or attached) to your DASD. Receiving the order ensures that the following processes occur: v The dialog is informed that the order is available for customization and installation. v The IBM-supplied shipped configuration is copied to your DASD.

Installing your order

When you install an order, you receive a shipped configuration, from which you create work and saved configurations. These configurations are briefly described here, and, in detail, later in this book:

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Introduction
v Shipped: The IBM-supplied default configuration (tailored to your order). v Work: A working copy of the order configuration that you tailor as you proceed with the dialog. You use the installation dialog to create a copy of the shipped order configuration and, optionally, merge it with a saved configuration. v Saved: A work configuration that was tailored with installation information from a previously installed order. You can have a different saved configuration for each order. For example, assume that you have installed three ServerPac orders and saved each configuration. If you install a fourth ServerPac order, you have three saved configurations from which to select for merging with the work configuration. You are, however, limited to one saved configuration for merging. Tip: You can also use a saved configuration to take a checkpoint while working with an order. After you have selected all the prior options and have no configuration warnings, you can save the configuration with the Save option and use it to recreate the same configuration, even for the same order. You do not need to submit any jobs to enable the option and save the configuration. So, if there are changes you want to try, but are not sure about, save the configuration and go ahead and try them. If the results are unsatisfactory, recreate the configuration using the saved one to get right back to where you were. Installing a ServerPac order involves the following steps: v Create a configuration to tailor. The shipped order configuration forms the basis of a work configuration that you will tailor. If you previously installed a ServerPac or dump-by-data-set SystemPac, and you saved the configuration, you can merge the saved version with the shipped configuration. Whenever possible, the dialog will carry forward the changes that you made the last time, so you will not need to repeat them. The resulting work configuration requires less tailoring than was needed the first time. v Tailor the work configuration. You use a series of dialog panels to: Select the installation type: full system replacement or software upgrade. Define the variables to be used in the installation jobs. Select appropriate names for the SMP/E zones. Change the attributes and placement of data sets in the work configuration to suit your needs. Define your alias-to-catalog relationships. Define your catalogs. v Submit installation jobs. The installation dialog generates a series of jobs that you run on your system to create a new target system or subsystem. The jobs are generated based on the work configuration for your order, but you can edit them through the dialog if you want. Another book, ServerPac: Installing Your Order guides you through this part of the process. That book describes the post-installation jobs that you must run, and guides you through your first IPL and verification of the target system. Tip: For physical orders, this book is shipped on tape in the SCPPLENU data set. The book format is shipped in INSTGUID.BOOK data set. For electronic orders, the SCPPLENU and INSTGUID.BOOK data sets are shipped in the ORDER package. These data sets are loaded to DASD when you receive your order. v Save the work configuration and update the inventory. Save the work configuration, so that you can reuse the data for future orders. Then, use the dialog to update the order inventory.

| |

Chapter 1. Introducing the installation dialog

Introduction

Installing an order on SMS-managed volumes

To use SMS-managed volumes for your orders data sets, you must intervene to some extent in the dialogs process of assigning configuration data sets to logical volumes. If you choose to SMS-manage any data sets, you must understand that logical volumes are the entities that are assigned to SMS storage classes. To have SMS manage one or more volumes in your configuration, you can use either of two methods: 1. Assign logical volumes for data sets that are to be SMS-managed to storage classes. v Decide which SMS storage classes will be used for data sets that are to be managed by SMS. v Define the storage classes to SMS. v Ensure that your automatic class selection (ACS) routines will allow the chosen storage classes to be used. v In the dialog, assign the logical volumes for the data sets to be SMS-managed to the appropriate storage classes. v Run the installation jobs, as described in Chapter 11, Submitting the installation jobs, on page 141. If you also plan to use the dialogs Create a Recommended System Layout option, you should determine whether to assign data sets to SMS storage classes before using automatic assignment. For example, if you plan to SMS-manage all of the DLIB data sets, the order in which you do this is not important. However, if you plan to SMS-manage some of the target data sets, you should assign these data sets to storage classes first, so that the dialog does not create more volumes than are needed. For restrictions, see the CHANGE SMS command in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165. 2. You can allow your ACS routines to assign data sets to storage classes, based on data set names or qualifiers, initially-assigned storage class, or some other means that can be determined through ACS. Again, these storage classes must be defined before the ALLOCDS installation job runs. For information about writing ACS routines, see z/OS DFSMS Storage Administration Reference. If you use ACS routines assign data sets to SMS management and you also plan to use the dialogs Create a Recommended System Layout option, you should consider whether this process would be easier if you instead defined the data sets as SMS-managed in the dialog. If you plan to share the SMS control data sets (SCDS, ACDS) that you use on your driving system with the target system, you must ensure that these data sets are available to the target system when it is activated. Also, ensure that your ACDS and COMMDS data sets are large enough. If you are migrating from earlier levels of DFSMSdfp, you might need to enlarge them. For information about DFSMSdfp compatibility, see the topic, Translating and Validating in a Sysplex Environment in z/OS DFSMS Storage Administration Reference, and the DFSMS migration information in z/OS Planning for Installation. For the space requirements for SMS control data sets, see the topic about calculating the size of storage and active control data sets in z/OS DFSMS Storage Administration Reference.

Saving your orders configuration

Save the work configuration, so that you can reuse it for future orders.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Introduction

Using the installation menu

When you select an order to install, the Installation Menu is displayed (Figure 2). This panel is the starting point for all of the functions that are needed to install your order.
CPPPFLOW ----------- Installation Options for Order ( MD053718 ) -------------OPTION ==> Complete these options to install the order: C * * * * * * Create Variables Zones Modify Alias SSA Installation Create the Work Configuration Specify Values for Variables Specify SMP/E Zone Names Modify the System Layout Specify Catalogs for High-Level Qualifiers Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs Create and Submit Installation Jobs (Option not available until download complete)

You can use Save any time after creating the work configuration: * Save Save the Current Work Configuration

Figure 2. Panel: Installation Menu

At the beginning of a ServerPac installation, the only available function is Create. Each of the other functions (now marked with asterisks) become available after the previous function is completed. The Installation Menu provides access to the dialog functions, as follows: C Create the work configuration: Use this option to create a work configuration for the order you are installing. You can choose to merge the orders shipped configuration with a configuration that you saved from a previous order. The new order, together with the saved configuration, if any, forms the work configuration that you manipulate in subsequent functions of the dialog. For operating system orders, you are prompted to choose an installation method (full system replacement or a software upgrade) and select a job entry subsystem (JES) for the installation. For more information, see Chapter 5, Creating a work configuration for the order, on page 41. V Specify values for variables: Installing your order involves generating and submitting batch jobs. In the Variables function, the dialog collects certain data that it uses to tailor the installation jobs. This function allows you to: v Alter data values for the variables. v Define your own user variables. For more information, see Chapter 6, Defining installation variables, on page 59. Z Specify SMP/E zone names: Products and features delivered with your
Chapter 1. Introducing the installation dialog

Introduction
order are shipped using default target and DLIB zone names. The dialog allows you to define the target and DLIB zone names to be used when installing your order. IBM recommends that you use different zone names for each order. For more information, see Chapter 7, Defining the SMP/E zone configuration, on page 69. IBM also recommends that you use different CSI data set names for each order. To change the names of the CSI data sets, use the Modify System Layout function (see Chapter 8, Modifying the system layout, on page 73). M Modify the system layout: This function assigns the data sets in the work configuration to your installations DASD volumes. You can assign these data sets manually, or you can allow the dialog to automatically assign the data sets in accordance with the recommended system layout described in z/OS Planning for Installation. The Modify System Layout function also allows you to merge and modify data sets in the work configuration. Through the dialogs view and change facility, you can merge and modify data sets based on a variety of criteria, including data set size, secondary space allocation, volume placement, link list placement, and whether SMS is to be used for data set management. For more information, see Chapter 8, Modifying the system layout, on page 73. A Specify catalogs for high-level qualifiers: Use this function to specify the catalogs for each high-level qualifier (HLQ). Data sets shipped with your order are cataloged in the systems normal order of catalog search when they are created. Data sets to be cataloged in user catalogs will have different high-level qualifiers. Aliases for those qualifiers will be created in the master catalog, referencing the user catalogs. For more information, see Chapter 9, Defining HLQ-to-catalog relationships, on page 125. Specify temporary aliases (SSAs) for catalogs: Use this function to define temporary high-level qualifiers (HLQs) for the data sets in your order. Initially, data set names include temporary HLQs, called system-specific aliases, or SSAs. Later, during the installation, the temporary HLQs are removed from the data set names. For more information, see Chapter 10, Defining system-specific aliases (SSAs), on page 133. Create and submit installation jobs: The dialog creates installation jobs based on the options you chose in previous steps of the dialog. Use this function to submit the jobs and track their execution. For more information, see Chapter 11, Submitting the installation jobs, on page 141. Save the current work configuration: During the installation of your order, you customize the shipped order configuration to suit your needs. To save yourself from having to repeat this customization for future orders, use this function to save your changes (see Chapter 12, Saving the configuration, on page 153).

SSA

Features of the dialog panels

This section describes the user interface features of the installation dialog that you should be familiar with before using it.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Introduction

Language support
The installation dialog is provided in U.S. English and Japanese. If the primary language specified in your TSO/E profile is neither of these languages, you must use the TSO/E PROFILE command to set the value of PLANGUAGE to either ENU for U.S. English, or JPN for Japanese. To select U.S. English, enter the following command:
PROFILE PLANGUAGE(ENU)

To select Japanese, enter the following command:

PROFILE PLANGUAGE(JPN)

ISPF edit CAPS setting

The dialog uses the ISPF editor when you select a job through the S or B line commands. ISPF Edit is called with CAPS set to OFF. This setting preserves your text input in the form in which you enter it (uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case). If you enter mixed case input in a job, the dialog does not convert your input to uppercase characters. You must ensure that lines that should contain only uppercase characters (like many JCL statements) do not contain lowercase characters. This is easily done with the ISPF Edit UC (Upper Case) line command. For more information about ISPF Edit, initial macros, CAPS settings, and ISPF Edit line commands, see z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros.

Use of color
The dialog uses color to identify key information on a panel, as follows: v Input data is displayed in red. You can change input data by typing over it. v Column headings are displayed in white and column separators are displayed in blue. v Synonyms for field names are shown as uppercase letters in the field name, displayed in pink. v Output data is yellow. Choose colors that provide good contrast for you. You can change the displayed colors in the ISPF Options settings.

Panel IDs
Enter the ISPF PANELID command from any command line to see the panel IDs in the upper left corner. You can find information about the panel and how it works by doing a softcopy search in this book for the panel ID or by looking for it in the index.

Panel display format

The sample displays in Figure 3 on page 10 and Figure 4 on page 10 show the general format of the dialogs panel interface.

Chapter 1. Introducing the installation dialog

Introduction

CustomPac ----------- Sample Panel Display MODE(TE) ------- ROW 1 TO 12 OF 99 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Primary Commands:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT VErbose) 1 Line Commands:(Browse Delete Edit Select) 2 S Order ID - -------3 MD010001 MD010022 MD010023 MD010032 MD010048 MD010057 MD010059 MD010068 MD010069 MD010070 MD010083 MD010101 MD010106 Pack ---SERV CRS SERV EXPDD SERV EXPDD SERV SERV SERV CPP CPP CPP CPP SREL ---Z038 C150 Z038 Z038 Z038 Z038 Z038 Z038 C150 Z038 Z038 Z038 Z038 CUSTomer ---------------------------------HERMANS ASSURANCE, LTD. EELLS ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN T. HOOD USABILITY, INC. LAMASTRO CONTAINERS AND SHIPPING DAYNE-TRONICS ESMAT TECHNICAL SUPPORT EELLS ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN HARRIGAN MANAGEMENT CORP. WALLE BUILDING AND SUPPLY CO. B-MAZURIK FINANCIAL SERVICES CORNELL LEGAL SERVICES LANDER OBRIEN PARTNERSHIP RONDOUT CREATIVE SREVICES STatus -----R R F R R R R R A R F I R

Figure 3. Panel displayed in terse format

You can display many of the dialogs panels in either of two formats, as follows: v Terse Mode. Only one line of information is displayed for each item, as shown in Figure 3. Most panel displays use this mode. v Verbose Mode. Multiple lines of information are displayed for each item, as shown in Figure 4. Panels that can be displayed in either mode display the commands that allow you to switch between modes.
CustomPac ----------- Sample Panel Display MODE(VE) -------- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 99 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Primary Commands:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT TErse) 1 Line Commands:(Browse Delete Edit Select) 2 S Order ID Pack SREL CUSTomer STatus CTRY CONTACT 3 - -------- ---- ---- -------------------------------------------MD010059 SERV Z038 EELLS ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN C724 J. Eells Updated ON 2002/01/01 By EELLS - -------- ---- ---- -------------------------------------------MD010069 SERV C150 WALLE BUILDING AND SUPPLY CO. C616 M. Walle Updated ON 2002/02/27 By MWALLE - -------- ---- ---- -------------------------------------------MD010023 SERV Z038 T. HOOD USABILITY, INC. C001 T. Hood Updated ON 2002/03/29 By TLHOOD - -------- ---- ---- --------------------------------------------

-------INSTALLED -------RECEIVED -------INSTALLED --------

Figure 4. Panel displayed in verbose format

Figure 3 and Figure 4 show the three significant areas of a panel display: v 1 Primary commands v 2 Line commands v 3 Display areas (column headings and synonyms, and data).

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Introduction
Each of these areas is described in the sections that follow.

Primary commands
Primary commands appear on the dialog panels in area 1 . There are several common primary commands that you can use for most panels. Not all commands, however, are available for every panel. Primary commands that are valid for a particular panel are listed in the panel. See Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165 for a complete description of the primary commands. ? Invokes the help facility, if available, for the current panel. See Help facility on page 12 and HELP on page 183 for more information. Searches the field specified on the SET command for a specified character string. If a match is found, the panel entry that contains the character string is displayed at the top of the scrollable area. See FIND on page 181 for a complete description of the FIND command. Searches the field specified on the SET command for a character string that satisfies a specified search argument. If a match is located, the panel entry that contains the character string is displayed at the top of the scrollable area. See LOCATE on page 184 for a complete description of the LOCATE command. This command repeats the last FIND or LOCATE command, searching forward. See NEXT on page 186 for a complete description of the NEXT command. This command repeats the last FIND or LOCATE command, searching backward. See PREVIOUS on page 189 for a complete description of the PREVIOUS command. Specifies the field to be acted on by the FIND and LOCATE primary commands. See SET on page 190 for a complete description of the SET command. For panels with sortable fields, the SORT command specifies the field by which the display should be sorted and, optionally, whether the sorted field should be displayed in ascending or descending order. See SORT on page 191 for a complete description of the SORT command. The TERSE command displays the panel with only one line of information for each item. See TERSE on page 193 for a complete description of the TERSE command. The VERBOSE command displays the panel with multiple lines of information for each item. See VERBOSE on page 194 for a complete description of the VERBOSE command.

FIND

LOCATE

SET

SORT

TERSE

VERBOSE

Line commands
Line commands (shown in area 2 ) are specific to the panel being displayed. Enter line commands in the S (selection) column in area 3 . Some panels that display lists allow you to use the following line commands: B (browse), S (select), E (edit), I (insert) and D (delete). The effect of each command is generally consistent throughout the dialog, but can vary for some panels. For example, B means browse on most panels, with the exception of some panels in which it means Back-up. When a command variation exists for a particular panel, this book notes the variation.
Chapter 1. Introducing the installation dialog

Introduction
In Figure 3 and Figure 4 on page 10, the column for entering line commands is indicated by 3 . For panels that do not allow line commands, as in output only displays, this column is omitted.

Help facility
Many of the dialog panels have a help facility. When you invoke help, you can scroll through information. You can set a PF key to HELP or ?. Or, you can simply enter HELP or ? at any time to invoke the help facility.

Diagnostic messages
For descriptions of messages that can be displayed during error conditions, see Appendix B, Diagnostic messages, on page 195.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Chapter 2. Installing and starting the dialog

If you are installing a ServerPac for the first time, you must install the installation dialog on your system; see Installing the dialogs on page 16. For subsequent orders, you do not need to reinstall the dialog because IBM ships dialog updates with each order. If you need to update the dialogs, see Updating your dialogs on page 14. Restriction: However, if your order was built using Dialog Level 17 (or, eventually, higher) and your current dialog is at or below Dialog Level 16, you will need to update the dialog before using it. To determine whether you must update the dialog, start the dialog and look at the first panel {CPPPPOLI}. If it says, This dialog supports electronic delivery. at the bottom, you do not need to update your dialogs. If the panel does not include that sentence, then you do need to update your dialogs. See Updating your dialogs on page 14. Some installation jobs must be run on your target system. If you want to use the dialog to help manage these jobs, there are additional considerations for setting up the dialog on your driving system (see Allocating and cataloging the dialog data sets).

Summary of tasks
Installing and starting the installation dialog involves the following activities: 1. Plan for where the dialog data sets are to be loaded and cataloged. See Allocating and cataloging the dialog data sets. 2. If you are installing the dialogs for the first time: a. Copy or download the LOADRIM job to your driving systems DASD. See Installing the dialogs on page 16. b. Run the LOADRIM job to load the dialog data sets onto the driving systems DASD. Note: For tape orders only: After installing a new copy of the dialog, you must use the first system and distribution tape to run the first RECEIVE job. The first system and distribution tape is from the same order used to run the LOADRIM job that installed the dialog. After the first RECEIVE job is run, RECEIVE jobs can be run in any order. 3. If you are updating your dialogs: a. Copy or download the UPDATE or EUPDATE job to your driving systems DASD. See Updating your dialogs on page 14. b. Run the UPDATE or EUPDATE job to load the updated dialog data sets onto your driving system. 4. Select a method of invoking the dialog. See Starting the dialog on page 19. This chapter describes these activities, and includes sample jobs for your use.

Allocating and cataloging the dialog data sets

You use the dialog to create the jobs for installing your order. For a z/OS order, you run many of these jobs on your driving system, and the rest on your new target system. For a subsystem order, all jobs are run on the driving system.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

Installing and starting the dialog

After IPLing the target system, you can use the dialog on that system to determine which job to submit next, and to display the results of each job. You will find it much easier to access the dialog from the target system if the data sets you create for the dialog (the master dialog data sets) are cataloged in a user catalog and reside on a volume that is accessible to both the driving system and the target system. Use a unique high-level qualifier for the data sets, so that alias entries in the driving system and target system master catalogs can refer to the user catalog. Catalog the following data sets in a user catalog. We suggest that Qualifier be MASTER to distinguish the master dialogs from the order dialogs: v CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPLOAD - Load Modules v CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPCENU - Clist/Rexx execs v CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPEENU - CustomPac messages - VSAM v CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPHENU - CustomPac dialog help - VSAM v CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPMENU - messages v CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPPENU - panels v CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPSENU - skeletons v CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPTENU - tables v CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPVENU - order inventory - VSAM If the dialogs data sets are to be SMS-managed, assign them to a management class (MGMTCLAS) that does not allow the dialog data sets to be migrated unless the SMS and DFSMShsm environments will be shared between the driving system and target system. When allocating the dialog data sets, do not convert them to PDSE format. In addition to the SCPPnENU data sets, the following dialog data sets must remain in their original formats (PDS or PS):
Table 1. Dialog data sets must remain in their original formats Dialog data set userid.CPPTEMPx.SCPPWORK hlq.orderid.LOG hlq.orderid.REPORT(MERGE) Required format PS (physical sequential) PS (physical sequential) PDS (partitioned data set)

The final steps for porting the dialog to the target system are described in ServerPac: Installing Your Order, in the chapter that describes how to IPL the target system.

Updating your dialogs

This step is only required if you have existing Master Dialogs where the sentence This dialog supports electronic delivery. is not displayed on the primary ServerPac panel (CPPPPOLI). For orders delivered on tape, IBM provides the dialog update job as member UPDATE in data set SYS1.orderid.DOCLIB, where orderid is the IBM-supplied number for your order. See Copying the UPDATE job from tape on page 15. For orders delivered electronically, IBM provides the dialog update job as EUPDATE which can be downloaded from an FTP server. See Downloading the EUPDATE job from an FTP server on page 16.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Installing and starting the dialog

In addition, you must convert the SCPPEENU and SCPPHENU data sets for old orders from sequential to VSAM format if you want to either display or install these orders. You can use JCL CPPCVINV to convert VSAM data set for any old orders so that they can be used with the new dialogs.

Copying the UPDATE job from tape

To update the dialogs on your driving system, you must first copy the UPDATE job to your driving system. Perform the following steps:

Create a job to copy the UPDATE job from SYS1.orderid.DOCLIB, where orderid is the IBM-supplied number for your order. The SYS1.orderid.DOCLIB data set is the sixth file on the tape. Figure 5 shows a job you can use:

//EXTRACT JOB <JOB statement info goes here...> //* //STEP01 EXEC PGM=IEBCOPY //* //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* //* //IDOC DD DISP=SHR,DSN=SYS1.orderid.DOCLIB,LABEL=(06,SL), // VOL=SER=tapeser,UNIT=tapeunit //ODOC DD DSN=work.library.jcl, // DISP=(NEW,CATLG,DELETE), // VOL=SER=volser,UNIT=SYSALLDA, // SPACE=(9600,(240,30,20)) //* //SYSIN DD * COPY INDD=IDOC,OUTDD=ODOC S M=UPDATE /*

Figure 5. Copying the UPDATE job from the system and distribution tape

_______________________________________________________________

Modify the following values for your order: orderid tapeser Order number, which can be found on the cover of ServerPac: Installing Your Order. Volume serial for the first system and distribution tape shipped with your order, which can be found on the external label and in Chapter 2 of ServerPac: Installing Your Order. Generic or esoteric name of the tape device that you will use to read the system and distribution tape. For example, if you ordered your ServerPac on a 3590 tape cartridge, this is the device you use to read the 3590 tape. Volume serial number of the DASD volume on which the DOCLIB data set is to be created. If UNIT specifies an esoteric name for a DASD pool to be used for permanent data sets, you can remove the VOL=SER= parameters of the DD statement instead of supplying this value. If your installation does not permit the use of SYSALLDA, change this value to an appropriate esoteric or generic name. Data set name for the UPDATE job.

tapeunit

volser

SYSALLDA ODOC

_______________________________________________________________

Run the EXTRACT job.

Chapter 2. Installing and starting the dialog

Installing and starting the dialog

_______________________________________________________________

Before running the UPDATE job to update your master dialogs you must customize this job. Make the following modifications: CustomPac.Qualifier The high-level qualifier of your master dialog data sets. volser The volume serial number of the DASD volume to be used to allocate the master dialog data sets. tapeser The volume serial for the first system and distribution tape shipped with your order, which can be found on the external label and in Chapter 2 of ServerPac: Installing Your Order. tapeunit The generic or esoteric name of the tape device that you will use to read the system and distribution tape. For example, if you ordered your ServerPac on a 3590 tape cartridge, this is the device you use to read the 3590 tape. _______________________________________________________________

Run the UPDATE job. _______________________________________________________________

Downloading the EUPDATE job from an FTP server

To update the dialogs on your driving system, you must first copy the EUPDATE job from an FTP server:

Download the EUPDATE job to a workstation (for example, using File --> Save As as in a browser) or copy it directly from the download FTP site. In either case, you must copy the EUPDATE job to your driving system. _______________________________________________________________ Before using the EUPDATE job to update your master dialog data sets you must allocate and mount a UNIX file system to contain the destination directory and its files, and customize the job. Replace the JOB statement with a JOB statement that is valid for your installation and supply values for the following: SET PATH Specify the path for the directory in which the CustomPac dialog and order information will be stored.

CustomPac.Qualifier The high-level qualifier of your master dialog data sets. The volume serial number of the DASD volume to be used to allocate the master dialog data sets. _______________________________________________________________ volser

Run the EUPDATE job. _______________________________________________________________

Installing the dialogs

To install the dialogs on your driving system for the first time, you must first copy the LOADRIM job to your driving system. Then, use LOADRIM to load the rest of the dialog data sets onto your driving systems DASD.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Installing and starting the dialog

Copying the LOADRIM job from tape

For orders delivered on tape, IBM provides the LOADRIM job as member LOADRIM in data set SYS1.orderid.DOCLIB, where orderid is the IBM-supplied number for your order. The SYS1.orderid.DOCLIB data set is the sixth file on the tape, which has a standard label (SL). Copy LOADRIM from SYS1.orderid.DOCLIB, as follows: 1. Create a job to copy the LOADRIM job to your driving system. Figure 6 shows a job that you can use.
//EXTRACT JOB <JOB statement info goes here...> //* //STEP01 EXEC PGM=IEBCOPY //* //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* //* //IDOC DD DISP=SHR,DSN=SYS1.orderid.DOCLIB,LABEL=(06,SL), // VOL=SER=tapeser,UNIT=tapeunit //ODOC DD DSN=work.library.jcl, // DISP=(NEW,CATLG,DELETE), // VOL=SER=volser,UNIT=SYSALLDA, // SPACE=(9600,(240,30,20)) //* //SYSIN DD * COPY INDD=IDOC,OUTDD=ODOC S M=LOADRIM /*

Figure 6. Copying the LOADRIM job from the system and distribution tape

_______________________________________________________________ 2. Modify the following values for your order: orderid tapeser Order number, which can be found on the cover of ServerPac: Installing Your Order. Volume serial for the first system and distribution tape, which can be found on the external label and in Chapter 2 of ServerPac: Installing Your Order. Generic or esoteric name of the tape device that you will use to read the system and distribution tape. For example, if you ordered your ServerPac on a 3590 tape cartridge, this is the device you use to read the 3590 tape. Volume serial number of the DASD volume on which the DOCLIB data set is to be created. If UNIT specifies an esoteric name for a DASD pool to be used for permanent data sets, you can remove the VOL=SER= parameters of the DD statement instead of supplying this value. If your installation does not permit the use of SYSALLDA, change this value to an appropriate esoteric or generic name.

tapeunit

volser

SYSALLDA

ODOC Data set name for the LOADRIM job. _______________________________________________________________ 3. Run the EXTRACT job. _______________________________________________________________ 4. Before using the LOADRIM job to allocate and load the master dialog data sets, you must customize the job. Replace the JOB statement with a JOB statement that is valid for your installation and supply values for the following:
Chapter 2. Installing and starting the dialog

Installing and starting the dialog

CustomPac.Qualifier High-level qualifier to be used for the master dialog data sets. Choose a unique high-level qualifier. IBM recommends that you not use an order number as part of CustomPac.Qualifier. Also, do not use any SSA qualifier that you plan to use for any data sets that are included in the order. Finally, you should not use SYS1, because you should catalog the data sets in a user catalog to assure portability between systems. For example, you could choose a CustomPac.Qualifier like CPAC.MASTER or IBM.INSTALL, but should avoid names like SYS1.CPAC and INSTALL.order_number. Each order includes order-related dialog data sets. You will need another unique qualifier for each orders data sets, which must be different from the one you choose for CustomPac.Qualifier. volser tapeser Volume serial number of the DASD volume to be used to allocate the master dialog VSAM data sets. Volume serial for the first system and distribution tape, which can be found on the external label and in Chapter 2 of ServerPac: Installing Your Order. Specify the same volume serial that you specified for tapeser when copying the LOADRIM job in the previous section. Generic or esoteric name of the tape device that you will use to read the system and distribution tape. For example, if you ordered your ServerPac on a 3590 tape cartridge, this is the device you use to read the 3590 tape. Order number, which can be found on the cover of ServerPac: Installing Your Order.

tapeunit

orderid SYSDA

If your installation does not permit the use of SYSDA, change this value to an appropriate esoteric or generic name for permanent data sets. _______________________________________________________________ 5. Run the LOADRIM job. _______________________________________________________________ For complete tape layout information, see Chapter 2 of ServerPac: Installing Your Order.

Downloading the LOADRIM job from an FTP server

For orders downloaded from an FTP server, IBM provides the LOADRIM job as a file on the FTP server.

Download the LOADRIM job to a workstation (for example, using File --> Save As as in a browser) or copy it directly from the download FTP site. In either case, you must copy the LOADRIM job to your driving system. _______________________________________________________________ Before using the LOADRIM job to allocate and load your master dialog data sets you must allocate and mount a UNIX file system to contain the destination directory and its files, and customize the job. Replace the JOB statement with a JOB statement that is valid for your installation and supply values for the following:

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Installing and starting the dialog

SET PATH Specify the path for the directory in which the CustomPac dialog and order information will be stored. CustomPac Qualifier The high-level qualifier of your master dialog data sets. volser The volume serial number of the DASD volume to be used to allocate the master dialog data sets. _______________________________________________________________

Run the LOADRIM job. _______________________________________________________________

Starting the dialog

After you have installed the installation dialog, you can start it in any of the following ways: v Option 1: Use a CLIST with LIBDEF statements on page 20 v Option 2: Start the dialog from the ISPF primary option menu on page 21 v Option 3: Run CPPCISPF from the TSO/E command line on page 22. Using the dialog in split screen mode: You can use ISPFs split screen mode to run other applications while using the dialog, but the dialog does not support being used in more than one logical session at a time. Also, the dialog temporarily sets your TSO/E profile to NOPREFIX. Ensuring a sufficient region size: The dialog requires a minimum region size of 9 megabytes (MB). When you log on to TSO/E to use the dialog, ensure that the TSO/E logon panel specifies a value of 9000 or greater in the size field, as shown in the example in Figure 7.
------------------------------- TSO/E LOGON ------------------------------Enter LOGON parameters below: Userid ==> IBMUSER New Password ===> Group Ident ===> RACF LOGON parameter

Password ==> Procedure ==> IKJACCNT Acct Nmbr ==> Size Perform ==> 9000 ==>

Command ==> Enter an S before each option desired below: -Nomail -Nonotice S -Reconnect

-OIDcard

PF1/PF13 ==>Help PF3/PF15 ==>Logoff PA1 ==>Attention PA2 ==>Reshow You may request specific help information by entering a ? in any entry field

Figure 7. Panel: TSO/E logon

Chapter 2. Installing and starting the dialog

Installing and starting the dialog

If this much private area storage is not available below 16 MB, log on with a region size greater than 16 MB (for example, SIZE = 17000). Doing so causes the system to use private area storage above 16 MB. Allowing for the allocation of additional data sets: When allocating additional data sets to a TSO/E session using CLISTs or LIBDEFs, ensure that you have a sufficiently high value specified for the DYNAMNBR parameter on the EXEC statement in your logon proc. DYNAMNBR defines the number of data sets that can be dynamically allocated at the same time. If this value is too low, the data set allocations will fail. For more information about using DYNAMNBR with logon procs, see the following: v z/OS TSO/E Customization, SA22-7783 v z/OS MVS JCL Users Guide, SA22-7598 v z/OS MVS JCL Reference, SA22-7597. Ensure that SCEERUN is in the program search order: When you allocate the dialogs data sets to use the dialog, ensure that the SCEERUN data set is placed in the program search order the system uses for you. If the SCEERUN data set is not in the link list, add it to the following: v STEPLIB concatenation in your logon proc, ahead of any other libraries that contain PL/I run-time modules (such as PLI.PLIBASE or PLI.PLITASK) v The JOBLIB concatenation used in installation jobs that use a JOBLIB concatenation ahead of any other libraries that contain PL/I run-time modules (such as PLI.PLIBASE or PLI.PLITASK) v STEPLIB concatenations used in installation jobs that do not use a JOBLIB concatenation ahead of any other libraries that contain PL/I run-time modules (such as PLI.PLIBASE or PLI.PLITASK).

Option 1: Use a CLIST with LIBDEF statements

Copy and modify the sample member CPPCSAMP in data set SCPPCENU, as shown in Figure 8 on page 21. Run the CLIST under TSO/E Option 6, as in the following example:
exec OBRIEN.MD053718.SCPPCENU(CPPCSAMP)

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Installing and starting the dialog

PROC 0 DEBUG /*------------------------------------------------------------------*/ /* SAMPLE CLIST TO SETUP ENVIRONMENT AND START CPAC DIALOG */ /* */ /* NOTE: Change CustomPac.Qualifier to your environment */ /*------------------------------------------------------------------*/ IF &DEBUG = DEBUG THEN CONTROL MSG LIST CONLIST SYMLIST FLUSH ELSE CONTROL NOMSG ATTN LOGOFF /* IF ATTENTION INTERRUPT OCCURS /* THEN LOGOFF */ */

/*-----------------------------------------------------------*/ /* ALLOCATE (CPP) APPLICATION LIBRARIES */ /*-----------------------------------------------------------*/ ISPEXEC CONTROL ERRORS CANCEL /* ERROR MODE IS SET */ /* DIALOG TERMINATE ON ERROR */ ALTLIB ACTIVATE APPLICATION (CLIST) + DATASET(CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPCENU) UNCOND SET &ALTLIBRC = &LASTCC; IF &ALTLIBRC NE 0 THEN + WRITE &SYSICMD: ALTLIB(ACTIVATE) RC = &ALTLIBRC; ELSE DO ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPMLIB DATASET ID(CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPMENU) ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPPLIB DATASET ID(CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPPENU) ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPSLIB DATASET ID(CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPSENU) ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPTLIB DATASET ID(CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPTENU) ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPLLIB DATASET ID(CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPLOAD) /*--------------------------------------------------------*/ /* START CPAC DIALOG */ /*--------------------------------------------------------*/ ISPEXEC SELECT CMD(%CPPCISPF CustomPac.Qualifier) NEWAPPL(CPP) PASSLIB /*--------------------------------------------------------*/ /* CLEANUP */ /*--------------------------------------------------------*/ ISPEXEC ISPEXEC ISPEXEC ISPEXEC ISPEXEC LIBDEF LIBDEF LIBDEF LIBDEF LIBDEF ISPMLIB ISPPLIB ISPSLIB ISPTLIB ISPLLIB

ALTLIB DEACTIVATE APPLICATION(CLIST) SET &ALTLIBRC = &LASTCC; IF &ALTLIBRC NE 0 THEN + WRITE &SYSICMD: ALTLIB(DEACTIVATE) RC = &ALTLIBRC; END EXIT CODE(0)

Figure 8. Starting the dialog: Using a CLIST with LIBDEF statements

Option 2: Start the dialog from the ISPF primary option menu
To start the dialog from the ISPF primary option menu, use a TSO/E logon proc to include the dialog ISPF libraries, as described in Option 3: Run CPPCISPF from the TSO/E command line on page 22. Then, modify an existing ISPF selection panel (for example, ISR@PRIM) to include the following:

Chapter 2. Installing and starting the dialog

Installing and starting the dialog

)BODY C CustomPac - Manage and Install CustomPac Orders )PROC &ZSEL = TRANS(&ZCMD,; ..... ..... C,CMD(%CPPCISPF CustomPac.Qualifier) .....)

After making this change, you can start the CustomPac dialog by selecting option C on the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
)BODY C CustomPac - Manage and Install CustomPac Orders )PROC &ZSEL = TRANS(&ZCMD,; ..... ..... C,CMD(%CPPCISPF CustomPac.Qualifier) .....)

Option 3: Run CPPCISPF from the TSO/E command line

The CPPCISPF CLIST is shipped with the dialog in the SCPPCENU library. To run it, you can build a TSO/E logon proc to include the dialogs ISPF libraries: SCPPCENU, SCPPPENU, SCPPMENU, SCPPSENU, SCPPTENU, and SCPPLOAD. Figure 9 shows a sample logon proc.
//CPPUSER EXEC //* //SYSPRINT DD //SYSTERM DD //SYSIN DD //SYSHELP DD // DD //SYSEXEC DD // DD //SYSPROC DD // DD // DD //ISPPLIB DD // DD // DD //ISPMLIB DD // DD // DD //ISPSLIB DD // DD // DD //ISPTLIB DD // DD // DD //ISPLLIB DD // DD PGM=IKJEFT01,DYNAMNBR=99 TERM=TS,SYSOUT=* TERM=TS,SYSOUT=* TERM=TS DISP=SHR,DSN=SYS1.HELP DISP=SHR,DSN=ISP.SISPHELP DISP=SHR,DSN=ISP.SISPEXEC DISP=SHR,DSN=.... DISP=SHR,DSN=ISP.SISPCLIB DISP=SHR,DSN=CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPCENU DISP=SHR,DSN=.... DISP=SHR,DSN=ISP.SISPPENU DISP=SHR,DSN=CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPPENU DISP=SHR,DSN=.... DISP=SHR,DSN=ISP.SISPMENU DISP=SHR,DSN=CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPMENU DISP=SHR,DSN=.... DISP=SHR,DSN=ISP.SISPSENU DISP=SHR,DSN=CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPSENU DISP=SHR,DSN=.... DISP=SHR,DSN=ISP.SISPTENU DISP=SHR,DSN=CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPTENU DISP=SHR,DSN=..... DISP=SHR,DSN=CustomPac.Qualifier.SCPPLOAD DISP=SHR,DSN=.....

Figure 9. Sample TSO/E logon proc

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Installing and starting the dialog

After logging on to TSO/E, you can start the installation dialog by entering the CPPCISPF command from the TSO/E Options Processor panel, as shown in Figure 10.
--------------------------- TSO COMMAND PROCESSOR --------------------------ENTER TSO COMMAND, CLIST OR REXX EXEC BELOW: ===> CPPCISPF CustomPac.Qualifier

Figure 10. Starting the dialog with the TSO/E options processor

Chapter 2. Installing and starting the dialog

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Chapter 3. Receiving a new order

Required migration step
If you are using a dialog whose Package Version is less than 17.00.00, you must migrate the dialog to Package Version 17.00.00 (or higher) before proceeding. This is a one-time migration action. An easy way to determine whether your dialog is at the correct level is to examine panel CPPPPOLI, the first panel displayed when the dialog starts, and look for the text This dialog supports electronic delivery near the bottom (see Figure 11). If this text appears on panel CPPPPOLI, your dialog is already at the correct level and no migration step is required. Note: Your dialog must display this statement, even if you do not intend to use electronic delivery. If the migration step is required, then: v If your order was delivered on tape, see Updating your dialogs on page 14 for instructions on copying UPDATE to your driving system. v If you are downloading your order from an FTP server, or copying it directly from the download FTP site, see Updating your dialogs on page 14 for instructions on downloading EUPDATE to your driving system. In addition, the SCPPEENU and SCPPHENU data sets for old orders must be converted from sequential to VSAM format if you wish to either display or install these orders. The sample job in the CPPCVINV member of the SYS1.orderid.DOCLIB data set will convert these data sets.

Beginning the receive process

To begin receiving the order, select option R from the Main Installation panel (Figure 11) and press Enter.
CPPPPOLI --------------- IBM Corporation 1990-2007 ---------------------OPTION ==> R CustomPac Order Management Menu R I RECEIVE INSTALL - Receive an Order - Install an Order (Leave blank to list uninstalled orders)

Order Number ==> D DISPLAY

- Select Orders to Display

Master dialog data set qualifiers: CPAC.MASTER This dialog supports electronic delivery.

Figure 11. Panel: Main installation

The dialog displays the Receive an Order panel (Figure 12 on page 26) for you to enter information about the order.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

Receiving a new order

CPPP610A --------------------- Receive an Order ------------------------------COMMAND ==> Receive the order from ==> F - File system S - Server T - Tape

Order Number

==> MD053718

----------------- Order Dialog Data Set Allocation Information --------------Data Set Qualifiers ==> STOB4.MD053718 Volume Serial - or STORCLAS ==> R12345 ==> (Must be unique)

(Blank for SMS-managed data sets) (Blank for non-SMS-managed data sets)

Dialog CLIST Record Format ==> FB (FB or VB) Press Enter to continue or End to cancel

Figure 12. Panel: Receive an order

In the Receive an Order panel, fill in the fields as follows: Receive the order from Enter either S for Server, F for File System, or T for Tape to specify where the ServerPac order resides. Server indicates that the ServerPac order is to be received from an FTP server. Tape indicates that the ServerPac order is to be received from tape. File System indicates that you used the Store and Forward download method (download to workstation) and then uploaded the order to the host Download Filesystem outside the Dialog. The RECEIVE job generated by this option will retrieve the order directly from the Filesystem and not attempt a download. Order number Enter your order number, as it was supplied by IBM (two alphabetic characters followed by six numerics). In Figure 12, for example, the order number is MD053718. To find your order number: v For tape orders, check the cover of ServerPac: Installing Your Order. If that book is not at hand, you should look at the packing list or the printed label on the first system and distribution tape to find the order number. v For internet orders, the ServerPac: Installing Your Order book is not shipped in hardcopy format; therefore, you can find your order number in the Dialog Data file provided on the ShopzSeries Download Page. Data set qualifiers Enter the high-level qualifier (without quotation marks) that you plan to use to allocate the order libraries.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Receiving a new order

IBM recommends that you include your order number as part of the qualifier to ensure that it is unique. For example, if your order is MD053718, you can specify Data Set Qualifiers ==> STOB4.MD053718. Do not use the CustomPac.Qualifier. Consider placing all of the orders data sets on the same volume as the master dialog data sets to make it easier to port the dialog to the target system. For more information, see Allocating and cataloging the dialog data sets on page 13. Volume serial or STORCLAS Enter the serial number of the DASD volume that will receive the order data sets or a valid storage class (for SMS managed data sets) to be used to allocate the data sets. Dialog CLIST record format Enter VB if you want to use the variable-block versions of the dialogs CLISTs, which are supplied in the order in both FB and VB formats. FB is the initial default, but any value specified here is saved in the users profile (ISPPROF) data set when the Enter key is pressed and becomes the new default value. When you press Enter, the next panel displayed will be either the: Download server information panel (Figure 15 on page 30) if Server is specified to receive the order, Receive an order from the file system panel (Figure 14 on page 29) if File system is specified to receive the order, or Receive an order from tape panel (Figure 13 on page 28) if Tape is specified to receive the order.

Receiving an order from tape

If you select the Tape option on the Receive an Order panel, the dialog displays the Receive an Order From Tape panel (Figure 13 on page 28) for you to enter the information needed to load the orders data sets from tape.

Chapter 3. Receiving a new order

Receiving a new order

CPPP6101 ----------------- Receive an Order From Tape ------------------------COMMAND ==>

"First System Tape Volume Serial" Volume Serial ==> M001AA Tape Unit ==> 3590 (Generic or esoteric tape unit name)

Press Enter to continue or End to cancel

Figure 13. Panel: Receive an order from tape

In the Receive an order from tape panel, fill in the fields as follows: First system tape volume serial Enter the volume serial number of the IBM-supplied tape that contains the order-related installation material. This is the tape labeled with the order number and volume serial of the first system tape in the format MxxxAA, where xxx is the order number. The exact label for the system and distribution tape can be found in ServerPac: Installing Your Order. Note: After installing a new copy of the dialog, you must use the first system and distribution tape to run the first RECEIVE job. The first system and distribution tape is from the same order used to run the LOADRIM job that installed the dialog. After the first RECEIVE job is run, RECEIVE jobs can be run in any order. Tape unit Enter the type of the device on which the order tape is to be mounted, or a suitable, locally-defined esoteric unit name.

Press Enter. The panel in Figure 19 on page 34 is displayed. The next several panels are for downloaded orders only, you can skip ahead to the panel shown in Generating the RECEIVE job on page 33.

Receiving an order from the file system

If you select the File System option on the Receive an Order panel, the dialog displays the Receive an Order From the File System panel (Figure 14 on page 29) for you to enter the information needed to load the orders data sets from the file system. This option is used when you have used the Store and Forward download method (download to workstation) and then uploaded the order to the host Download File system outside the Dialog. The RECEIVE job generated by this option retrieves the order directly from the file system and doesnt attempt a download. When using the option to receive an order electronically from a file

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Receiving a new order

system you need to make the electronic images local to the host (driving system). The ServerPac installation expects the new directory names be in the format (content and order in lowercase):
/<ordernum>.order /<ordernum>.content

Where ordernum is the ServerPac order number obtained from the Required information for ServerPac Dialog link on the ShopzSeries Download page.
CPPP610G------------ Receive an Order From the File system ------------------COMMAND ==> Target Directory ==> /service/very/big/omvs/filesystem/for/eserverpac/zosv1r6/v2

Press Enter to continue or End to cancel

Figure 14. Panel: Receive an order from the file system

In the Receive an Order from the File System panel, fill the field as follows: Target directory Enter the path name of the directory from which order has been stored locally on your host system Press Enter, the Edit JOB Statement panel (Figure 19 on page 34) displays.

Receiving an order from an FTP server

If you select the S erver option on the Receive an Order panel, the dialog displays the Download Server Information panel (Figure 15 on page 30) for you to enter the information needed to load the orders data sets from the FTP server.

Chapter 3. Receiving a new order

Receiving a new order

CPPP610B ------------------ Download Server Information ----------------------COMMAND ==> Enter either the FTP Servers Name or Address below: ==>

Source Directory ==> /ibm/ftp/server User ID Password ==> Userid ==> Password

Hash Value ==> 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 (40 Characters) Press Enter to continue or End to cancel

Figure 15. Panel: Download server information

In the Download Server Information panel, fill in the fields as follows: FTP servers name or address Enter the name or address of the FTP server from which the order is to be downloaded. This value is required. The FTP server may be an IBM server or it may be an intermediate server to which the order has been transferred from an IBM server. Source directory Enter the name of the directory on the FTP server that contains the order. This value is required. User ID Password Hash value Enter a valid user ID to be used to log on to the FTP server. This value is required. Enter the password for the user ID. This value is required. Enter the hash value to be used for this download. This value is required. If an intermediate server is used, the hash value must be the same as the one used for transferring the order from the IBM server. Note: When downloading from an IBM server, it is expected that most users will copy and paste most or all of the data to be entered on this panel from the Dialog Data file provided on the ShopzSeries download page. Data entered on this panel is case sensitive. Press Enter. The Download File System Information panel (Figure 16 on page 31) is displayed.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Receiving a new order

CPPP610C --------------- Download File System Information --------------------COMMAND ==> Target Directory ==> /service/very/big/omvs/filesystem/for/eserverpac/zosv1r6/v2 Allocate a new file system data set ==> NO (Yes or No)

-------------------------- New File System Data Set Information ---------------Data Set Name ==> OMVS.ZOSV1R6.FILE.SYSTEM Mount Point ==> /service/very/big/omvs/filesystem/for/eserverpac File System Type ==> HFS (HFS or zFS) Primary Space ==> 500 (Minimum 500 cylinders) Secondary Space ==> (Secondary space recommended) Volume Serial ==> (Leave blank for SMS) - or STORCLAS ==> USSCLASS (STORCLAS required for multivolume data set) Press Enter to continue or End to cancel

Figure 16. Panel: Download file system information

In the Download File System Information panel, fill in the following fields: Target directory Enter the path name of the target directory into which the order is to be downloaded. This value is required.

Allocate a new file system data set Enter Yes to allocate a new file system data set or No to use an existing file system data set. This value is required. If Yes is specified for Allocate a new file system data set, then fill in the following fields: Data set name Mount point File system type Primary space Specify a standard data set name for the file system data set. Specify the path name of the mount point for the file system data set. Specify either HFS (for a hierarchical file system) or ZFS (for a zSeries file system). HFS is the default. You can find the order size in the Dialog Data file provided on the ShopzSeries Download Page. This can be used in the algorithm to determine the space required in the filesystem. You can specify a primary space value of 500 to 99999 cylinders. The default is the minimum value, which is 500 cylinders. Guideline: On a 3390 DASD, 1.4 cylinders are required for each MB(Megabytes). On a 3380 DASD, 1.7 cylinders are required per MB. To assure adequate work space, 500 cylinders should be added to the amount of the space calculated.

Chapter 3. Receiving a new order

Receiving a new order

Example: On a 3390 DASD, an order that required 5GB could be downloaded and processed using a file system that had: ((5000MB) * (1.4 cylinders/MB)) + 500 = 7500 cylinders. Secondary space Specify a secondary space value of 1 to 99999 cylinders, or leave blank if no secondary space is desired. Guideline: Secondary space is recommended. Specifying space for this file system requires that you perform a calculation and estimate the size of the largest file requiring a workspace within the file system as described above. There is opportunity for error in this calculation, and no way to know exactly how much workspace will be required. Your chances of success are much better if you specify secondary space. Volume serial For a non-SMS-managed data set, specify the volume serial for an online volume. For an SMS-managed data set, leave this field blank. For a SMS managed data set, specify a valid storage class to be used to allocate the data set.

STORCLAS

Note: If this panel has previously been used to supply information, the fields on the panel are primed with information previously supplied for this order number (if any), the last input from this user ID (if any), or the most recent input available. Press Enter. The Firewall Commands panel (Figure 17) is displayed.
CPPP610D -------------------- Firewall Commands ------------------------------COMMAND ==>

Do you want to enter Firewall Commands? ==> NO

(Yes or No)

Press Enter to continue or End to cancel

Figure 17. Panel: Firewall commands

On the Firewall Commands panel, specify either YES or NO.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Receiving a new order

If you specify NO (the default), you are indicating that no firewall commands are required by the FTP server from which you plan to download your order. In this case, when you press Enter, the JOB Statement Information panel (CPPP6103) is displayed. If you specify YES and press Enter, an ISPF Edit panel is displayed with a data set member containing skeleton firewall commands. Initially, this member appears as shown in Figure 18.
CPPPEDIF - MD053718 ----------------------------------------- COLUMNS 000 000 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> HALF ****** ***************************** Top of Data ****************************** 000001  000005  000006  000007  000003  000009 <!-XML comment start and end tags to specify --> 000010 <!-firewall information. --> 000011 <!-2. The tags here are defined by SMP/E. For --> 000012 <!-information about them, see SMP/E Commands. --> 000013 <!-3. Do not include <CLIENT> tags in this data set. --> 000014 <!-They are built automatically by the dialog. --> 000015  000017 <!-<SERVER --> 000018 <!-host="host name|host ip address" --> 000019 <!-user="userid" --> 000020 <!-pw="password" --> 000021 <!-port="port number" --> 000022 <!-account="account information"> --> 000023 <!-</SERVER> --> 000024 <!-<FIRECMD> --> 000025 <!-firewall specific commands --> 000026 <!-</FIRECMD> --> 000027 <!-</FIREWALL> --> 000028 <!---> **************************** Bottom of Data ************************************

Figure 18. Panel: CPPPEDIF panel with firewall commands

Edit this member to supply the needed firewall information and to remove the comment tags (<! and >) from around the SMP/E tags. When you save the member and end the editing operation (with either the END Command or the END key), any changes you made are saved for future use and the Edit JOB Statement panel (Figure 19 on page 34) is displayed. Tip: If you get here by accident, there is no need to back up. Just press the END key to save the commented-out firewall commands and keep going.

Generating the RECEIVE job

Chapter 3. Receiving a new order

Receiving a new order

CPPP6103 -------------------- Edit JOB Statement -----------------------------COMMAND ==>

Press Enter to edit the JOB statement. The information you enter here creates the JOB statement that is used to generate the RECEIVE job, and used later for the installation jobs. (If you want to change the JOB statement before generating the installation jobs, you will be able to change it later by selecting "DEFAULT JOBCARD.")

Press Enter to continue or End to cancel

Figure 19. Panel: Edit JOB statement

Press Enter. An ISPF Edit panel is displayed with a data set member containing a skeleton JOB statement. Initially, this member appears as shown in Figure 20.
CPPPEDIF - MD053718 ----------------------------------------- COLUMNS 000 000 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> HALF ****** ***************************** Top of Data ****************************** 000001 //JOBNAME JOB ACCOUNTING INFO,PROGRAMMER NAME, 000002 // CLASS=A, 000003 // MSGCLASS=H, 000004 // MSGLEVEL=(1,1), 000005 // NOTIFY=&SYSUID., 000006 // USER=&SYSUID., 000007 // TIME=NOLIMIT, 000008 // REGION=0M 000009 //* 000010 //* MODIFY THE JOB STATEMENT ABOVE AS REQUIRED FOR YOUR INSTALLATIONS 000011 //* REQUIREMENTS. PRESS END TO CONTINUE OR ENTER CANCEL TO CANCEL. 000012 //* **************************** Bottom of Data ************************************

Figure 20. Panel: CPPPEDIF panel with JOB statement

Modify the JOB statement as required and press PF3. The Edit RECEIVE Job panel (Figure 21 on page 35) is displayed.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Receiving a new order

CPPP610E --------------------- Edit RECEIVE Job ----------------------COMMAND ==>

Press Enter to edit and submit the RECEIVE job. After making any needed changes, submit the job. (Note: A copy of the job will be saved in the SCPPBENU data set.)

Press Enter to continue or End to cancel

Figure 21. Panel: Edit RECEIVE job

Press Enter. An ISPF Edit panel is displayed with a data set member containing the generated RECEIVE job. Initially, this member appears as shown in Figure 22.
CPPPEDIF - MD053718 ----------------------------------------- COLUMNS 000 000 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> HALF ****** ***************************** Top of Data ****************************** 000001 //JOBNAME JOB ACCOUNTING INFO,PROGRAMMER NAME, 000002 // CLASS=A, 000003 // MSGCLASS=H, 000004 // MSGLEVEL=(1,1), 000005 // NOTIFY=&SYSUID., 000006 // USER=&SYSUID., 000007 // TIME=NOLIMIT, 000008 // REGION=0M 000009 //* 000010 //* *********************************************************** 000011 //* * THIS JCL WAS GENERATED BY SKELETON CPPS6101 000012 //* *********************************************************** 000013 //************************************************ 000014 //* Restart instructions: 000015 //* -------------------000016 //* After determining the cause of the failure, 000017 //* and making any necessary corrections, restart

Figure 22. Panel: CPPPEDIF panel with RECEIVE job

Edit the job, if necessary, and save it. To submit the job, enter SUBMIT and then exit the dialog. The job loads your order from tape, FTP server, or file system to your DASD. Note: You must exit the dialog for the RECEIVE job to run. It is not necessary to log off from TSO. If you are downloading your order from an FTP server, the entire download might take considerable time. However, the download is done in two phases, and the first phase will usually not take very long. Once it has finished, you can begin to use the
Chapter 3. Receiving a new order

Receiving a new order

dialog to configure your new order. The RECEIVE job will send you a message to tell you when the dialog is ready to be used if you are logged on and have INTERCOM set in your TSO/E Profile. To see whether you have INTERCOM set, issue the PROFILE command from the TSO/E Ready prompt or ISPF Option 6. To set INTERCOM, issue PROFILE INTERCOM. Note: It is acceptable for some steps to flush if one of the following conditions applies: v CHKVERSN receives an RC4 indicating that your master dialogs are currently at the same level or higher than the order you are currently receiving. v CHKINV receives an RC4 indicating that a new master dialog is loaded with the LOADRIM job and there are no current orders stored in the dialog inventory. If you want to save a copy of the job, you can use the ISPF Edit CREATE primary command to save the job in a data set (or data set member) of your choice.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Chapter 4. Installing a new order

Before you install the order... To avoid enqueue contention for dialog data sets, allow only one userid to work with an order at a time.

To begin installing the order, select option I on the Order Processing panel (Figure 23). |
CPPPPOLI --------------- IBM Corporation 1990-2007 ---------------------OPTION ==> I CustomPac Order Management Menu R I RECEIVE INSTALL - Receive an Order - Install an Order (Leave blank to list uninstalled orders)

Order Number ==> D DISPLAY

- Select Orders to Display

Master dialog data set qualifiers: CPAC.MASTER This dialog supports electronic delivery

Figure 23. Panel: Order processing

To go directly to a specific order, enter the order number in the blank field under INSTALL and press Enter. Processing proceeds directly to the Installation Menu for the order (see Displaying the installation menu on page 39). If you leave the order number field blank and press Enter, the dialog displays a list of orders from which to choose (see Selecting an order to install). Select an order to install and press Enter.

Selecting an order to install

To list all of the uninstalled orders, select the I option, but leave the order number field blank. The dialog displays a list of orders for your selection, as shown in Figure 24 on page 38.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

Installing the new order

CPPP6071 ------------------------ ORDER LIST --------------------- Row 1 of 2 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> HALF Primary Commands: (? SET Locate Find Next Previous OFile SORT VErbose VERsion) Line Commands: (Select Edit Delete Products Report Output> --- Last Change -S Order System Name SREL Package Build Date Status User Date - -------- ----------- ---- -------- ---------- ---------- ------- ---------JE000001 SYSNAME1 Z038 SERV 2003/10/23 Started TONY 2004/05/09 JE000002 Z038 SERV 2003/11/05 Received NANCY 2004/04/03 JE000003 Z038 SERV 2003/11/05 Installed WAYNE 2004/04/03 JE000007 Z038 SERV 2004/07/04 **Error** JOHN 2004/07/24 S MD053718 Z038 SERV 2004/04/01 Started OBRIEN 2004/04/12 TE000129 DB2 P115 EXP 2004/01/23 Received KENJI 2004/02/10 TE000130 SSP P004 EXP 2004/12/10 Received KATHH 2004/01/10 ******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Figure 24. Panel: Order list

The Order Installation panel indicates installable orders with either of the following status codes (in the Status column): Received This status is set when the order can be selected on the order list panel. For orders delivered on tape, this is after the RECEIVE job has run. For orders that are downloaded, this is after the first phase of the download has been completed. This status is set when the work configuration has been created. The RECEIVE job for this order has failed in step DOWNLDP2. You should examine the output of the RECEIVE job, correct the problem, and resubmit it.

Started **Error**

After you have installed an order and reset its status to Installed, you can no longer display the order with the I option (Install Orders) on the Order Processing panel. You can, however, still view the orders work configuration and installation jobs through the dialog by using the D option (Select Orders to Display) on the Order Processing panel (Figure 23 on page 37) and then selecting the desired order from the list. Or, if you use the GENSKEL command described in Using GENSKEL to generate the installation jobs on page 145, you can view the orders installation jobs in the SCPPBENU data set for the order. Select an order by entering an S line command before the desired order. In Figure 24, order number MD053718 has been selected. The following primary commands are valid for this panel: ? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT VErbose These are standard commands for panels that display lists. See Primary commands on page 11 and Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165. OFile This command writes the entire list of orders to a user-defined file. See Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165 for more information. VERsion This command, abbreviated as VER, displays the current version number of the dialog.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Installing the new order

The following line commands are valid for this panel: S E D P R O Selects an order for installation. Edits an existing order. Deletes an order from the order inventory. The dialog prompts you to confirm the deletion. Displays the products and features for the order, along with their program numbers, versions, and FMIDs. Writes a report of the information associated with an order to a data set that you specify. Lists the installation jobs and any associated job output.

Displaying the installation menu

When you select an order to install, the Installation Menu is displayed (Figure 25). This panel is the starting point for all of the functions that are needed to install your order.
CPPPFLOW ----------- Installation Options for Order ( MD053718 ) -------------OPTION ==> Complete these options to install the order: C * * * * * * Create Variables Zones Modify Alias SSA Installation Create the Work Configuration Specify Values for Variables Specify SMP/E Zone Names Modify the System Layout Specify Catalogs for High-Level Qualifiers Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs Create and Submit Installation Jobs (Option not available until download complete)

You can use Save any time after creating the work configuration: / * Save Save the Current Work Configuration

Figure 25. Panel: Installation menu

At the beginning of a ServerPac installation, the only available function is Create. Each of the other functions (now marked with asterisks) become available after the previous function is completed. To continue the installation, enter C on the command line and press Enter. Proceed to Chapter 5, Creating a work configuration for the order, on page 41. For a review of the Installation Menus other options, see Using the installation menu on page 7 or select the Help option of this menu.

Chapter 4. Installing a new order

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Chapter 5. Creating a work configuration for the order

You can use Save any time after creating the work configuration:
* Save Save the Current Work Configuration

When you select an order for the first time, you must create a work configuration to start the installation.

Choosing the installation type

For an operating system order, option Create displays the Type of Installation panel shown in Figure 26. For subsystem orders, skip ahead to Creating the configuration on page 44.
CPPP6015 ------------- CREATE Configuration ( MD053718 ) --------------------OPTION ==> _ Select the Install type : F - Full System Replacement installs a complete new IPL-able standalone system including all SMP/E-maintained libraries, SMP/E environment, operational data sets, and CustomPac sample data sets. The supplied operational data sets must be merged with or replaced by production operational data sets before the new system is used in production. S - Software Upgrade installs only the SMP/E-maintained libraries, SMP/E zones, and CustomPac sample data sets. Operational data sets, including system control files (like LOGREC and VTAMLST), a security system database, and a master catalog must already exist. These existing operational data sets must be updated as required for new products and product changes before the first IPL. For more information about Software Upgrade, enter ? in the option field

Figure 26. Panel: Type of installation

Use this panel to select the type of installation you prefer: full system replacement or software upgrade. Select the installation type by entering Full system replacement or Software upgrade in the OPTION ==> field and pressing enter.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

Creating a work configuration

A full system replacement installs a complete z/OS system. It installs all data sets needed to IPL, log on to the target system, and run a z/OS image for completing other installation and customization tasks. These data sets fall into two major categories: 1. System software and related data sets (such as distribution and target libraries, SMP/E CSI data sets, and sample libraries) 2. Operational data sets (such as page data sets, system control files, and a master catalog). Because IBM creates a working set of operational data sets for you, a full system replacement helps assure a successful first IPL. Unless you are installing a new image, you must merge your existing operational data sets with the data sets created by ServerPac; this can be done before or after the first IPL. A software upgrade (Figure 27) installs only system software and related data sets (category 1 above). You must provide the operational data sets (category 2 above) and make them accessible to the new level of software installed. When new operational data sets are required, you must allocate and initialize them before you IPL. For example, you might need to add parameters required by the new software level, or change data sets so that they work with both the old and new levels. A software upgrade uses your existing catalog structure. This includes your existing master catalog and user catalogs (with direct or indirect cataloging references). Also, software upgrade allows you to create new user catalogs as part of the installation process. In Figure 27, the dotted line contains the system software and data sets that are created by full system replacement. Within the dotted line, the data sets below Target System are the subset of data sets that are replaced by software upgrade.

Figure 27. Software upgrade option preserves your existing operational data

If you select software upgrade or full system replacement and later wish to change the installation type, you must recreate the configuration by selecting Option C,

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Creating a work configuration

specifying the desired installation type, specifying the JES elements to be installed, selecting a saved configuration for merge (if applicable), and issuing the Create command. If you wish to preserve your modifications, save the configuration. Doing so can reduce the amount of data that you would need to re-enter, depending on how far along you are in the installation process. | | Software upgrade is available only for z/OS orders. It is not available for the related subsystem products (DB2, CICS, IMS, and NCP) or WebSphere Application Server.

Selecting a JES for the configuration

After you select a configuration for your z/OS order, the dialog displays the panel shown in Figure 28 to prompt you to select a JES element.
CPPP6016 ------------- JES Element Selection ( MD053718 ) -------------------COMMAND ==> Choose JES elements to be installed: JES Elements to Install ==> (JES2, JES3, or BOTH)

Specify options for merging JES SMP/E target and DLIB zones: Merge JES2 SMP/E Zones into BCP Zones ==> Merge JES3 SMP/E Zones into BCP Zones ==> (Y or N) (Y or N)

Note: If you wish to merge a JES elements zones, it must have been selected for installation above. For more information, enter ? in the Command field.

Figure 28. Panel: JES element selection

Select at least one JES element for installation: JES2 (and SDSF) or JES3. If your installation requires both JES elements to be installed, you can select BOTH. For each JES element you select, specify whether the dialog is to merge the SMP/E zones of the JES element with the Base Control Program (BCP) zones. When you merge a JES element with the BCP zone, no separate zone is created for the JES element. For example, if you merge JES3 with the BCP zone, the dialog does not create separate zones for JES3 (MVST111 and MVSD111). If you migrate JES2 or JES3 together with the rest of z/OS, IBM recommends that you specify Y on this panel to merge the selected JES elements into the BCP zone. However, if you plan to stage your z/OS and JES migrations separately, do not merge zones. The dialog loads the JES elements zones, but does not merge them. When you select a single JES, the dialog processes the data sets for only the JES you select. The dialog does not create or load data sets for the JES you omit.

Chapter 5. Creating a work configuration for the order

Creating a work configuration

If you wish to change any of these decisions later, you must recreate the configuration by selecting Option Create, specifying the desired changes, selecting a saved configuration for merge (if applicable), and issuing the CReate command.

Creating the configuration

After you select the JES Element (for a z/OS order) or select option C (for a subsystem order), the Create Configuration panel is displayed, as shown in Figure 29.
CPPP6011 ------------- CREATE Configuration ( MD053718 ) ----- Row 1 to 2 of 2 COMMAND ==> CR SCROLL ==> CSR Select Configuration Primary Commands: (? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT CReate) Line Commands: (Select) S * S CONFiguration Comment ----------------------------------- ---------------------------------------CPP.MD053718 Always Selected for Order ----------------------------------- ---------------------------------------CPP.MD058475 First saved config CPP.MD058476 Second saved config ******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Figure 29. Panel: Select configuration

The shipped configuration is always automatically selected. Any configurations you have saved are also displayed. Selecting a saved configuration (if you have one) will reduce the time needed to install the order. If you are using the dialog for the first time, simply enter the CReate primary command. Later in the installation, you will be able to save this configuration for use with subsequent ServerPac orders, or to preserve your work if you decide to recreate the configuration to change installation types or JES selections. If you are merging this order with a saved configuration, see Merging a configuration with a previous order on page 45 for further considerations. When you create the work configuration, the message Work Configuration Created appears, as shown in Figure 30 on page 45.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Creating a work configuration

CPPP6011 ------------- CREATE Configuration ( MD053718 ) ----- Row 1 to 2 of 2 COMMAND ==> CR SCROLL ==> CSR CPP0601004I WORK Configuration Created Select Configuration Primary Commands: (? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT CReate) Line Commands: (Select) S * CONFiguration Comment ----------------------------------- ---------------------------------------CPP.MD053718 Always Selected for Order ----------------------------------- ---------------------------------------CPP.MD058475 First saved config CPP.MD058476 Second saved config

Figure 30. Panel: Select configuration (configuration created)

Press the END key to return to the dialogs Main Menu.

Merging a configuration with a previous order

At this stage of installing your order, you can reuse any configuration information you might have customized and saved from previous orders. To do so, you merge the new order with the saved information. Wherever possible, saved data set attributes replace shipped attributes. New jobs are generated based on the resulting attributes and on further customization that you will do in the dialog. Data set types (PDS, PDSE, HFS or zFS) are derived from the saved order when those data sets are present in both the saved configuration and the new configuration and they are flagged as switchable in the new order. You can merge a saved configuration with the orders shipped configuration. Selection of the saved configuration selection is restricted to configurations created in your current dialog release or up to three prior releases. For example if your shipped configuration was created in Dialog Level 18, you can not merge this with a saved configuration from Dialog Level 14. You select configurations to be merged with the new order configuration on the Create Configuration panel. Enter line command S for each configuration that you want to merge with the current order, and enter CR on the command line to create the new configuration. Figure 31 on page 46 shows the panel that is displayed.

Chapter 5. Creating a work configuration for the order

Creating a work configuration

CPPP6013 COMMAND ==> | | | | | | | | | | |

---------- CREATE Configuration ( MD053718 ) -------------------------------------------------------------------------ORDER : STOB4.MD053718 | | The following configuration will be MERGED with the | Shipped Order Configuration | | CONFIG : CPP.MD058475.CONFIG | | REPORT : CPP.MD058475.REPORT | (data set merge report) | | | ---------------------------------------------------------You MUST Confirm the MERGE By Typing MERGE and pressing ENTER Press the END or RETURN key to CANCEL the MERGE request

Figure 31. Panel: Merge configurations - confirmation

To confirm the merge, enter MERGE in the COMMAND ==> field and press Enter. If the dialog detects an existing work configuration for the current order, the panel shown in Figure 31 will not appear until you delete the existing work configuration. Instead, the panel shown in Figure 32 is displayed to request that you delete the existing configuration.
CPPP6012 ------------- CREATE Configuration ( MD053718 ) --------------------COMMAND ==> DELETE an EXISTING Configuration

A configuration for this order already exists If you continue this will be DELETED You will lose ALL modifications you have made

You MUST Confirm DELETION By Typing DELETE and pressing ENTER Press the END or RETURN key to CANCEL the DELETE request

Figure 32. Panel: Merge configurations - DELETE an EXISTING configuration

To confirm the deletion, enter DELETE in the COMMAND ==> field and press Enter. After you have deleted the existing configuration, the panel shown in Figure 31 will be displayed as previously described.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Creating a work configuration

Modify the configuration as required, and save it. For subsequent installations, you can merge a new shipped configuration with the one you save after making changes to this configuration or with a configuration you saved from another installation. User-defined jobs that the dialog has retained through the saved work configuration are moved to the end of the installation jobstream when merge processing completes (regardless of the order in which you placed the jobs in the installation jobstream).

Information used by ServerPac when merging configurations

When you create a configuration for your new order, the dialog allows you to reuse information that you saved from a previously installed order. Here, the dialog merges the information from the saved configuration with the information in the new order. If a previously-installed product is in the new order at a new level and it now includes a new data set, then there is nothing to bring forward and the new data set gets the shipped defaults in the work configuration. Likewise, if a data set is not present in the products new release, it is not carried forward from the saved configuration to the work configuration. If your new order adds a product that was not in the previously installed order, the dialog adds the information about the product and its data sets from the new order to the configuration being created. If your new order omits a product that was included in a previously saved order, the dialog does not carry forward information or data sets for the omitted product in the new configuration. Thus, if WebSphere for z/OS (for example) was included in the previously installed order, but is not included in the new order, the dialog does not include WebSphere data in the configuration being created. As a result, your changes for WebSphere (such as data set names or space) are not applied to the configuration for the new order, nor is the data for WebSphere saved when you save the configuration. Another consideration for merging data exists when attributes of a data set are changed between levels of a product. Saved changes to allocation amounts (primary, secondary, and directory) are carried forward using the same increase amounts as were applied to the data sets in the saved configuration, except when secondary allocation amounts were allowed for a data set in the saved configuration, but are not allowed for that data set in the shipped configuration. For example, assume that data set A in the previously saved configuration had 15 secondary blocks and you increased that amount to 20. Data set A in the new release of the product shipped with the new order has secondary blocks of 30. The secondary blocks value for data set A in the configuration being created is set to 35 (an increase of 5, just as before). On the other hand, if data set A in the new order had secondary blocks of 0; the secondary blocks value for data set A in the configuration being created would be set to 0 and any previous increase amount would be ignored. When you merge the data sets into the new order, the dialog checks the previously saved configuration for user-defined data sets. The dialog adds these data sets to the configuration being created if their names do not conflict with any data set names in the new shipped order. Otherwise, the dialog indicates the existence of data set name conflicts in the Merge Report (see Merge report on page 49).

Chapter 5. Creating a work configuration for the order

Creating a work configuration

During merge configuration processing, the dialog first determines whether a data set will be included in the work configuration. If so, the dialog determines what information about the data set will be included in the work configuration from the previously saved configuration, as follows : v If, in the previously installed order, you did not change the particular data set value from the value that was originally shipped, the dialog uses the new shipped value in the configuration being created. v If you changed the value in the previously saved configuration from the value that was originally shipped, the dialog uses the rules in Table 2 to determine which value to use in the configuration being created.
Table 2. Values used in a merged configuration Data set value Data Set Name Dialog action If the data set exists in both the previously saved configuration and the new shipped order, the dialog uses the data set name from the previously saved configuration, unless the data set is marked unrenameable in the shipped configuration. A merged data set (described in Merging and unmerging data sets on page 102) retains its name. However, if a component data set in the merged data set does not appear in the new shipped order, the dialog automatically removes the component data set from the merged data set and updates the attributes and space of the merged data set based on the removal of the component data set. Renameable This attribute is not saved or merged. If you changed the status of some data sets from not renameable to overridden in the saved configuration, and want to rename them again, you must change their status using the CHANGE RENAME command (see CHANGE RENAME on page 174) and then rename them in each order. If the data set exists in both the previously saved configuration and the new shipped order, the dialog uses the data set name from the previously saved configuration. If the data sets organization (DSORG) in the previously saved configuration is different from its DSORG in the new shipped configuration, the dialog uses the DSORG from the new shipped configuration for the data set. For a merged data set, if the DSORG of a component data set changes from DSORG=PO, the dialog removes the component data set from the merged data set. The dialog automatically updates the attributes and space of merged data set based on the removal of the component data set. RECFM If the record format (RECFM) of the data set in the previously saved configuration is different from its RECFM in the new shipped configuration, the dialog uses the RECFM from the new shipped configuration. For a merged data set, if the RECFM of a component data set no longer matches that of the merged data set, the dialog removes the component data set from the merged data set. The dialog automatically updates the attributes and space for the merged data set based on the removal of the component data set. In this case, the component data sets RECFM and allocation amounts are set from the new shipped configuration. LRECL If the logical record length (LRECL) in the previously saved configuration is different from its LRECL in the new shipped configuration, the dialog uses the LRECL from the new shipped configuration. For a merged data set, if the LRECL of a component data set no longer matches that of the merged data set, the dialog removes the component data set from the merged data set. The dialog automatically updates the attributes and space for the merged data set based on the removal of the component data set. In this case, the component data sets allocation amounts are set from the new shipped configuration.

DSORG

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Creating a work configuration

Table 2. Values used in a merged configuration (continued) Data set value Primary Space Dialog action The dialog uses one of the following values: v The primary allocation amount from the new shipped configuration plus the amount of space that was added to the old shipped configuration in the saved configuration. v If no saved configuration is being merged, the primary allocation amount from the new shipped configuration. If the value in either the previously saved configuration or the new shipped order value is 0 (zero), the dialog uses a value of 0 for the configuration being created. A value of 0 means that no secondary space allocation is allowed. When a data set shipped with no secondary allocation has been overridden using the CHANGE SECOND command, the value stored in the saved configuration will reflect the shipped value (0) not the overridden value. Otherwise, the dialog uses one of the following values: v The secondary allocation amount from the new shipped configuration plus the amount of space that was added to the old shipped configuration in the saved configuration. v If no saved configuration is being merged, the secondary allocation amount from the new shipped configuration. Directory Space The dialog uses one of the following values: v The number of directory blocks from the new shipped configuration plus the number of directory blocks that was added to the old shipped configuration in the saved configuration. v If no saved configuration is being merged, the number of directory blocks in the new shipped configuration. The dialog uses the logical volume name from the previously saved configuration for the data set, unless the logical volume name in the new shipped default configuration is IPLVOL. If the dialog uses the Logical Volume name from the previously saved configuration, the dialog also updates the following fields: v Physical Volume value v Physical Volume Control Unit Address value. This is the device number for the volume, as assigned through the hardware configuration definition (HCD). v Physical Volume Device Type. For a merged data set, if the logical volume of a component data set in the new release becomes IPLVOL, the dialog automatically reassigns the logical volume of the merged data set to IPLVOL accordingly. SMS-Managed The dialog uses the SMS-managed status from the saved configuration, unless doing so would conflict with the data sets SMS-eligible or SMS-required attributes.

Secondary Space

Logical Volume

Using merge configuration reports

To help you in identifying what information has been merged, the dialog generates two different types of reports when you create the merged configuration: v Merge report v Data set merge report on page 55. These reports are described in the sections that follow. Merge report: The dialog generates the Merge Report to identify the changes that were made to the logical volume table (the data set information) because of the merge with a previous order configuration. The dialog saves this report in a member named MERGE in a data set with the following naming convention:
hlq.orderid.REPORT(MERGE)
Chapter 5. Creating a work configuration for the order

Creating a work configuration

Use this report to discover potential problems, which are identified in the STATUS column of the report. It is strongly recommended that you investigate any data sets that have a non-blank status in the reports. Each column in this report is separated by one blank. The report displays information in the following order: 1. Shipped SubSystem Type (SST), in ascending order. 2. Low-Level qualifier of the saved data set, in ascending order. 3. High-level qualifier (HLQ) and middle-level qualifier of the saved data set, in ascending order. The following is an example of the report:

SST STATUS SAVED DATA SET NAME SHIPPED DATA SET NAME SVLVOL SHLVOL SHPVOL DEVN ED DEVICE PRISP(DELTA) SECSP(DELTA) DIRBS(DELTA) aaaa bbbbbbbbbbb cccccccccccccccc... dddddddddddd... eeeeee ffffff gggggg hhhh i jjjjjjjj mmmmmmmmmm nnnnnnnnnn oooooooooo

The fields in the report are described as follows: SST Subsystem name. This field is blank for operational and CustomPac data sets. For product-supplied data sets, it indicates the major system or subsystem with which the data set is associated: Value DB2 CICS IMS MVS NCP Meaning DB2 and related products CICS and related products IMS and related products z/OS, WAS, and related products NCP and related products

STATUS Status field. This field is a maximum of 11 characters and can be the following: NEW The data set is a new data set. This means that the data set did not exist in the saved order configuration, but now exists in the new shipped order. When a data sets status is NEW, all fields except Saved LVol are filled in using the shipped defaults DSORG The shipped DSORG for the new data set is not the same as the DSORG for the same data set in the saved order configuration. The shipped DSORG is used for this data set. The Shipped Data Set Name value is filled in for reference. Because this report is sorted using the Saved Data Set Name by default, the Saved Data Set Name value is set to the Shipped Data Set Name value to prevent the Saved Data Set Name value from being blank. LRECL The shipped LRECL for the new data set is not the same as the LRECL for the same data set in the saved order configuration. The data set space allocations are not merged, but any data set name, logical volume, physical volume, device number, and shipped device information are merge candidates. RECFM The shipped RECFM for the new data set is not the same as the RECFM

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Creating a work configuration

for the same data set in the saved order configuration. The data set space allocations are not merged, but any data set name, logical volume, physical volume, device number, and shipped device information are merge candidates. D The data set mode has been changed; the new shipped order mode is used. The data set mode indicates the installation type for which the data set is to be used (full system replacement, software upgrade, or both). The new data set mode didnt match the old one. There are three possible modes (FSR-only, SU-only, and both SU and FSR) and that the new mode doesnt match the old one. DSNAME The shipped DSNAME for the new data set is not the same as the DSNAME for the same data set in the saved order configuration. The possible causes for this are as follows: v A user-defined data set in the saved order configuration has the same name as an IBM-supplied data set in the shipped configuration v A data set in the saved order configuration has been renamed, and a data set in the new shipped order is now shipped with that name. v A data set was renamed in the saved order configuration, but the same data set is now shipped as an unrenameable data set. In either case, no data set information is merged. The Saved Data Set Name value contains the name of the data set with the conflict. The Shipped Data Set Name is either: v USER DATA SET for user-defined data set name conflicts v IBM DATA SET for renamed data set name conflicts Also, for each DSNAME conflict entry in the report for IBM DATA SET, there is also an entry in the report with a status of NEW. I The shipped IPL volume for the new data set is not the same as the IPL volume for the same data set in the saved order configuration. There are two possible ways this status can be set: v The data set in the saved order configuration was required on the IPL volume, but the same data set in the new shipped order is not required on the IPL volume. v The data set in the saved order configuration was not required on the IPL volume, but the same data set in the new shipped order is required on the IPL volume. Data sets required on the IPL volume are unconditionally placed on the IPLVOL logical volume. M There is a change to the requirement for the data set to be defined in the master catalog. There are two ways this status can change: v The data set in the saved order configuration was required to be in the master catalog and the same data set in the new shipped order is not required to be in the master catalog. v The data set in the saved order configuration was not required to be in the master catalog, but the same data set in the new shipped order is required to be in the master catalog. Some data sets should be cataloged in the master catalog. ServerPac marks some additional data sets as being required in the master catalog, but you can override this using the CH MCAT command. However, if you
Chapter 5. Creating a work configuration for the order

Creating a work configuration

override this setting, you must be prepared to make whatever other changes are required to catalog the affected data set in a user catalog. After you have completed the ServerPac installation, you can uncatalog these additional data sets, or move their catalog entries to user catalogs as needed. R There is a reblock flag conflict between the new shipped order and the same data set in the saved order configuration. There are two possible ways this status can be set: v The data set in the saved order configuration was allowed to be reblocked (the REBLOCK ALLOWED flag is set to Y), but the same data set in the new shipped order cannot be reblocked (the REBLOCK ALLOWED flag is set to N). v The data set in the saved order configuration was not allowed to be reblocked (the REBLOCK ALLOWED flag is set to N), but the same data set in the new shipped order can be reblocked (the REBLOCK ALLOWED flag is set to Y). S There is a Secondary Blocks conflict between the new shipped order and the same data set in the saved order configuration. There are two possible ways this status can be set: v The data set in the saved order configuration was allowed to have secondary blocks, but the same data set in the new shipped order cannot have secondary blocks. v The data set in the saved order configuration was not allowed to have secondary blocks, but the same data set in the new shipped order can have secondary blocks. There was a type conflict between a data set in the new shipped order and the same data set in the saved order configuration. Either of following occurred: v The data set in the saved order configuration is a PDS, but the same data set in the new shipped order is a PDSE. v The data set in the saved order configuration is a PDSE, but the same data set in the new shipped order is a PDS. In these cases, the dialog uses the format of the data set from the saved configuration, unless the data set in the new shipped order is not eligible to have its format converted. SMS There was a conflict in the SMS status of the data set between the saved configuration and the shipped configuration. The data set is either of the following: v Managed by SMS in the saved configuration, but is not eligible for SMS management in the shipped configuration. v Unmanaged by SMS in the saved configuration, but is required to be SMS-managed in the shipped configuration. The data sets SMS status in the shipped configuration is unchanged. The dialog attempts to merge the remaining attributes of the data set. X The data set was moved across SSTs between the saved order configuration and the new shipped order. The status can be set when a data set in the saved order configuration was associated with one SST and the same data set in the new shipped order is associated with a different SST.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Creating a work configuration

Notes: 1. Any combination of the single character status values may appear at one time in the status field. If more than one value appears on the status line, it is separated from the next single character value by a comma. 2. The DSNAME and DSORG status values indicate that no merge of any values is done. 3. The LRECL and RECFM values allow the merge of only the data set name, logical volume, physical volume, device number, and shipped device, where a merge of the value applies. 4. Any non-blank status value in the table indicates the user should look closely at the data set to ensure that any merged values are still valid. Also, the following should be reviewed: v Data set name v Reblocking of the data set v Logical volume to physical volume mapping v Data set block size v Data set space allocation units: primary, secondary, and directory blocks. 5. A blank value indicates that no potential conflicts were identified during the merge of the data for a data set. SAVED DATA SET NAME Specifies the data set name that now exists in the configuration created when the saved order configuration was merged with the new shipped order. The field is a maximum of 44 characters long. This field is always non-blank because it is the default sorting field for the report. There are cases where the Saved Data Set Name value and the Shipped Data Set Name value are the same. The names are the same for the following: v The Status is set to NEW, or DSORG. v The shipped order data set name and the saved order configuration data set name are the same. For Status of DSNAME, the Saved Data Set Name is the name of the data set and the Shipped Data Set Name is USER DATA SET. SHIPPED DATA SET NAME Specifies one of the following: v Name of the data set in the new shipped order. The maximum length for this value is 44 characters. v USER DATA SET. A user-added data set was copied from the saved order configuration and added to the merged configuration. This value is also specified when a user added data set cannot be added to the merged configuration because of a data set name conflict (DSname in Status Column). v IBM DATA SET. A data set was renamed in the save configuration and a data set by the same name is now shipped in the new shipped order. SVLVOL Specifies the logical volume from the saved order configuration. This value is 1-6 characters. If this value is not blank, it is the value that is used for the data set in the merged configuration. If this value is blank, one or both of the following is true: v Saved LVol is the same as the Shipped LVol. v The Status is set to NEW, DSNAME, or DSORG.

Chapter 5. Creating a work configuration for the order

Creating a work configuration

SHLVOL Specifies the logical volume from the new shipped order. This value is 6 characters long. This value is blank when the logical volume value in the saved order configuration is the same as the logical volume value in the new shipped configuration. SHPVOL For an unmanaged data set, this field specifies the physical volume that exists in the saved configuration for this data set. For an SMS-managed data set, this field specifies the storage class of the data set. This value is 1-8 characters. SHPVOL is blank when the physical volume value in the saved order configuration is the same as the value in the new shipped order. If this is a new data set (identified by NEW in the status column), this is the value from the new shipped order. DEVN Specifies the device number of the physical volume that is displayed in the Physical Volume column, or SMS for an SMS-managed data set. This value is 1-4 characters. If the Physical Volume column is blank, this field is also blank. ED Specifies whether existing data resides on the volume displayed in the Physical Volume column. This value is either Y or N (meaning yes or no). If the Physical Volume column is blank, this field is also blank. If the DEVN field contains SMS, this field is meaningless. If the physical volume contains existing data, use the SUMP primary command to force the recalculation of space for the volume. DEVICE Specifies the device characteristic of the physical volume that is displayed in the Physical Volume column. This value is 1-8 characters. If the Physical Volume column is blank, this field is also blank. If the DEVN field contains SMS, this field is meaningless. PRISP(DELTA) Specifies the primary allocation value of the data set in the merged configuration if there was a difference between the value in the saved order configuration and the new shipped configuration for this data set. delta is the difference between these primary allocations, if any. delta is 1-12 characters. The value is blank if you did not change the value of the primary allocation in the saved order configuration, regardless of the value in the new shipped order. However, if you increased the value of the primary allocation in the saved order, one of the following occurs: v If the value in the new shipped order is less than the value in the saved order configuration, the saved order configuration value is used and this is the value displayed in the Saved Primary field. v If the value in the new shipped order is greater than the value in the saved order configuration, the amount of increase that the user specified in the saved order configuration is added to the new shipped order value. This new value is the value displayed in the Saved Primary field. There are two ways in which you could have changed the primary allocation: v You entered the CHANGE command to change the primary allocation of one or more data sets in the saved order configuration. v You changed a specific data sets primary allocation.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Creating a work configuration

SECSP(DELTA) Specifies the secondary allocation value of the data set in the merged configuration if there was a difference between the value in the saved order configuration and the new shipped configuration for this data set. delta is the difference between the saved order configuration secondary allocation and the new shipped order secondary allocation. delta is 1-12 characters. If you did not change the value of the secondary allocation in the saved order configuration, delta is blank, regardless of the value in the new shipped order. If you changed the value of the secondary allocation in the saved order, one of the following occurs: v If the value in the new shipped order is less than the value in the saved order configuration, the dialog uses the saved order configuration value and displays this value in the Saved Secondary field. v If the value in the new shipped order is greater than the value in the saved order configuration, the dialog adds the amount of increase that you specified in the saved order configuration to the new shipped order value. The dialog displays the new value in the Saved Secondary field. v If the value of either the new shipped order or the saved order configuration is zero, the dialog displays a zero (0) in the Saved Secondary field and an S in the Status field. There are two ways in which you could have changed the secondary allocation: v You entered the CHANGE command to change the secondary allocation of one or more data sets in the saved order configuration. v You changed a specific data sets secondary allocation. DIRBS(DELTA) Specifies the directory blocks value of the data set in the merged configuration if there was a difference between the value in the saved order configuration and the new shipped configuration for this data set. delta is the difference, if any, between these two values. delta is 1-12 characters. If you did not change the value of the directory blocks in the saved order configuration, delta is blank, regardless of the value in the new shipped order. If you changed the value of the directory blocks in the saved order, one of the following occurs: v If the value in the new shipped order is less than the value in the saved order configuration, the dialog uses the value for the saved order configuration and displays this value in the DIRBS field. v If the value in the new shipped order is greater than the value in the saved order configuration, the dialog adds the amount of increase that you specified in the saved order configuration to the new shipped order value. The dialog displays the new value in the DIRBS field. There are two ways that you could have changed the directory blocks: v You entered the CHANGE command for the saved order configuration to change the directory blocks of a group of data sets. v You changed a specific data sets directory blocks. Data set merge report: The dialog generates the Data Set Merge report to show possible conflicts involving merged data sets as a result of merging of the saved configuration with the new configuration. Use this report to discover potential

Chapter 5. Creating a work configuration for the order

Creating a work configuration

problems, which are identified in the STATUS column of the report. It is strongly recommended that you investigate any data sets that have a non-blank status in the reports. The dialog saves this report in a member named DSMERGE in a data set with the following naming convention:
hlq.orderid.REPORT(DSMERGE)

The following is an example of the report:

STATUS U A,I D P

Merged DSname SYS1.PANELS

Component DSname SYS1.PANELS GIM.SGIMPENU ISP.SISPPENU ABC.SABDPENU DEF.SDEFPENU

RECFM LRECL DSTYPE AVBLOCK PRI SEC DIR FB 80 PDS 8800 75 7 50

SYS1.CLIST SYS1.CLIST GIM.SGIMCLS0 ABC.SABDCENU

PDSE

8800

SYS1.MSGS SYS1.MSGS GIM.SGIMMENU ABC.SABDMENU

PDS

17200

U C

SYS1.SKELS SYS1.SKELS GIM.SGIMSENU ISP.SISPSENU SYS1.PLILINK

PDS

17200

U SYS1.LINKLIB

PDS

6144

10 100

C Y N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

I N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y

N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N

M Y Y N N N N Y Y N N Y Y N N Y Y N N Y Y

D Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N

S N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N

E Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

The fields in the report are described as follows: STATUS Identifies potential problems, such as data set name conflicts. Valid values for this field are as follows: M The component merged file system could not be merged because a file system was introduced in the shipped configuration which contains an intermediate mountpoint. When file systems can not be merged as a result of discrepancies between the saved configuration and the shipped configuration, all its component data sets are unmerged. U A Data set was unmerged as a result of the configuration merge. One or more of the data sets flags (shown in the right-most columns in this report) have changed as a result of the merge. Each flag is marked with a value of Y or N (yes or no) to indicate the post-merge conditions for the data set, as follows: C Must the data set be cataloged in the Master Catalog? I Must the data set reside on the IPL volume? N Can the data set be renamed? M Can the data set be merged with another data set?1 D Can the data sets type (HFS, PDS, PDSE, zFS) be changed? S Must the data set be managed by SMS? E Can the data set be managed by SMS?

1. The saved data set name is used even if the value of M is changed. Also, if M is changed to make a data set unrenameable, you can rename the data set to the new name required by the dialog (or to a user-specified name) by using the CH RENAME command to change the status and to rename the data set.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Creating a work configuration

The operating system requires some data sets to have particular names, or reside on the IPL volume, or be cataloged in the master catalog. The dialog sometimes requires that additional data sets follow these restrictions. During the installation, you can choose to make these data sets renameable through the CHANGE RENAME command. Or, you can rename, move, or recatalog these data sets after completing the ServerPac installation. C Data set was automatically unmerged of all of its component data sets because the dialog detected a member name conflict between it and another data set (which is also indicated with a C status elsewhere in this report). Data set was not in the shipped configuration. The data set is deleted. If it was part of a merged data set, then it was either a merge component data set (that is, it was merged into another data set) or a merge target data set (that is, other data sets were merged into it). If it was a merge component, it is no longer part of the merged data set. However, if it was a merge target, then the dialog unmerges the data sets. If you want the data sets merged again, you will have to choose a different merge target data set. Data set is ineligible for merging. This status is accompanied with a status of A to indicate that the merge attribute of the data set has changed to N. The merged data set is a PDSE, but it contains at least one component data set that is a non-switchable PDS. The component data set was unmerged because the dialog detected a mismatch with the secondary attribute. The dialog restricts merging data sets with unlike secondary attributes. When data sets cannot be merged as a result of discrepancies between the saved configuration and the shipped configuration, the component data set will be unmerged.

I P S

Merged DSname Name of the merged data set. Component DSname Name of a component data set in the merged data set. The first value in this list is the name of the target merge data set. LRECL Logical record size of the merged data set. This value is the same for all component data sets in the merged data set. DSTYPE Data set organization of the merged data set. Possible values are: PDS PDS data set PDSE PDSE data set zFS zFS data set HFS HFS data set This value is the same for all component data sets in the merged data set. AVBLOCK Space units of the merged data set. This value is the same for all component data sets in the merged data set. PRI Number of space units requested for the primary space allocation for the merged data set, including the space required for its component data sets.

Chapter 5. Creating a work configuration for the order

Creating a work configuration

SEC Number of space units requested for the secondary space allocation for the merged data set, including the space required for its component data sets. DIR Number of directory blocks required for the merged data set, including the space required for its component data sets.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Chapter 6. Defining installation variables

CPPPFLOW - - - - - - - - - - - Installation Options for Order ( MD053718 ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - OPTION ==> Complete these options to install the order:
C V * * * * * Create Variables Zones Modify Alias SSA Installation Create the Work Configuration Specify Values for Variables Specify SMP/E Zone Names Modify the System Layout Specify Catalogs for High-Level Qualifiers Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs Create and Submit Installation Jobs (Option not available until download complete)

You can use Save any time after creating the work configuration:
S Save Save the Current Work Configuration

Select V from the Installation Menu to begin the next available function, Define Installation Variables. The Variable Selection List is displayed (Figure 33).

CPPP6111 ----------- Installation Variables ( MD053718 ) -------- Row 1 of 99 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Variable Selection List SHOW( * )

Primary Commands:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous CANcel SAVE SHow VARname) Line Commands:(Browse Delete Edit Insert Repeat Ship) S Synonym STA Contents - --- ----------------- --- ----+----0----+----0----+----0----+----0---==> INSTALL OPTIONS DYNAMIC DASD INFO P YES ==> GEN SYSTEMPAC WORK VOLUME TGT UNIT TYPE TARGET VOLSER ASSEMBLER NAME SMPTLIB PREFIX SMPTLIB UNIT SMPTLIB VOLSER ==> HFS/zFS Info INSTALL DIRECTORY ==> PKI SERVICES VSAM HLQ FOR PKI ==> NEW ADR ADR NEW MCON ==> NEW VOL D D D D D D D SYSDA ASMA90 SYS1.MVS 3380 MVSCAT

D /Service D PKISRVD.VSAM D 0F2

Figure 33. Panel: Variable selection list - variable synonyms

The Variable Selection List displays variables that are required to install your order. The list reflects the installation type you chose full system replacement or software upgrade. Use this panel to set the values of these variables appropriately

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

Defining installation variables

for your environment. Refer to the Variables appendix in ServerPac: Installing Your Order, for the exact variables for your order. In this part of the dialog, you are asked to provide (as variables) information about your driving system and target system, such as the SYSNAME for the target system. In some cases, you will need to know the target and distribution zone names for both the driving system and target system, as well as other driving system specifics, such as console configuration, and system volumes (IPL, RACF unit type, catalogs). The STA column displays the status of each variable, as follows: C Customized D Default E Erased I Inserted P Pre-defined U User-defined With the exception of customized variables, you can modify the values of variables by typing over the Contents field. To display online help for a variable, enter B (Browse) next to it. The following primary commands are valid for this panel: ? SET Locate Find Next Previous These are standard commands for panels that display lists. See Primary commands on page 11. CANCEL This command, abbreviated as CAN, discards any changes that you have made since the last checkpoint and exits the Installation Variables panel. (A checkpoint is taken when you enter and exit the dialog, and after any SAVE command). SAVE This command saves any changes that you have made and establishes a new checkpoint. (A checkpoint is taken when you enter and exit the dialog, and after any SAVE command). SHOW This command, abbreviated as SH, displays the variables. To limit the display to certain types of variables, enter SH with one or more of the following filters: * All variables. C Customized variables. You cannot edit or delete these variables. D Default variables E Erased variables I Inserted variables P Pre-defined variables U User-defined variables For example, to display only variables with status codes of C (customized) or P (pre-defined), enter the SHOW command as follows:
SH CP

You can prefix the list of status codes with a logical not operator () to bypass variables with particular status codes. For example, to display variables that do not have status codes of C or P, enter the following:

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Defining installation variables

SH CP

SYNONYM This command, abbreviated as SYN, displays variables by their synonyms. Figure 33 on page 59 shows an example of the synonym format of this panel. VARNAME This command, abbreviated as VAR, displays variables by their names. The following line commands are valid for this panel: B Browse the information for the selected variable, including: v Variable name v Full status v Default data value v Current data value v Variable description See Browsing variable definitions on page 63. D Delete a user variable. You must confirm your DELETE request. See Deleting user variables on page 67. You cannot delete IBM-supplied variables. E Edit the following fields: v Current data value v Variable Description See Editing variable definitions on page 64. You cannot update variables with a status of C (customized). I R Insert a user variable. See Inserting user variables on page 66. Repeat the insertion of a user variable, using values copied from the selected variable (except for its name, because variable names must be unique). See Inserting user variables on page 66. Restore the variable to the shipped CustomPac values. You must confirm your SHIP request (see Restoring a variable to its shipped value on page 68). Use S carefully on this panel; S usually means SELECT in the other dialog panels.

Selecting new values for the variables in your order

Reviewing the variables in your order and identifying values for them in advance will simplify your work for this task. Table 3 on page 62 shows some variables that will likely require some research on your part, and, perhaps, a discussion with your installations storage administrator and security administrator.

Chapter 6. Defining installation variables

Defining installation variables

Table 3. Installation variables that require some planning Variable synonym DYNAMIC DASD INFO Default value Default: Yes Description Specifies whether the dialog should use information from online volumes to automatically determine device characteristics, including device geometry, volume size and device number. If the system on which the dialog runs is not the same system on which the installation jobs will run, two different volumes with the same volume serial could be online (one in each system) and the dialog could retrieve information about the wrong device. In this situation, you should specify No for this variable and define the volumes manually. Directory on the driving system in which your orders file system elements are to be restored and its file systems mounted. This value cannot be blank. By default, the Install Directory is /Service. If you specify a directory other than /Service, do not exceed 20 characters. Mixed case characters are allowed. If your driving system file system is mounted read-only, the specified directory must already exist on the driving system. In a multilevel directory path, the lowest directory from the root is automatically created. Higher directories are not created. First 5 characters for names of spool volumes. This value must match the value specified in the allocation values for the HASPACE data set. Volume serial (VOLSER) of the DASD on which SMP/E will allocate RELFILES during RECEIVE processing if products are installed after the ServerPac installation jobs have been run. This value is required for the SMPTLIB DDDEF in the global zone. System name, as it is specified on the SYSNAME= parameter of the IEASYSxx parmlib member. Standard data set naming conventions apply. If you change this value from the default (CPAC), you must also change the value of SYSNAME in the IEASYSxx member used to IPL the target system. For a full system replacement, changing the SYSNAME value requires that you update the system name list in the SMS Base Configuration (using ISMF after you IPL). Then, you must activate the changed SMS configuration before you can use SMS.

INSTALL DIRECTORY Default: /Service

SPOOL VOL PREFIX

Default: MVSC1

SMPTLIB VOLSER

Default: MVSCAT

SYSNAME

Default: CPAC

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Defining installation variables

Table 3. Installation variables that require some planning (continued) Variable synonym SYSTEM LOGGER HLQ Default value Default: IXGLOGR Description This variable sets the high-level qualifier that System Logger will use to create staging data sets and log data sets for log streams.

Notes: 1. As shipped in your order, the system name (SYSNAME) for the target system is CPAC. If you change the SYSNAME value for your order, later in the installation you must ensure that the new system name is defined in the appropriate places, as described in the chapter on IPLing the target system in ServerPac: Installing Your Order. 2. The RACF OLD PDSN and RACF OLD BDSN variables allow you to specify only one primary RACF database name and one backup RACF database name. If you use more than one primary or backup RACF database, or do not use a backup RACF database, you must change some of the installation jobs accordingly.

Browsing variable definitions

To display the variable details, use a two panel sequence, as follows. First, enter line command B for the variable to be browsed. The panel shown in Figure 34 is displayed.
CPPP6115 ------------ Installation Variables ( MD053718 ) -------------------COMMAND ==> BROWSE Variable Definition - Value Variable : FADAXX01 Synonym : DYNAMIC DASD INFO Status : PREDEFINED Default Value : YES Current Value : YES Acceptable Values: Y N YES NO ( Press ENTER for Description Fields )

Figure 34. Panel: Update variable definition - value

For some variables, a set of allowed values is listed in the Acceptable Values: field. Press Enter to display the variables description fields. The panel shown in Figure 35 on page 64 is displayed.

Chapter 6. Defining installation variables

Defining installation variables

CPPP6114 ------------ Installation Variables ( MD053718 ) ------------------COMMAND ==> BROWSE Variable Definition - Usage Variable Description : : : : : : : : : : : This variable tells the dialog whether to use information from online volumes automatically to determine device characteristics including device geometry, volume size, and device number. To have the dialog determine device characteristics automatically, set this variable to Yes. To enter all device characteristics manually, set this variable to No.

Figure 35. Panel: Browse variable definition - usage

You can also browse variable section headers (==>). The format of the first panel display changes to show only the synonym and status. The description panel gives a general overview of the variables in the current section. The ENTER and END keys have the following actions: ENTER END On the Value panel, displays the Usage panel. On the Usage panel, ends the Browse function. On the Value panel, ends the Browse function. On the Usage panel, displays the Value panel.

Editing variable definitions

With the exception of customized variables, you can modify the values of the variables in your order. To update the variable details, use a two panel sequence, as follows. First, enter line command E for the variable to be edited. The panel shown in Figure 36 on page 65 is displayed.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Defining installation variables

CPPP6115 ------------ Installation Variables ( MD053718 ) -------------------COMMAND ==> UPDATE Variable Definition - Value Variable : FADAXX01 Synonym : DYNAMIC DASD INFO Status : PREDEFINED Default Value : YES Current Value ==> YES Acceptable Values: Y N YES NO ( Press ENTER for Description Fields )

Figure 36. Panel: Update variable definition - value

For some variables, a set of allowed values is listed in the Acceptable Values: field. You can select another value from the list. Then, press Enter to display the variables description fields. The panel shown in Figure 37 is displayed.
CPPP6116 ------------ Installation Variables ( MD053718 ) -------------------COMMAND ==> UPDATE Variable Definition - Usage Variable Description ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> This variable tells the dialog whether to use information from online volumes automatically to determine device characteristics including device geometry, volume size, and device number. To have the dialog determine device characteristics automatically, set this variable to Yes. To enter all device characteristics manually, set this variable to No.

Figure 37. Panel: Update variable definition - usage

You can change the following fields: Current value Variable description The data value of the variable that is used when installation jobs are generated. The description of the variable. You have 15 fields to describe the variable.

You can also update variable section headers (==>), but you can change only the description. The ENTER and END keys have the following actions:

Chapter 6. Defining installation variables

Defining installation variables

ENTER On the Value panel, displays the Usage panel. On the Usage panel, ends the Edit function and updates the variable using the values entered. On the Value panel, ends the Edit function. On the Usage panel, displays the Value panel.

END

Inserting user variables

You can add one or more user-defined variables to your order. If you plan to insert multiple variables into your order, you can save time by replicating the definitions of existing variables through line command R (REPEAT). To add a user-supplied variable, you will use a two panel sequence. Begin by choosing an appropriate variable section header in the list for the new variable (for example, GENERAL DSN for general use data sets). Next to an existing variable in the section, enter line command I to insert a user variable. Figure 38 is displayed.
CPPP6117 ------------ Installation Variables ( MD053718 ) -------------------COMMAND ==> INSERT a USER Variable - Value : Variable Name ==> $ _ User Variables are ALWAYS a $ plus 1 to 7 characters Synonym Status ==> : USER

Default Value ==> Current Value ==> ( Press ENTER for Description Fields )

Figure 38. Panel: Insert a user variable - value

In this panel, define the following fields: Variable Name Name of the variable, prefixed by a $ symbol. Specify a name of 1 to 7 characters. The name you choose must be unique; otherwise, the dialog displays a duplicate message. Synonym Short phrase (1-19 characters) that identifies your variable.

Default Value Value of the variable to be saved as a reference or model. Current Value Value of the variable to be used in the installation jobs you create. To cancel an insert action, press END. Otherwise, to continue defining the variable, press Enter to display the variables description fields, as shown in Figure 39 on page 67.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Defining installation variables

CPPP6118 ------------ Installation Variables ( MD053718 ) -------------------COMMAND ==> INSERT a USER Variable - Usage Variable Description ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> Describe your variable in these fields... You have 15 fields to use for description.

Figure 39. Panel: Insert a user variable - usage

Use this panel to provide a description of the variable. Fifteen fields are available for your use. To add the variable, press Enter. The dialog inserts the variable using the values you entered. If you later return to the Variables list, you will find the user-supplied variables grouped at the end of the variable section, sorted alphabetically by variable name (not synonym). To repeat the definition of a variable in the list, enter line command R for the variable. Reset the values of the fields to define the new variable.

Deleting user variables

Figure 40 shows the panel that is displayed when you enter line command D to delete a user-defined variable.
CPPP611D ------------ Installation Variables ( MD053718 ) -------------------COMMAND ==> DELETE a USER Variable Variable : $TESTVAR Status : USER Default : TESTVAR Current : TESTVAR You MUST Confirm DELETION By Typing DELETE and pressing ENTER Press the END or RETURN key to CANCEL the DELETE request Synonym : MY TEST VARIABLE

Figure 40. Panel: Delete a user variable - confirmation

Chapter 6. Defining installation variables

Defining installation variables

You must confirm your request by entering DELETE in the COMMAND ==> field and pressing enter. Caution: Be careful when deleting user variables that are used by user-defined installation jobs. Deleting these variables can cause errors to occur in the jobs generated by the Install option of the installation dialog, which is described in Chapter 11, Submitting the installation jobs, on page 141.

Restoring a variable to its shipped value

Figure 41 shows the panel that is displayed when you enter line command S to restore a variable to its shipped value.
CPPP611S ------------ Installation Variables ( MD053718 ) -------------------COMMAND ==> RESTORE a Variable to the SHIPPED Value Variable : F90GDQ01

Status : PREDEFINED

Synonym : PREFIX DIALOG DSN

Default : CUSTNAME.MD053718 Current : GLANDA.MD053718 You MUST Confirm RESTORE By Typing RESTORE and pressing ENTER Press the END or RETURN key to CANCEL the RESTORE request

Figure 41. Panel: Restore a variable to the shipped value - confirmation

Your request restores the following values for the variable to the shipped CustomPac values: v Default data value v Current data value v Variable description. You must confirm your request by entering RESTORE in the COMMAND ==> field and pressing enter. If you restore a user variable, the current data value is made the same as the default data value.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Chapter 7. Defining the SMP/E zone configuration

CPPPFLOW - - - - - - - - - - - Installation Options for Order ( MD053718 ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - OPTION ==> Complete these options to install the order:
C V Z * * * * Create Variables Zones Modify Alias SSA Installation Create the Work Configuration Specify Values for Variables Specify SMP/E Zone Names Modify the System Layout Specify Catalogs for High-Level Qualifiers Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs Create and Submit Installation Jobs (Option not available until download complete)

You can use Save any time after creating the work configuration:
S Save Save the Current Work Configuration

From the Installation Menu, enter Z to begin the next dialog function, Define Zone Configuration. This function allows you to change the SMP/E zone names that IBM supplied for your order. Choose SMP/E zone names that are unique for your installation. Doing so will allow you to use SMP/Es cross-zone processing, such as SMP/Es reporting and management functions. If you want to rename the CSI data set, you can do so later in the Modify System Layout function, described in Chapter 8, Modifying the system layout, on page 73. This panel allows you to change the names of zones in your order, but not the contents of zones. On entering the Z option, the dialog displays the current DLIB and target zone names for your order (as shown in Figure 42).
CPPP6391 ----------- Define ZONE Information ( MD053718 ) --- Row 1 to 5 of 5 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> HALF Primary Commands:(? CANcel SAVE) Line Commands:(feaTures)

S Nickname DLIB Zone Target Zone - -------------------------100 MVSD100 MVST100 200 MVSD200 MVST200 300 MVSD300 MVST300 400 MVSD400 MVST400 500 MVSD500 MVST500 S ******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Figure 42. Panel: Define zone names

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

Defining the zone configuration

How zone names are used in your order

All DLIB zones for each SREL are physically defined in the same DLIB CSI data set. All target zones for each SREL are physically defined in the same target CSI data set. More than one zone pair (a DLIB and target) might be supplied with your order. Each zone pair has a 3-digit number as a nickname. The nickname is used to associate DLIB and target zones together. For example, suppose you selected JES2 when creating the work configuration, but chose not to merge its zones with the z/OS BCP zones. The following zone nicknames might be used:
Nickname 100 . . . z/OS BCP Nickname 105 . . . JES2

The zone nicknames are also used to generate the default DLIB and target zone names, based on the following naming convention: v First 3 characters of the order name: CIC, DB2, IMS or NCP. v 1-character zone type identifier: D Distribution Zone (DLIB) T Target Zone (TLIB) v 3-character zone pair nickname. For example, assume that a zone nickname of 500 was generated for a CICS order. The zone names would be:
CICD500 . . . for the distribution zone CICT500 . . . for the target zone

For descriptions of the zones that came with your order, see the topic, Zones Shipped with Your Order, in ServerPac: Installing Your Order. (Note that JES zones for an unselected JES element and JES zones that are to be merged with the BCP zones will not appear in the dialog, even though they are listed in ServerPac: Installing Your Order.)

Changing the SMP/E zone names in your order

In the panel (shown in Figure 42 on page 69), type over the DLIB and target zone names with the names that you want for your installation and press Enter. The dialog checks for duplicate zone names and, if one is found, displays a message (CPP0639006E DUPLICATE Zone Name) on the panel. Ensure that the zone names you specify are unique for all environments in your installation. The new zone names should not appear in ZONEINDEX subentries in the global zone ZONE entries for any of your existing systems. The following primary commands are valid for this panel: CANCEL This command, abbreviated to CAN, discards any changes that you have made

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Defining the zone configuration

since the last checkpoint and exits the Zone Configuration panel. (A checkpoint is taken on entry and exit to the dialog, and after any SAVE command). SAVE This command saves any change that you might have made and establishes a new checkpoint. (A checkpoint is taken on entry and exit to the dialog, and after any SAVE command). The following line command is valid for this panel: FEATURES Displays the features that are installed in the selected zone. Specify a T for a zone pair and press Enter to display the features installed in the zone. This line command displays feature names only; it does not show FMIDs, nor does it display any other type of SYSMODs, such as PTFs, for example.

Confirming processing requirements

Figure 43 shows the panel that is displayed when you attempt to end the Zone Configuration function when the DLIB and target zone names you have specified are in error and you chose to ignore error message CPP0639006E. You have used the same zone name more than once.
CPPP6393 --------------------------------------------------------------------COMMAND ==> Confirm Processing Requirements The Zone Configuration table contains at least one duplicate zone name

Press the ENTER key to continue editing the table Press the END or RETURN key to save the current values and EXIT, Processing will resume at this function

Figure 43. Panel: Confirm processing requirements

If you press Enter, the cursor is positioned on the first duplicate zone name. If you press End, you exit the panel now, but you will have to return to it before you can continue with the installation.

Chapter 7. Defining the SMP/E zone configuration

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

CPPPFLOW - - - - - - - - - - - Installation Options for Order ( MD053718 ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - OPTION ==> Complete these options to install the order:
C V Z M * * * Create Variables Zones Modify Alias SSA Installation Create the Work Configuration Specify Values for Variables Specify SMP/E Zone Names Modify the System Layout Specify Catalogs for High-Level Qualifiers Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs Create and Submit Installation Jobs (Option not available until download complete)

You can use Save any time after creating the work configuration:
S Save Save the Current Work Configuration

From the Installation Menu, enter Modify to begin the next dialog function. The Modify System Layout Options panel is displayed, as shown in Figure 44.
CPPP605T --------- Modify System Layout Options ( MD053718 ) ---------OPTION ==> A C T D M S U V L P Create a Recommended System Layout (Automatically assign target and DLIB data sets to physical volumes by data set type) View and change data sets by selected attributes View and change device type table (DEVT) Data Set Summary (SUMD) Merged Data Set Summary (SUMD M) Shipped and Merged Data Set Summary (SUMD S) User Data Set Summary (SUMD U) Physical Volume Summary (SUMP) Logical Volume Summary (SUML) Product, Feature, and Element Summary

--------------------- Session Control Options --------------------K Keep Changes made in this dialog session so far (SAVE) B Back Out changes from this dialog session (CANcel)

Figure 44. Panel: Modify system layout options

During this part of the dialog, you create the data set layout for your new system. After you have modified this configuration, you can save it for merging with future ServerPac installations. IBM recommends that you modify your configuration in the following order: 1. Data set merges, if any 2. Data set space changes, if any 3. Specifying Reserved Space, if it will be used

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

Modifying the system layout

4. Specifying which volumes are not to be initialized 5. Everything else. This method can help you avoid situations in which volumes become overallocated. You can create the new data set layout in one of three ways: v Use Option A, Recommended System Layout, to assign your orders target and DLIB data sets to volumes automatically. v Use Option C, View and Change, to assign your orders data sets to volumes by displaying groups of data sets and use the CHANGE PVOL command (described in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165) to specify their placement on physical volumes. v Use the other options (D, M, S, U, V, L, and P) to assign your orders data sets to logical volumes and then assign those logical volumes to physical volumes (DASD). To save the most time in the dialog, use Option A to create the recommended system layout. The dialog will automatically assign your orders target and DLIB data sets to your DASD volumes, attempting to match, as closely as possible, the IBM recommended system layout that is described in the topic, Recommended Data Set Placement, in z/OS Planning for Installation. Then use the View and Change Facility for any subsequent changes you make to the configuration data sets. This chapter describes the recommended approach in three sections, as follows: v Option A in Creating the recommended system layout on page 75 v Option C in Viewing and changing data sets on page 95 v Option T in Displaying device types on page 114. To control data set placement, use either Options A and C, or use the Summary Display commands for data sets (the SUMD commands), but not both. If you create a new layout through Option A or change data set assignments in Option C and later attempt to manage data set placement using the dialogs Summary Display commands, you will have difficulty because the dialogs automatic logical volume assignments will be dramatically different from those you have saved in previous releases. (Note that the summary of physical volumes displayed by Option V or the SUMP command is still used to manage volumes, no matter how you choose to control data set placement.) To aid your work in this phase of the dialog, the Modify System Layout Options panel includes session control options to allow you to set the disposition of your changes, as follows: Option K B Description Keep any changes that you have made since the last SAVE. Back out (discard) any changes that you have made since the last SAVE, and exit the Modify System Layout function.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

Creating the recommended system layout

IBMs recommended system layout provides a foundation for the ongoing growth and maintenance of your system. When you group your systems data sets by their content and importance to your installation, you help to minimize the complexity of future installations. For a further discussion of the benefits of using the recommended system layout, see the topic, Recommended Data Set Placement, in z/OS Planning for Installation. When you select the Recommended System Layout option of the dialog, you are choosing to allow the dialog to automatically assign some or all of the target and DLIB data sets in your order to DASD volumes. The dialog assigns data sets based on the following considerations: v Whether the data set is a target data set or a DLIB data set v Whether the data set must reside on the IPL volume v The type of data in the data set (panels, messages, load modules, and so on) v Whether the dialog should attempt to place the data set on the first or last volume in the configuration. The dialog does not automatically assign an orders operational data sets or any of the sample CustomPac Data sets. You must continue to place these data sets yourself based upon the IBM recommended system layout that is described in Recommended Data Set Placement in z/OS Planning for Installation. If you are using a saved configuration with your order, and you run the Recommended System Layout option, only the new operational data sets remain to be assigned afterward. Here, you can use the dialogs View and Change Facility to help with determining which data sets are operational data sets. In View and Change, display the data sets that are new to the configuration. Then, examine this list for any operational data sets. If you do not know the operational data sets by name, you must display each of them for further information. The dialog does not automatically assign any SMS-managed data sets in the configuration. Your SMS-managed data sets must reside on volumes other than those used for automatic assignment. If you include a saved configuration from a previous order in the current work configuration, the dialog preserves any data set changes you might have made in the saved configuration.

Excluding specific data sets from automatic assignment

If there are specific data sets that you want to exclude from automatic assignment: 1. Identify the data sets you want to exclude and temporarily assign them to a storage class 2. Use Recommended System Layout 3. Reassign the data sets you assigned to a storage class above to physical volumes, using the CHANGE PVOL command (see Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165) or the summary display commands

The role of volumes in automatic assignment

To begin the automatic assignment of data sets to volumes, you can make some of your existing volumes available to the dialog for creating the new system, or you can have the dialog create a configuration based entirely on new volumes. During

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

Modifying the system layout

automatic assignment, the dialog assigns data sets to these volumes. If the dialog requires additional volumes to contain the new configuration, the dialog creates more volumes automatically. If you are installing a z/OS order, you must use 3390-3 volumes (or larger) to accommodate some very large data sets in your order. It is possible to use smaller volumes for subsystem orders because these orders usually do not contain very large data sets, but the dialog will not support them.

How volume types are used

The type of data sets to be stored on a volume determines its volume type, as follows: Target volume DLIB volume BOTH volume Target library data sets DLIB data sets Target library data sets or DLIB data sets (or both). BOTH volumes are intended for use with subsystem orders, which are often small enough to fit entirely on one volume. Also, BOTH volumes provide a final alternative in the event there are not enough target or DLIB volumes available for a data set assignment.

Usually, the dialog creates only target and DLIB volumes, not BOTH volumes. The dialog creates BOTH volumes only in the case in which there are no target (or DLIB) volumes available in the configuration, you have explicitly created at least one BOTH volume for the configuration, and there are additional target or DLIB data sets to be assigned.

How volume sequence numbers are used

For each volume in the new configuration, the dialog assigns a unique sequence number to indicate the order in which the volume will be selected for data set assignments. The volume sequence number follows a naming convention: Tnn for target volumes, Dnn for DLIB volumes, and Bnn for BOTH volumes, where nn is 01 - 99, for a maximum of 99 volumes per type.

Assigning data sets to volumes

If the work configuration contains data sets that must reside on the IPL volume, the dialog assigns these data sets to the first target volume (T01). Then, the dialog assigns data sets to volumes, based on their element type. The dialog assigns element types in the following order (from first to last): v LMOD v PARM v PROC v CLIST v EXEC v PNLxxx v SKLxxx v TBLxxx v MSGxxx v HELPxxx v Data sets, which have TVOL set to FIRST, that should reside on the first target volume v All other element types and data sets having no element type v Data sets, which have TVOL set to LAST, that should be placed on the last volumes in the configuration.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

For example, the dialog assigns your configurations panel data sets (element type PNLxxx) to volumes before it assigns your skeleton libraries (element type SKLxxx). Some products include one or more data sets that should reside either on the first target volume or on one of the last target volumes in the configuration. For example, a product might include several data sets of element type DATA that should reside on the IPL volume, which is always the first target volume. During automatic assignment, the dialog recognizes such data sets and attempts to place them according to this requirement, rather than with other data sets of the same element type. When TVOL is set to FIRST, the dialog will attempt to place the data set on the first volume where it will fit. Therefore, this might not be the first volume in the configuration, which for z/OS orders is the IPL volume. If there are multiple data sets for which the Special target volume placement attribute is set to FIRST, they might not all be placed on the first volume or the same volume in the configuration. When TVOL is set to LAST, the dialog will attempt to place the data set on the volume that is last in the configuration at the time the data set is about to be assigned. If there is not enough room on that volume, the dialog will automatically create another volume. Therefore, if there are multiple data sets for which the Special target volume placement attribute is set to LAST, they might not all be placed on the same volume.

Setting the scope of automatic assignments

When you select the All option to Create a Recommended System Layout from the Modify System Layout Options panel, the panel shown in Figure 45 is displayed. This option causes the dialog to automatically assign the target and DLIB data sets in the configuration to physical volumes. The dialog does not automatically assign any SMS-managed data sets in the configuration.
CPPP625B --------- Automatic Data Set Assignment ( MD053718 ) ---------OPTION ==> A - ALL Assign all target and DLIB data sets in the configuration to physical volumes automatically. This option creates a recommended system layout. Add new data sets to an existing configuration. This option automatically assigns new data sets, but preserves the placement of previously-assigned data sets in your saved configuration.

N - NEW

P - PARTIAL Assign new data sets and reassign some existing data sets to physical volumes. This option automatically assigns all new data sets to physical volumes, as well as data sets from selected volumes in the saved configuration. Enter EITHER a default device type OR a model volume below: Default Device Type ==> 3390-3 Model after Volume ==> (For example, 3390-3) (For example, ZOSRES)

Figure 45. Panel: Modify system layout options

You can control the scope of the dialogs automatic assignments by selecting one of the following settings in the Modify System Layout Options panel:
Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

Modifying the system layout

ALL NEW This setting causes all target and DLIB data sets in the configuration to be automatically assigned to physical volumes. This setting causes data sets that are new to the configuration to be automatically assigned to physical volumes, but preserves the assignment of data sets that already exist on volumes in the saved configuration. This setting causes all new data sets in the configuration to be automatically assigned to physical volumes, and also allows you to exclude particular volumes from the saved configuration, freeing their data sets for reassignment.

PARTIAL

To see which new data sets will be assigned automatically, you can use the dialogs View and Change Facility to create a list of data sets that have the attribute New Data Set. For more information, see Viewing and changing data sets on page 95. In some cases, not every setting on this panel is selectable. For example, if you are not including a saved configuration in the new configuration, the only selectable setting on this panel is All. Choosing between PARTIAL and NEW: The Partial and New settings allow you to preserve some or all of your existing data set assignments. Choosing between these two settings requires careful consideration of your existing volumes. Usually, the best choice is the one that creates the least work for you. Both Partial and New cause the dialog to automatically assign new data sets and preserve some or all of your current assignments. Partial preserves your existing assignments, except for those volumes that you choose to make available for reassignment (through the eXclude line command). New preserves all of your existing assignments. The advantage of Partial over New is increased flexibility. New does not allow you to move volumes or rename them before you enter the CReate command (as you can with All or Partial). If you have used the Recommended System Layout option before, the dialog displays volumes in sequence number order. Otherwise, the New setting simply displays the IPL volume first, if there is one in the configuration, and places remaining volumes in alphanumeric order. The dialog always attempts to assign data sets to volumes in the order in which they are displayed. Once they are used for automatic assignment, each volume will have a sequence number. If you need to move or rename volumes, it is recommended that you use All or Partial. (If you choose New and then need to rename volumes so that they show up in the order you want, you must follow the procedures described at the end of this section.) In choosing between New or Partial, consider whether you have used the Recommended System Layout option before. If so, use New when both of the following conditions are true: v You used All in the past and you want to continue placing new data sets according to the Recommended System Layout. v Your volumes have enough space to ensure that new data sets will be logically grouped with existing data sets of the same element type. You should also use New if you do not want existing data sets to be moved and you do not want to place the new ones yourself.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

In all other cases, choose All or Partial instead of New. If you are reusing a saved configuration and you have not used the Recommended System Layout option before, the NEW setting offers the most benefit when your existing configuration follows the IBM recommended system layout that is described in the topic, Recommended Data Set Placement, in z/OS Planning for Installation, and your volumes have adequate free space. If you have already gone through the effort of manually creating a Recommended System Layout configuration and have sufficient free space on the volumes, you should use the New path. The first time you use automatic assignment, the dialog will assume that volumes are named using an ascending alphanumeric naming pattern (such as OSRES1, OSRES2, ... or OSRESA, OSRESB, ...) when assigning sequence numbers for automatic assignment. Therefore, if you have not used automatic assignment before and your target volume names do not follow an ascending alphanumeric naming pattern, you should rename the volumes before using the New path, and then rename the volumes to their original names afterward, as follows: v Before using Recommended System Layout, enter the SUMP command to display the work configurations physical volumes. In the display, rename the target volumes to names that would ensure that the volumes would appear in the proper sequence when sorted alphanumerically. v In Recommended System Layout, choose the New setting and create the new configuration. The volumes will be assigned sequence numbers. v Display the volumes in the new configuration. Change the target volume names back to what you want them to be. The dialog will preserve this volume sequence for subsequent installations regardless of the volume names, until you choose to no longer preserve the volumes (for example, by excluding them during a subsequent PARTIAL automatic assignment). Setting the default device type or model-after volume: On the Automatic Data Set Assignment panel, you must enter either a device type or a model volume to specify the type of device to be used if the dialog creates more volumes for data set assignments. If you choose to specify a model volume, either the volume must already be in the configuration or you must have set the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable to Y and the volume must be online. If you choose to specify a device type, ensure that device type has been defined to the dialog. To see a list of other available devices, enter a question mark (?) in the Default Device Type field and press Enter. You can then select the device type you want from the pop-up display. To add user-defined device types to this list, return to the Modify System Layout Options panel and enter Option T. If you are installing a z/OS order, you must use 3390-3 volumes (or larger) to accommodate some very large data sets in the order. You can use smaller volumes for a subsystem order because these orders usually do not contain very large data sets, but the dialog does not support them..

Displaying the current volume configuration

After you select a setting for automatic assignment, the dialog displays the current volume configuration, as shown in Figure 46 on page 80.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

Modifying the system layout

CPPP625C ---- Automatic Data Set Assignment ( MD053718 ) ---- ROW 1 TO 7 OF 7 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Current Volume Configuration Scope==> ALL

Primary Commands: (? Reset CReate) Line Commands: (Select Insert List Move After Before eXclude) Phys. Volume Sequence Device Used + S Volume Type Number Type Reserved - ------ ------ -------- ------ -------MVSRES TARGET T01 3390-3 315 % MVSDLB DLIB D01 3390-3 224 % ******************************* Bottom of Data Volume Existing Reserved Threshold Data Space --------- -------- -------85% 0 % 0 % 85% 0 % 0 % ***************************

Figure 46. Panel: Current volume configuration

As shipped by IBM, a new configuration consists of a target volume (MVSRES), a DLIB volume (MVSDLB), and a catalog volume (MVSCAT). Because MVSCAT contains only operational data sets, this volume is excluded from automatic assignments, and therefore is not shown in the panel display. Volumes are shown in volume sequence order if they have been used for automatic assignment before. Otherwise, all volumes except the IPL volume are shown in alphanumerical order. The IPL volume, if it is present in the order, is always shown first with sequence number T01. If you use existing volumes for data set assignments, the dialog checks the storage capacity of these volumes. If the dialog creates a volume (and the DYNAMIC DASD INFO installation variable is set to YES), the dialog determines whether the volume is online. If so, the dialog retrieves the volumes attributes and available space, just as if the volume had been inserted on the Current Volume Configuration panel. For the ALL or PARTIAL settings, the dialog limits its use of volumes (new and existing) to 85% of capacity. The dialog preserves the remaining 15% of each volumes capacity for later growth of existing data sets and the assignment of data sets that might be added during future installations. For the NEW setting, the dialog limits its use of new volumes to 85% of capacity, but allows its use of existing volumes to increase to 90% before restricting these volumes from further data set assignments. Note: You can further limit the dialogs use of a volume capacity to less than the default 85% by reserving additional space. For example, if you want the volume to have 25% free space at the end of automatic assignment, you can do this by reserving 10% of the volumes space (334 cylinders for a 3390-3) for the ALL or PARTIAL settings or 15% for the NEW setting. When the total of used space and reserved space is 10 times the size of the volume or more (that is, more than 999%), the Used + Reserved column will contain 999 % *, with the asterisk (*) highlighted as an eyecatcher. In the Current Volume Configuration panel, use line command S to select volumes for changes. Use line command L to list the data sets currently assigned to a volume. Use line command I to insert more volumes into the work configuration. Use line command X to make exceptions to automatic assignments (as described in Excluding volumes from automatic assignments on page 81).

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

When you select the ALL or PARTIAL settings, the following line commands are also available on this panel: M, A, B Move a volume to a different position in the list. To move a volume after another, enter Move for the volume to be moved, and After for the volume that is to precede it. To move a volume before another, enter Move and Before. You can move a volume only among other volumes of the same type. For example, you can move a target volume before or after other target volumes, but not into a group of DLIB volumes or BOTH volumes. To move a volume into a group of volumes of a different type, you must first change the volumes type to the other type (target, DLIB, or BOTH) through line command S. You can then move the volume within the group of volumes with that type. Moving a volume will cause the dialog to adjust the volume sequence numbers accordingly. If your installation uses volume names that do not ascend in the same order in which you want to have the dialog use the volumes, you can use the Move, After, and Before line commands in the Current Volume Configuration panel to reposition the volumes in the order in which you want them to be used. The dialog will retain the volume sequence numbers and use them in the appropriate order thereafter. If you select the NEW setting for your first use of automatic assignment, you should temporarily rename the volumes in the dialog, use the Recommended System Layout option, and then rename the volumes back to their original names. When you have finished making changes to volumes, enter the primary command CRreate on the Current Volume Configuration display to create a new configuration. Excluding volumes from automatic assignments: The Current Volume Configuration panel provides line command eXclude to allow you to make exceptions to automatic assignment. Line command eXclude has different uses, based on the scope of automatic assignment, as follows: v For the ALL setting, you use line command eXclude to select volumes for removal from the work configuration (the volumes are not actually removed from the work configuration until after you enter the CReate command to create the configuration). The dialog does not use excluded volumes for data set assignments. When you create the new configuration (through the CReate command) and display it again, excluded volumes do not appear in the panel. v For the NEW setting, you use line command eXclude to make a volume ineligible for the assignment of new data sets; the volume remains in the work configuration and its existing data set assignments are left unchanged. However, as in the ALL setting, the volume is removed from the Current Volume Configuration panel because no new data sets will be assigned to it. When you create the new configuration and display it again, excluded volumes do not appear in the panel. (However, if you exit the Recommended System Layout function and re-enter it, the volume is again included in the Current Volume Configuration panel.) v For the PARTIAL setting, you use line command eXclude to make a volumes data sets eligible for reassignment. When you create the new configuration, the excluded volume is removed from the work configuration. When you enter a CReate command, an excluded volume will also be removed from the Current
Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

Modifying the system layout

Volume Configuration panel because the volumes data sets will be reassigned to other volumes. When you redisplay the Current Volume Configuration panel, the excluded volume does not appear in the Current Volume Configuration panel. If you exclude a volume from the work configuration and then later change your mind, you can restore the volume to the Current Volume Configuration panel. If you have not yet created the new configuration (through the CReate command), you can restore the volume to the panel by exiting the Recommended System Layout option and re-entering it. The configuration will be displayed as it was when you previously entered the Recommended System Layout option. If you have already created the configuration, choose one of following approaches: v In the ALL and PARTIAL settings, the volume is gone. Do one of the following: Add the volume to the configuration and assign data sets to it Rename one of the new volumes to the volser you want Recreate the configuration (re-enter the CReate command) and try again. v In the NEW setting, the volume will re-appear when you exit the Recommended System Layout option after creating the new configuration.

Selecting volumes for changes

If you select a volume for changes, the dialog displays the panel shown in Figure 47, allowing you to change the volume and save your changes.
CPPP625D ---- Automatic Assignment - Attributes ( MD053718 ) -------------------COMMAND ==> Display and Change Volume Attributes Volume Serial ==> MVSRS1 Volume Type ==> TARGET Device Type ==> 3390-3 Reserved Space ==> 0 Initialize Volume ==> N (Always required) (Target, DLIB or Both - Always required) (For example, 3390-3) (Cylinders) (Y or N)

Note: Only the volume serial and volume type are required for online volumes when the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable is set to Yes.

Figure 47. Panel: Display and change volume attributes

Use caution in resetting volumes from Initialize Volume NO to Initialize Volume YES. Doing so causes the volume to be initialized by the installation jobs, and any existing data on the volume is lost. Volumes for which Initialize Volume is set to NO must be online, even if DYNAMIC DASD INFO is set to NO. To save your changes to the volume, press Enter. You return to the Current Volume Configuration display.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

Examples of using automatic assignment

How you achieve the recommended system layout depends on whether you are starting with an entirely new system or bringing forward a saved configuration to be merged with the new order. And, in the later case, whether you are using the Recommended System Layout option for the first time, or have already used it on the saved configuration. This section presents the panel sequence for each of these situations. To determine a course of action, review each example and choose the one that best matches your objectives, as follows: v Example 1: Using ALL without a saved configuration v Example 2: Using ALL with a saved configuration on page 86 v Example 3: Using NEW with a saved configuration on page 89 v Example 4: Using PARTIAL with a saved configuration on page 92.

Example 1: Using ALL without a saved configuration

Follow this path if you are installing a ServerPac order for the first time, or if you are not using a saved configuration as the basis of your new system. This approach creates a new configuration based only on the new order to be installed. Select Automatic Data Set Assignment (Option A) from the Modify System Layout Options panel. The panel shown in Figure 48 is displayed.
CPPP625B --------- Automatic Data Set Assignment ( MD053718 ) ---------OPTION ==> A - ALL Assign all target and DLIB data sets in the configuration to physical volumes automatically. This option creates a recommended system layout. Add new data sets to an existing configuration. This option automatically assigns new data sets, but preserves the placement of previously-assigned data sets in your saved configuration.

N - NEW

Figure 48. Panel: Modify system layout options

Because you are not including a saved configuration in the new configuration, the only selectable setting on this panel is All. This setting causes the dialog to automatically assign all target and DLIB data sets in your order to physical volumes. On the Automatic Data Set Assignment panel, you must enter either a device type or a model volume to specify the type of device to be used if the dialog creates more volumes for data set assignments. Check this value to ensure that the device type is available for this installation. To see a list of other available devices, enter a question mark (?) in the Default Device Type field and press Enter. You can then select the device type you want from the pop-up display. A configuration can include more than one device type.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

Modifying the system layout

If the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable is set to Y, the model volume must be online. If DYNAMIC DASD INFO is set to N, the model volume must already exist in the configuration. Enter All and press Enter. The current volume configuration is shown (Figure 49).
CPPP625C ---- Automatic Data Set Assignment ( MD053718 ) ---- ROW 1 TO 7 OF 7 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Current Volume Configuration Scope==> ALL

Primary Commands: (? Reset Create) Line Commands: (Select Insert List Move After Before eXclude) Phys. Volume Sequence Device Used + Volume Type Number Type Reserved ------ ------ -------- ------ -------MVSRES TARGET T01 3390-3 315 % MVSDLB DLIB D01 3390-3 224 % ******************************* Bottom of Data S Volume Existing Reserved Threshold Data Space --------- -------- -------85 % 0 % 0 % 85 % 0 % 0 % ***************************

Figure 49. Panel: Current volume configuration

Here, the configuration consists of a target volume (MVSRES), a DLIB volume (MVSDLB), and a catalog volume (MVSCAT). Because MVSCAT contains only operational data sets, this volume is excluded from automatic assignments, and therefore is not shown in the panel display. Observe that MVSRES and MVSDLB are overallocated. If you plan to rename these volumes, select the volumes now through line command S and rename them as needed. Later, when the new configuration is created, it is more difficult to rename these volumes. If you choose to change the device type, do so now through line command S, rather than after you create the new configuration (by entering the CReate command on the Current Volume Configuration panel). Otherwise, the volume might become overallocated (for example, if the default is 3390-3 and you change it to 3390-2). To have the dialog create the new configuration, enter the primary command CReate and press Enter. The panel shown in Figure 50 on page 85 is displayed, allowing you to confirm this action before continuing.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

CPPP625E ---- Automatic Assignment Confirmation ( MD053718 ) ----------------COMMAND ==> Scope: ALL You have chosen to have data sets automatically assigned to physical volumes. IF YOU CONTINUE, THE ASSIGNMENTS CANNOT BE EASILY REVERSED WITHIN MODIFY SYSTEM LAYOUT. However, you will be able to modify the configuration after the assignments have been done. If you decide not to use the automatic assignments after they have been done, return to Create Configuration, create the configuration again, and use other options in Modify System Layout to tailor your configuration. Enter Y to continue, or N to return to the previous panel: Continue ==> Y ( Y or N )

Figure 50. Panel: Automatic assignment confirmation

To continue, press Enter. The CustomPac progress panel is displayed (as shown in Figure 51) as volumes are assigned. |
CPPPMLOG -------------******** ********** *** ** ** ** ******* *** ** ** **** ** *** *** *** **** * *** ** *** *** * **** ********** ********** ** **** ******** ******** ******* ---------------All Rights Reserved ******** ********** *** **** *** **** ********** ******** *** *** **** **** ********** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **

* ****** * * * * *

********** ********** *** *** *** *** ********** ******** *** ***

--------------------------P L E A S E W A I T ***** ** ********** *** **** *** **** ********** ***** ** ******** ********** *** *** *** ********** ******** AUTOMATIC DATA SET ASSIGNMENT IN PROGRESS VERIFYING SEQ. NUMBERS --------------------------

Figure 51. Panel: Automatic assignment progress panel

After Recommended System Layout completes, the Current Volume Configuration panel (Figure 52 on page 86) is displayed again to show you the new configuration.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

Modifying the system layout

CPPP625C ---- Automatic Data Set Assignment ( MD053718 ) ---- ROW 1 TO 7 OF 7 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE CPP0625014I Automatic data set assignment complete. Current Volume Configuration Scope==> ALL

Primary Commands: (? Reset Create) Line Commands: (Select Insert List Move After Before eXclude) Phys. Volume Sequence Device Used + Volume Type Number Type Reserved ------ ------ -------- ------ -------MVSRES TARGET T01 3390-3 84 % TARG02 TARGET T02 3390-3 83 % TARG03 TARGET T03 3390-3 85 % s TARG04 TARGET T04 3390-3 62 % MVSDLB DLIB D01 3390-3 83 % DLIB02 DLIB D02 3390-3 83 % DLIB03 DLIB D03 3390-3 55 % ******************************* Bottom of Data S Volume Existing Reserved Threshold Data Space --------- -------- -------85 % 0 % 0 % 85 % 0 % 0 % 85 % 0 % 0 % 85 % 0 % 0 % 85 % 0 % 0 % 85 % 0 % 0 % 85 % 0 % 0 % ***************************

Figure 52. Panel: Current volume configuration

The new configuration is shown. Observe the following results: v Four target volumes and three DLIB volumes were used for the new configuration: MVSRES, TARG02, TARG03, TARG04, MVSDLB, DLIB02, and DLIB03. v The volumes were assigned sequence numbers T01 through T04, and D01 through D03, respectively, and are of the default device type (3390-3). v All but the last volumes of each type were filled close to the threshold (85%). The final volumes, TARG04 and DLIB03, contain the remainder of the target and DLIB data sets from your order. v No volumes are over-allocated. In some cases, you might find that the dialog creates more volumes than you think you need. If the last target or DLIB volume has very little used space and you want to eliminate it by placing its data sets on other volumes, you can reassign the volumes data sets using the dialogs View and Change Facility (Option C on the Modify System Layout Options panel). Select Current PVOL, select each volume in turn, and then use the CHANGE PVOL command to move the data sets to other volumes. For more information, see Viewing and changing data sets on page 95. If you decide to change the volumes after the new configuration has been created, use Option V from the Modify System Layout Options panel (shown in Figure 44 on page 73) to display the Summary of Physical Volumes and modify the volume names accordingly, as described in Displaying a summary of physical volumes on page 118.

Example 2: Using ALL with a saved configuration

This approach creates a new configuration based on your order and a saved configuration. Follow this path if you want the dialog to restructure your saved configuration in accordance with IBMs recommended system layout. Select Automatic Data Set Assignment (Option A) from the Modify System Layout Options panel. The panel shown in Figure 53 on page 87 is displayed.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

CPPP625B --------- Automatic Data Set Assignment ( MD053718 ) ---------OPTION ==> A - ALL Assign all target and DLIB data sets in the configuration to physical volumes automatically. This option creates a recommended system layout. Add new data sets to an existing configuration. This option automatically assigns new data sets, but preserves the placement of previously-assigned data sets in your saved configuration.

N - NEW

Figure 53. Panel: Modify system layout options

To reassign all target and DLIB data sets (saved and new), choose the ALL setting to cause the dialog to automatically assign these data sets to your DASD volumes, based on data set type. The ALL setting allows the dialog to create a new configuration that will follow the recommended system layout as much as possible. On the Automatic Data Set Assignment panel, you must enter either a device type or a model volume to specify the type of device to be used if the dialog creates more volumes for data set assignments. If you choose to specify a model volume, either the volume must already be in the configuration or you must have set the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable to Y and the volume must be online. If you choose to specify a device type, ensure that device type has been defined to the dialog. To see a list of other available devices, enter a question mark (?) in the Default Device Type field and press Enter. You can then select the device type you want from the pop-up display. Press Enter. The panel shown in Figure 54 on page 88 is displayed, showing the current configuration that you would see if the model volume MODVOL specified on the previous panel happened to be a 33903.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

Modifying the system layout

CPPP625C ---- Automatic Data Set Assignment ( MD053718 ) ---- ROW 1 TO 7 OF 7 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Current Volume Configuration Scope==> ALL

Primary Commands: (? Reset Create) Line Commands: (Select Insert List Move After Before eXclude) Phys. Volume Sequence Device Used + Volume Existing Reserved Volume Type Number Type Reserved Threshold Data Space ------ ------ -------- ------ -------- --------- -------- -------MARNA1 TARGET T01 3390-3 99 % 85 % 0 % 0 % MARNA2 TARGET T02 3390-3 85 % 85 % 0 % 0 % MARNA3 TARGET T03 3390-3 85 % 85 % 0 % 0 % MARNA4 TARGET T04 3390-3 84 % 85 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB1 DLIB D01 3390-3 95 % 85 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB2 DLIB D02 3390-3 94 % 85 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB3 DLIB D03 3390-3 81 % 85 % 0 % 0 % ******************************* Bottom of Data ***************************

S -

Figure 54. Panel: Current volume configuration

When you reuse a saved configuration, you already have target and DLIB volumes. Note that the contents of several volumes (MARNA1, OSDLIB1, OSDLIB2) exceed 85% of capacity. In this panel, you can use line command X (eXclude) to select volumes for removal from the work configuration (the volumes are not actually removed from the work configuration until after you enter the CReate command to create the configuration). The dialog does not use excluded volumes for data set assignments. To have the dialog create the new configuration, enter the primary command CReate and press Enter. The panel shown in Figure 55 is displayed, allowing you to confirm this action before continuing.
CPPP625E ---- Automatic Assignment Confirmation ( MD053718 ) ----------------COMMAND ==> Scope: ALL You have chosen to have data sets automatically assigned to physical volumes. IF YOU CONTINUE, THE ASSIGNMENTS CANNOT BE EASILY REVERSED WITHIN MODIFY SYSTEM LAYOUT. However, you will be able to modify the configuration after the assignments have been done. If you decide not to use the automatic assignments after they have been done, return to Create Configuration, create the configuration again, and use other options in Modify System Layout to tailor your configuration. Enter Y to continue, or N to return to the previous panel: Continue ==> Y ( Y or N )

Figure 55. Panel: Automatic assignment confirmation

Be aware that the dialog organizes logical volumes very differently from the manner in which you assigned them in previous releases. If you attempt to use the older dialog functions (the Summary Display Commands) to manage the configuration after using Recommended System Layout, you will the find the old groupings to be replaced. Therefore, use either Recommended System Layout to derive logical volumes automatically, or the Summary Display Commands to derive logical volumes manually, but not a combination of both.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

To continue, press Enter. The CustomPac progress panel is displayed as volumes are assigned. After Recommended System Layout completes, the Current Volume Configuration panel (Figure 54 on page 88) is displayed again, to show you the new configuration. Press Enter. The panel shown in Figure 56 is displayed, showing the current configuration.
CPPP625C ---- Automatic Data Set Assignment ( MD053718 ) ---- ROW 1 TO 7 OF 7 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Current Volume Configuration Scope==> ALL

Primary Commands: (? Reset Create) Line Commands: (Select Insert List Move After Before eXclude) Phys. Volume Sequence Device Used + Volume Existing Reserved Volume Type Number Type Reserved Threshold Data Space ------ ------ -------- ------ -------- --------- -------- -------MARNA1 TARGET T01 3390-3 85 % 85 % 0 % 0 % MARNA2 TARGET T02 3390-3 85 % 85 % 0 % 0 % MARNA3 TARGET T03 3390-3 85 % 85 % 0 % 0 % MARNA4 TARGET T04 3390-3 85 % 85 % 0 % 0 % TARG05 TARGET T05 3390-3 13 % 85 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB1 DLIB D01 3390-3 85 % 85 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB2 DLIB D02 3390-3 85 % 85 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB3 DLIB D03 3390-3 85 % 85 % 0 % 0 % DLIB04 DLIB D04 3390-3 15 % 85 % 0 % 0 % ******************************* Bottom of Data ***************************

S -

Figure 56. Panel: Current volume configuration

The new configuration is shown. Observe the following results: v The new configuration required five target volumes and four DLIB volumes. These volumes were assigned sequence numbers T01 through T05, and D01 through D04, respectively. v Because the saved configuration contained several volumes that exceeded 85% of capacity, the dialog created two new volumes (TARG05 and DLIB04) of the default device type to reduce the use of volumes to no more than 85%. In the resulting configuration, all but the last volumes of each type were filled close to the threshold (85%).

Example 3: Using NEW with a saved configuration

This approach creates a new configuration by automatically assigning data sets in your order that are not present in your saved configuration. Follow this path if you want the dialog to preserve your saved configuration, but assign new data sets automatically. In this example, NEW is used with a configuration for which automatic assignment was not done previously. Select Automatic Data Set Assignment (Option A) from the Modify System Layout Options panel. The panel shown in Figure 57 on page 90 is displayed.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

Modifying the system layout

N - NEW

Figure 57. Panel: Modify system layout options

Select the NEW setting to cause the dialog to automatically assign data sets that are new to the configuration to physical volumes. The dialog preserves the assignment of data sets that already exist on volumes in the saved configuration. On the Automatic Data Set Assignment panel, you must enter either a device type or a model volume to specify the type of device to be used if the dialog creates more volumes for data set assignments. Check this value to ensure that the device type is available for this installation. To see a list of other available devices, enter a question mark (?) in the Default Device Type field and press Enter. (The list of available devices will contain only the devices that have already been defined or whose characteristics have already been discovered.) You can then select the device type you want from the pop-up display. A configuration can include more than one device type. If the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable is set to Y, the model volume must be online. If DYNAMIC DASD INFO is set to N, the model volume must already exist in the configuration. Press Enter. The panel shown in Figure 58 on page 91 is displayed, showing the current configuration.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

CPPP625C ---- Automatic Data Set Assignment ( MD053718 ) ---- ROW 1 TO 7 OF 7 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Current Volume Configuration Scope==> ALL

Primary Commands: (? Reset Create) Line Commands: (Select Insert List Move After Before eXclude) Phys. Volume Sequence Device Used + Volume Existing Reserved Volume Type Number Type Reserved Threshold Data Space ------ ------ -------- ------ -------- --------- -------- -------MARNA1 TARGET T01 3390-3 92 % 90 % 0 % 0 % MARNA2 TARGET T02 3390-3 85 % 90 % 0 % 0 % MARNA3 TARGET T03 3390-3 86 % 90 % 0 % 0 % MARNA4 TARGET T04 3390-3 27 % 90 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB1 DLIB D01 3390-3 88 % 90 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB2 DLIB D02 3390-3 86 % 90 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB3 DLIB D03 3390-3 38 % 90 % 0 % 0 % ******************************* Bottom of Data ***************************

S -

Figure 58. Panel: Current volume configuration

The dialog treats data sets in the saved configuration as existing data sets, and data sets that appear only in the new order as new data sets. Because automatic assignment has never been done for this configuration, your existing target and DLIB volumes lack volume sequence numbers. In this case, the dialog shows the sequence numbers for these volumes as they would appear after an automatic assignment. If you want the volumes to be used in a different order, use this panel to reposition the volumes. The dialog will adjust the volume sequence numbers accordingly. Because you limited automatic assignments to only new data sets, the dialog will use up to 100% of a volumes capacity for existing data sets and will assign new data sets to a volume that has reached up to 90% of its capacity. This additional space allows for the possible expansion of existing data sets and increases the likelihood that data sets of a given type will be placed together. On this panel, you can use line command X to make a volume ineligible for the assignment of new data sets; the volume remains in the work configuration and its existing data set assignments are left unchanged. Enter the primary command CReate on the Current Volume Configuration display to create a new configuration. The Automatic Assignment Confirmation panel is displayed, allowing you to confirm this action before continuing. Recommended System Layout organizes logical volumes very differently from how they were organized in previous releases. If you attempt to use the older dialog functions (the Summary Display Commands) to manage the configuration after using Recommended System Layout, you will the find the old groupings to be replaced. Therefore, use either Recommended System Layout to derive logical volumes automatically, or the Summary Display Commands to derive logical volumes manually, but not a combination of both. To continue, press Enter. The CustomPac progress panel is displayed as volumes are assigned. After Recommended System Layout completes, the Current Volume Configuration panel (Figure 58) is displayed again.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

Modifying the system layout

CPPP625C ---- Automatic Data Set Assignment ( MD053718 ) ---- ROW 1 TO 7 OF 7 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE CPP0625014I Automatic data set assignment complete. Current Volume Configuration Scope==> NEW

Primary Commands: (? Reset Create) Line Commands: (Select Insert List Move After Before eXclude) Phys. Volume Sequence Device Used + Volume Existing Reserved Volume Type Number Type Reserved Threshold Data Space ------ ------ -------- ------ -------- --------- -------- -------MARNA1 TARGET T01 3390-3 92 % 90 % 0 % 0 % MARNA2 TARGET T02 3390-3 90 % 90 % 0 % 0 % MARNA3 TARGET T03 3390-3 90 % 90 % 0 % 0 % MARNA4 TARGET T04 3390-3 90 % 90 % 0 % 0 % TARG05 TARGET T05 3390-3 26 % 85 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB1 DLIB D01 3390-3 90 % 90 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB2 DLIB D02 3390-3 90 % 90 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB3 DLIB D03 3390-3 90 % 90 % 0 % 0 % DLIB04 DLIB D04 3390-3 12 % 85 % 0 % 0 % ******************************* Bottom of Data ***************************

S -

Figure 59. Panel: Current volume configuration

The new configuration is shown. Observe the following results: v The dialog preserved the data set assignments of the saved configuration. v The dialog automatically assigned all new target and DLIB data sets to volumes. v The dialog created two new volumes (TARG05 and DLIB04) because the new order would exceed the capacity threshold of the existing volumes. The dialog restricts the other volumes from any additional data set assignments.

Example 4: Using PARTIAL with a saved configuration

Follow this path if you are reusing a saved configuration and want to preserve some of your existing data set assignments, but not all of them. The PARTIAL setting allows you to redistribute data sets, which is useful if your volumes become overallocated as data sets in the configuration grow over time. Select Automatic Data Set Assignment (Option A) from the Modify System Layout Options panel. The panel shown in Figure 60 on page 93 is displayed.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

N - NEW

Figure 60. Panel: Modify system layout options

To reassign some data sets but not all, choose the PARTIAL setting. During automatic data set assignment, the dialog reassigns all data sets on volumes that you explicitly exclude through line command X on the next panel. On the Automatic Data Set Assignment panel, you must enter either a device type or a model volume to specify the type of device to be used if the dialog creates more volumes for data set assignments. Check this value to ensure that the device type is available for this installation. To see a list of other available devices, enter a question mark (?) in the Default Device Type field and press Enter. (The list of available devices will contain only the devices that have already been defined or whose characteristics have already been discovered.) You can then select the device type you want from the pop-up display. A configuration can include more than one device type. If the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable is set to Y, the model volume must be online. If DYNAMIC DASD INFO is set to N, the model volume must already exist in the configuration. Press Enter. The panel shown in Figure 61 on page 94 is displayed, showing the current configuration.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

Modifying the system layout

CPPP625C ---- Automatic Data Set Assignment ( MD053718 ) ---- ROW 1 TO 7 OF 7 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Current Volume Configuration Scope==> PARTIAL

Primary Commands: (? Reset Create) Line Commands: (Select Insert List Move After Before eXclude) Phys. Volume Sequence Device Used + Volume Existing Reserved Volume Type Number Type Reserved Threshold Data Space ------ ----------- ------ -------- --------- -------- -------MARNA1 TARGET T01 3390-3 92 % 90 % 0 % 0 % MARNA2 TARGET T02 3390-3 85 % 90 % 0 % 0 % MARNA3 TARGET T03 3390-3 86 % 90 % 0 % 0 % MARNA4 TARGET T04 3390-3 27 % 90 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB1 DLIB D01 3390-3 88 % 90 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB2 DLIB D02 3390-3 86 % 90 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB3 DLIB D03 3390-3 38 % 90 % 0 % 0 % ******************************* Bottom of Data ***************************

S X

Figure 61. Panel: Current volume configuration

To make the data sets on an existing volume (MARNA2) available for automatic assignment, enter the eXclude line command to the left of the volume. The dialog will reassign the data sets on this volume. Enter the primary command CReate on the Current Volume Configuration display (Figure 61) to create a new configuration. The Automatic Assignment Confirmation panel is displayed, allowing you to confirm this action before continuing. To continue, press Enter. The CustomPac progress panel is displayed as volumes are assigned. After Recommended System Layout completes, the Current Volume Configuration panel (Figure 62) is displayed again.

CPPP625C ---- Automatic Data Set Assignment ( MD053718 ) ---- ROW 1 TO 8 OF 8 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE CPP0625014I Automatic data set assignment complete. Current Volume Configuration Scope==> PARTIAL

Primary Commands: (? Reset Create) Line Commands: (Select Insert List Move After Before eXclude) Phys. Volume Sequence Device Used + Volume Existing Reserved Volume Type Number Type Reserved Threshold Data Space ------ ------ -------- ------ -------- --------- -------- -------MARNA1 TARGET T01 3390-3 92 % 90 % 0 % 0 % MARNA3 TARGET T02 3390-3 89 % 90 % 0 % 0 % MARNA4 TARGET T03 3390-3 85 % 90 % 0 % 0 % TARG05 TARGET T04 3390-3 76 % 85 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB1 DLIB D01 3390-3 90 % 90 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB2 DLIB D02 3390-3 89 % 90 % 0 % 0 % OSDLB3 DLIB D03 3390-3 90 % 90 % 0 % 0 % DLIB04 DLIB D04 3390-3 55 % 85 % 0 % 0 % ******************************* Bottom of Data ***************************

S -

Figure 62. Panel: Current volume configuration

The new configuration is shown. Observe the following results:

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

v All data set assignments except those on MARNA2 (which was excluded), were preserved. MARNA2s data sets were reassigned. v Data sets on the volumes with sequence numbers T01, T03, T04, and D01-D03 were not reassigned, but stayed where they were. v The final volumes of each type, TARG05 and DLIB04, have increased to 76% and 55% of capacity, respectively. (As have some of the others, because the volume threshold was 90% and not all were previously 90% full.)

Viewing and changing data sets

The dialog provides you with a general-purpose view and change facility for working with groups of data sets in your configuration. With this facility, you can: v Display groups of data sets in your configuration by various attributes v Make changes to all or some of the data sets in a displayed group v Save lists of groups you display. For example, you can use the View and Change Facility to do the following tasks: v Identify your ISPF panel libraries, so that you can consolidate them through the Merge line command v Identify your link list libraries, so you can increase their primary space allocation amounts, or cause each of them to be allocated without secondary space. Also, a saved list of these data sets can be useful during migration to other systems after the installation has been completed. v Identify and save lists of LPA and APF list libraries. These lists are useful when updating catalogs and parmlib during migration to production systems. v Identify the unrenameable data sets, or those required in the master catalog, and change their status v Identify all new data sets. This list is useful, for example, when adding security system definitions, updating production PROCs, and in determining what new entries are needed in production master catalogs during migration. v Identify data sets that were shipped with no secondary space allocation. To access the View and Change Facility, select Option C from the Modify System Layout Options panel. A panel with a list of possible attributes from which to select is displayed, as shown in Figure 63 on page 96. Generally, the process of viewing and changing data sets in the work configuration follows this flow: 1. Choose the attribute to display. For example, assume that you want to view the English language panel data sets in your configuration. Here, you begin by choosing the Element Type attribute. 2. Narrow the scope of the display to only those data sets having one or more possible values for the attribute. In this example, choose the values PNL, PNLENU and PNLENP to create a list of the English language panel libraries in your configuration. 3. On the resulting display, you can enter CHange or Merge line commands for some or all of the data sets in this list, or you can save the list to a separate file for later examination. You can change data sets in various ways, including the following examples: v Change high-level qualifiers or names v Assign data sets on the list to different volumes v Override the unrenameable or required in master catalog attributes v Change eligible data sets from PDS to PDSE (or back again)
Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

Modifying the system layout

v Change eligible UNIX file systems from HFS to zFS (or back again) v Change space allocation amounts and specify whether data sets will be allocated with secondary space. For information about the CHange command, see Making changes to data sets on page 98. Figure 63 shows the panel that is displayed when you access the dialogs View and Change Facility (Option C on the Modify System Layout Options panel).
CPPP605R ------ Select Data Set View ( MD053718 ) ------ Row 1 to 29 of 29 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Select a Data Set List View: Primary Commands: (?) Line Commands: (Select) S Display Data Set List Description - -------------------------------------------------------------------Allocate New DS Whether the data set is to be allocated APF Required APF Authorization Required (Yes or No) Current LVOL Assigned Logical Volume Current PVOL Assigned Physical Volume Cylinders Current Data Set Size in Cylinders Data Set Type HFS, PDSE, PDS, SEQ, VSAM, or ZFS Device Type Assigned Device Type DDDEF Name Owning Product DDDEF Name Element Type Data Set Element Type (LMOD, PNLENU, EXEC, etc.) LNKLST Eligible Eligible for placement in the Link List (Yes or No) LPA Eligible Eligible for placement in LPA (Yes No) LPA Required Required in LPA List (Yes or No) LRECL Logical Record Length Master Catlg Must be in Master Catalog (Yes, No, or Overridden) Merge Status Merged and unmerged data sets Mount Point UNIX File System Mount Point New Data Set Whether data set is new in this order (Yes or No) Placement DLIB, Target, Operational Product Name Name of the product, feature, or element Renameable Whether rename is allowed (Yes, No, or Overridden) RECFM Record Format (FB, VB, U, etc.) Secondary Space Whether secondary space is allowed (Yes or No) Switchable Can be changed between PDS/PDSE or HFS/zFS (Yes or No) SMP/E SYSLIB Data set in the SMP/E SYSLIB concatenation (Yes or No) SMS-Eligible Whether data set may be SMS-managed (Yes or No) SMS-Managed Whether data set is SMS-managed (Yes or No) SMS-Required Whether data set must be SMS-managed (Yes or No) SST Subsystem Type (CICS, DB2, IMS, NCP) Tracks Current Data Set Size in Tracks TVOL Special target volume placement (FIRST or LAST) Unit Assigned Unit Volume Number Volume Sequence Numbers (Tnn, Dnn, and Bnn) ************************** Bottom of Data ***************************

Figure 63. Panel: Select a data set view

The list of attributes is scrollable. You can view data sets by any single attribute; you cannot select more than one attribute at a time. In Figure 63, the attribute SMP/E SYSLIB is selected; this is the first step in displaying a list of the data sets that appear in SMP/Es assembler SYSLIB concatenation in the SYSLIB DDDEF.

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

Use the Select line command to select an attribute to display and press Enter. The dialog displays a second panel with the values found for the selected attribute. In Figure 64, for example, the value YES is selected for the attribute SMP/E SYSLIB.
CPPP605S ---- Select Values to Display ( MD053718 ) -- Row 1 to 2 of 2 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Select list for: SMP/E SYSLIB Select values for which data sets are to be listed and press Enter: Primary Commands: (?) Line Commands: (Select SS) S Values - --------------No S Yes ******************************* Bottom of Data **********************

Figure 64. Panel: Select values to display

The dialog displays only values that are applicable to the order. For example, if you attempt to display the SMP/E SYSLIB data sets in an order that does not contain SMP/E SYSLIB data sets, the only displayed value is NO. Select the values for the attribute to display, and press Enter. The dialog displays a list of the data sets that satisfy your search criteria. The values you selected are shown, along with the physical volumes for the data sets. For example, in Figure 65, the dialog displays the data sets that appear in SMP/Es assembler SYSLIB concatenation in the SYSLIB DDDEF.
CPPP605U --------------- Data Set List ( MD053718 ) -------- Row 1 to 3 of 3 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Data Set List for: SMP/E SYSLIB Primary Commands:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT CHange OFile OList FindComp) Line Commands:(Merge eXpand Conflict Unmerge Select) S Data Set Name - -------------------------------------------ACFNCP.ANCPMAC1 ACFNCP.SNCPMAC1 ACFNCP.SSPCLS1 *************************** Bottom of Data Physical Selected Value Volume ----------------------- -------YES MVSDLB YES MVSRES YES MVSRES **************************

Figure 65. Panel: Select values to display

From this panel, you can make a number of changes to the data sets shown. For example, you could change all of the displayed link list data sets to set their secondary space allocation to zero (see Making changes to data sets on page 98). Your changes affect only the data sets that you select from the list.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

Modifying the system layout

The following primary commands are valid for this panel: ? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT These are standard commands for panels that display lists. See Primary commands on page 11. CHANGE This command is used to make changes to data sets in display lists. Use CHange to modify the various attributes and space requirements of multiple data sets. For information about the CHange command, see CHANGE on page 165. OFILE This command writes this data set list to a user-defined file. For information about the OFile command, see OFILE on page 187. OLIST This command writes the list of data sets to the ISPF LIST data set. For information about the OList command, see OLIST on page 189. FindComp This command helps you find a particular component data set among your merged data sets which can be useful, if you forget where you put the data set. Use this command to search on the shipped name of the data set or its modified name, using a full or partial data set name as input (as described in Finding lost component data sets on page 107). For information about the FindComp command, see FINDCOMP on page 181. The following line commands are valid for this panel: Merge-related line commands, as follows: M Starts the data set merge process by presenting a list of the currently displayed data sets that you can choose to merge into the selected data set. For more information, see Merging and unmerging data sets on page 102. Expands the display of a merged data set to show its component data sets. The components of a merged data set are displayed in a scrollable pop-up window that allows you to review the attributes and space of the individual component data sets. This display also allows you to unmerge specific component data sets. For more information, see Merging and unmerging data sets on page 102. Displays any data sets (in a scrollable pop-up) that contain at least one member with the same name as the selected data set. The dialog automatically excludes these data sets from the Merge Candidates panel for the selected data set. Unmerges the entire merged data set into its original, component data sets. For more information, see Merging and unmerging data sets on page 102.

Displays a panel on which you can change particular data set attributes. See Modifying a data sets attributes on page 109.

Making changes to data sets

CHANGE is a powerful command that you can use to make changes to many data sets at once. Using CHANGE is much faster than making changes to individual data sets in the dialog, so you should use it whenever possible to save time. Use this command to perform tasks such as:

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

v v v v v v v v v Changing data set names Making unrenameable data sets renameable Changing data set types Changing the SMS management status Overriding the master catalog requirement for data sets Changing the physical volume for data sets Allocate secondary space for data sets shipped with no secondary space Changing logical volumes Changing data set space values.

Based on the parameters you specify on your CHANGE command, the dialog checks the data sets in the current display list and returns a candidate list of data sets that are eligible to be changed by the command. At this point, changes are only simulated; no data sets have actually been changed. For example, Figure 66 shows a candidate list that simulates a change to data set types (for the CHANGE TYPE command).
CPPP6050 ------------- Modify System Layout ( MD053718 ) -- ROW 1 TO 4 OF 22 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE GLOBAL Change - Candidate List Change: Type

Primary Commands:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT CANcel) Line Commands:(eXclude) S Data Set Name (Old New) - -------------------------------------------AOP.AAOPEXEC AOP.AAOPEXEC -------------------------------------------AOP.AAOPHFS AOP.AAOPHFS -------------------------------------------AOP.AAOPMENU AOP.AAOPMENU -------------------------------------------AOP.AAOPPENU AOP.AAOPPENU -------------------------------------------DS Type ----PDS PDSE ----PDS PDSE ----PDS PDSE ----PDS PDSE ----SMS --N N --N N --N N --N N --P.Volume/ STORCLAS --------DLIB02 DLIB02 --------MVSDLB MVSDLB --------DLIB02 DLIB02 --------DLIB02 DLIB02 --------Seq Logical No. Volume --- ------D02 DLB308 D02 DLB308 --- ------D01 DLB318 D01 DLB318 --- ------D02 DLB308 D02 DLB308 --- ------D02 DLB307 D02 DLB307 --- -------

Figure 66. Panel: Global change - candidate list for data set attributes

You now must determine whether to commit the changes as shown in the display, cancel your change request, or exclude particular data sets from the candidate list before committing the changes. For example, the data sets shown in Figure 66 are currently in PDS format. Committing this change, however, would cause the data sets to be changed to PDSE format. To commit the changes, press Enter or End. To cancel the changes, enter the CANcel command and press Enter. Figure 67 on page 100 shows an example of a candidate list that is displayed for changes to data set space values (for the CHANGE SPACE command).

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

Modifying the system layout

CPPP6057 ------------- Modify System Layout ( MD053718 ) -- ROW 1 TO 5 OF 22 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE GLOBAL Change - Candidate List Change: Space

Primary Commands:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT CANcel) Line Commands:(eXclude) Primary Secondary S Data Set Name (Old New) Tracks Tracks - -------------------------------------------- ---------- ---------AOP.AAOPHFS 1400 400 AOP.AAOPHFS 1800 400 -------------------------------------------- ---------- ---------ASMT.AASMBOK2 680 400 ASMT.AASMBOK2 850 400 -------------------------------------------- ---------- ---------ASMT.AASMSHF2 680 400 ASMT.AASMSHF2 850 400 -------------------------------------------- ---------- ---------ASMT.SASMBOK2 680 400 ASMT.SASMBOK2 850 400 -------------------------------------------- ---------- ---------ASMT.SASMSHF2 680 400 ASMT.SASMSHF2 850 400

Directory Blocks --------6 6 --------6 6 --------6 6 --------6 6 --------6 6

Figure 67. Panel: Global change - candidate list for data set space values

Any changes that you make to merged data sets through the CHange command are applicable to their component data sets. These changes are retained even if you later unmerge the data set. The following primary commands are valid for this panel: ? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT These are standard commands for panels that display lists. See Primary commands on page 11. CANCEL This command, abbreviated as CAN, discards any changes that you have made to the data sets. The following line command is valid for this panel: X Excludes the selected data set from the list of data sets to be changed. The data set is not changed if the change is committed.

A detailed description of the CHange command and its syntax can be found in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165: v CHANGE command in general v CHANGE DSNAME v CHANGE DSNAME *HLQ* v CHANGE DSNTYPE v CHANGE LVOL v CHANGE MCAT v CHANGE PVOL v CHANGE RENAME v CHANGE SECOND v CHANGE SMS

100

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

v CHANGE SPACE

Some considerations for a maintenance system versus an IPL-able system

IBM recommends certain data set restrictions to help avoid potential problems with maintaining a production environment. By default, ServerPac ships your order with these restrictions. For example, LNKLST data sets are shipped with no secondary space allocations and data sets required to be cataloged in the master catalog. If you plan to use your ServerPac environment for support of system maintenance only, you may consider changing some of the IBM recommendations shipped with your ServerPac order. Using the ServerPac installation dialogs, you can make some of the modifications listed below prior to executing the ServerPac installation jobs. Using the Modify System Layout function within the ServerPac dialogs: v To add secondary space allocation to your data sets shipped with Secondary space 0. 1. Select D (Data Set Summary). 2. Enter CH SECOND Y to set the secondary space to be 10% of the primary space. 3. Use the X line command to exclude any data set that you dont want affected by this change. 4. If you want to increase the secondary space to be more than 10% of the primary, you can now use the CH SPACE command. v To remove the Master catalog requirement for data sets: 1. Select D (Data Set Summary). 2. Enter CH MCAT N to override the Must be in Master catalog attribute. 3. Use the X line command to exclude any data set that you dont want affected by this change. v To allow unrenameable data sets to be renameable: 1. Select D (Data Set Summary). 2. Enter CH RENAME Y to override the unrenameable attribute. 3. Use the X line command to exclude any data set that you dont want affected by this change.

Virtual storage management and LPA-eligible data sets

ServerPac puts all LPA-eligible data sets in the LPA list, which will probably reduce the size of the private area below 16MB. The View and Change option lets you display some lists that can help you determine what to move to the link list, or, in some cases, simply remove from the LPA list. There are four kinds of LPA-eligible data sets: 1. those that must be in the LPA list for the system to work (like LPALIB), 2. those you do need for a function you use to work (such as RMFs SERBLPA), 3. those that can be placed either in the LPA list for better performance or in the link list (like DFSORTs SORTLPA), and 4. those you do not need for a function to work (for example, ISAMs ISAMLPA, if you do not use ISAM). To see how much virtual storage will be used by an LPA list data set, browse each one and sort the member list by Residency Mode (enter SORT RM on the command line). Scroll to the bottom, and see whether the data set has RMODE 24 modules in it. If it does, you will use less virtual storage for LPA below 16MB if you

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

101

Modifying the system layout

remove it from the LPA list. Use these View and Change lists to help you decide what to move to the link list or simply remove from the LPA list: v LPA Required (leave all of these data sets in the LPA list) v LPA Eligible (those not required might be candidates for removing from the LPA list) v LNKLST Eligible (you might be able to move some LPA Eligible data sets there). For related information about virtual storage management, see the topic How Placement Affects Virtual Storage in z/OS MVS Initialization and Tuning Guide. Do not forget to compare the results to your current LPA list to see what changed.

Merging and unmerging data sets

The dialog allows you to simplify your new configuration by merging some of the PDS and PDSE or HFS and zFS data sets in your order (see Merging UNIX file system data sets on page 104). You can merge target data sets to reduce the number of libraries with similar attributes and uses. For example, you can merge ISPF panel libraries to consolidate them. Later, when you save your configuration through the Save Configuration command (see Chapter 12, Saving the configuration, on page 153), the dialog also saves the data for each merged data set and its component data sets. The merged data sets are then available for merging with future ServerPac orders. Unmerging a data set causes its attributes and space allocations to revert to their pre-merge values, with the exception of changes made to merged data sets through the CHANGE command (these are retained). Therefore, to avoid possible extra work, you should complete all merges and unmerges before going on to modify the attributes and space allocations of your merged data sets (as described in Modifying a data sets attributes on page 109). While you can merge data sets from any data set list panel, you can use this function most effectively from the dialogs View and Change Facility (described in Viewing and changing data sets on page 95). Use the View and Change Facility to create lists of specific kinds of target data sets for merging, so that you spend less time excluding individual data sets from merges. When you select a data set for merging (through line command M), the Data Set Merge Candidates panel shown in Figure 68 on page 103 is displayed.

102

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

CPPP605M ------------- Modify System Layout ( MD053718 ) --- ROW 1 TO 9 OF 9 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Data Set Merge Candidates for BFS.SBFSPLIB Primary Commands:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT Merge) Line Commands:(Information Select Conflict) Element DS MCAT IPL Type Type Reqd Vol APF --------- ----- --- ---PNLENU PDS N N N PNLENU PDS N N N PNLENU PDS N N N PNLENU PDS N N N PNLENU PDS N N N PNLENU PDS N N N PNLENU PDS N N N PNLENU PDS N N N ********************************

S Data Set Name - -------------------------------------------EOY.SEOYPENU GIM.SGIMPENU ICQ.ICQPLIB IOE.SIOEPNLE SYS1.DGTPLIB SYS1.SBPXPENU SYS1.SCBDPENU SYS1.SICEPENU ******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA

Figure 68. Panel: Data set merge candidates

This panel shows the data sets from the display list that are eligible for merging with the selected data set (the target data set). Enter Information to the left of a candidate data set and press Enter to get information about data set attributes. Enter Select to the left of candidate data sets to select them for merging with the target data set. In the Merge Candidates panel, observe the following: v The Element Type column displays the element type of the data set, or one of these values: LMOD, for load libraries and PDSEs containing program objects DLIB, for distribution libraries. v v v v For information about SMP/E element types, see SMP/E Reference, SA22-7772. The DS Type column displays the data set type. The MCAT Reqd column displays a Y if the data set must be cataloged in the master catalog. The IPL Vol column displays a Y if the data set resides on the IPLVOL logical volume. The APF column displays a Y if the data set requires APF authorization.

Not all data sets can be merged. The dialog restricts you from some, but not all, merge operations that would result in configurations that would be unworkable, lack important functions, or perhaps even be impossible to IPL. Specifically, the dialog prevents you from making the following types of merges: v Merging libraries that are required in the LPA with libraries that cannot reside in the LPA. v Merging libraries that are eligible to reside in the LPA with libraries that cannot reside in the LPA. v Merging libraries that are eligible to reside in the link list concatenation with libraries that cannot reside in the link list. v Merging data sets shipped with no secondary space with data sets with secondary space. Also, the dialog prevents you from merging the following types of data sets:
Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

103

Modifying the system layout

v v v v v v The NUCLEUS data set The SVCLIB data set Operational data sets, such as PARMLIB and VTAMLST SMP/E data sets User data sets VSAM data sets

The dialog prevents you from merging any data sets that contain a member that matches (conflicts with) a member name within the selected data set. To see whether naming conflicts exist for a particular data set, enter line command C for the data set in the candidate list. Lastly, you cannot merge a data set that is already a component of another merged data set. In this case, you must first unmerge the component data set from the merged data set before you can merge it with another data set. The dialog allows you to merge data sets only when they share all of the following attributes with the target data set: v Record format (RECFM) v Logical record size (LRECL) v Data set type (DSNTYPE) v Eligibility to be managed by SMS v Compatible link list or LPA attributes v Origin library (DLIB or target library). The candidate list automatically excludes any data sets that do not match these attributes of the target data set. Also, the candidate list excludes data sets that do not match the SMS eligibility of the target data set. For a target data set that is managed by SMS, for example, the candidate list excludes data sets that are not eligible to be managed by SMS. Likewise, for a target data set that is not SMS-managed, the candidate list excludes data sets for which SMS management is required. The candidate list can extend for several screens. You can scroll through the list and select data sets, as needed, for merging with the target data set. When you are done selecting data sets, enter the M (merge) primary command on the command line of this panel and press Enter to merge the data sets. The dialog checks each selected component data set for member name conflicts with data sets that were previously merged into the target data set. If the dialog detects a conflict, a pop-up panel appears at the bottom of your screen. Press Enter to clear the pop-up and continue with the next selected data set in the candidates list. When the merge operation completes, the Data Set Merge Candidates panel displays a message indicating that the merge is successful. Redisplaying the data set list panel now shows an asterisk in the X column for the target data set. Also, the component data sets that were merged into the target data set no longer appear in the list.

Merging UNIX file system data sets

The dialog allows you to merge some of the eligible HFS and zFS data sets in your order. When you select a UNIX file system data set as a merge target (through line command M), the Data Set Merge Candidates panel shown in Figure 69 on page 105 is displayed. The panel shows the file system data sets that are eligible for merging with the selected data set (target data set). Later, when you save your

104

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

configuration through the Save Configuration command (see Chapter 12, Saving the configuration, on page 153), the dialog also saves the data for each merged file system data set and its component data sets. The merged file system data sets are now available for merging with future ServerPac orders.

CPPP605V ------------- Modify System Layout ( MD053718 ) --- ROW 1 TO 4 OF 4 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> HALF Data Set Merge Candidates for OMVS.ROOT Primary Commands:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous Merge) Line Commands:(Information Select) DS S Data Set Name Type Mount Point - -------------------------------------------- ----- ----- --- ---OMVS.AS390 zFS /usr/lpp/was OMVS.XML zFS /usr/lpp/xml ******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ********************

Figure 69. Panel: Data set merge candidates for UNIX file system data sets

The functions of the primary and line commands on this panel are the same as those for Figure 68 on page 103. The Conflict line command, however, is not applicable to the UNIX file system data sets and is not available on this panel. Not all file system data sets can be merged. The dialog prevents you from these restrictions. Specifically, the dialog prevents you from merging the following file system data sets in z/OS orders: v OMVS.ETC v OMVS.VAR Also, the dialogs prevents you from merging when the following conditions are not met: v The data set must be either: The same type (HFS or zFS), or The file system data set must be marked as Switchable. Use the dialogs View and Change Facility (Option C on the Modify System Layout Options panel) and select the display Switchable. v The merge target file system data set has a lower-level mount point. In order to merge eligible HFS and zFS data sets together they must both be included in the generated list from which you issue the Merge line command. For example, if you generate your list of file system data sets using the Data Set Type display from the dialogs View and change data sets by selected attributes facility, you must select both HFS and zFS data set types. Once you have selected the file system data sets to be merged you can enter the primary command Merge. For UNIX file system data sets, merge will proceed for a selected component when there are no other file system data sets having a mount point that is hierarchically between the target data sets mount point and the candidate component data sets mount point. The space allocated for a merged file system data set will be equal to the sum of the space of both the merge target data set plus the space of all the merge component data sets.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

105

Modifying the system layout

For an example of the MERGE command, refer to MERGE on page 185.

Considerations for merging data sets

When you enter the Merge command from a data set list panel, the dialog checks the data set list panel for data sets with matching attributes and presents these data sets as candidates for merging. The dialog does not enforce the operating systems rules for data set placement or rules that individual products might impose. Therefore, use caution in deciding which data sets to merge. Generally, to keep your configuration as manageable as possible, IBM recommends that you merge only data sets of the same element type or that serve a similar purpose. If you choose to merge data sets of different element types, understand that the dialog will display only one of those element types for the merged data set in subsequent dialog data set lists. Use the dialogs View and Change Facility, described in Viewing and changing data sets on page 95, to identify similar groups of target data sets that you can merge (the dialog does not display DLIB data sets by individual type). You might, for example, merge target libraries that are required in the LPA list or merge your ISPF panel libraries. Also, consider merging your procedure libraries into a smaller number of procedure libraries. These actions result in configurations that are easier to manage. Consider the following IBM recommendations: v Do not merge macro libraries with panel libraries; doing so can cause assemblies to fail. v Do not merge data sets that appear in the SMP/E SYSLIB concatenation. Usually, these are MAC and SRC data sets. To see which data sets in the configuration reside in SMP/E SYSLIB, use the dialogs View and Change Facility to display the data sets having an SMP/E SYSLIB attribute of YES. v Merge target data sets only. Do not merge DLIB data sets. v If you merge data sets that were originally shipped with no secondary space allocation that you later changed to having secondary allocation, any saved configuration for these data sets will reflect only the shipped values of these data sets and not the changed values.

Merging PDSE data sets

When merging PDSE data sets, observe the following: 1. You can merge PDSE data sets when they have matching RECFM, LRECL, and origin library (target or DLIB). 2. With some exceptions, you can merge PDS data sets with a PDSE target data set. The PDSE target data set must have matching characteristics (RECFM, LRECL, origin library). The exceptions are PDS data sets that must reside on the IPL volume or have a record format (RECFM) of U. The dialog automatically excludes these PDS data sets from the candidates list for a PDSE target data set. 3. You cannot merge a PDSE data set with a PDS target data set, unless you first change the PDSE data set to a PDS data set. This conversion is possible only if the PDSE was originally shipped as a PDS data set.

Effects of merging data sets

When merged, component data sets assume the following attributes of the target data set:

106

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

Data set name. Data set type (PDS or PDSE, HFS or zFS). Logical volume Physical volume or SMS, unless one or more of the component data sets is SMS managed and the target is SMS-eligible. If so, the merged data set becomes SMS managed. v Catalog, unless one or more of the component data sets is cataloged in the master catalog. If so, the merged data set becomes cataloged in the master catalog. v v v v A merged data set has the combined space of the merge target data set and its merge component data sets. If you merge data sets of different element types, the dialog displays only one of those element types for the merged data set in subsequent dialog data set lists. In selecting an element type to represent the merged data set, the dialog selects the highest element type from among the data sets being merged. To select an element type, the dialog uses the same priority order it uses for creating a recommended system layout (from highest to lowest; see Creating the recommended system layout on page 75). For example, merging a panel data set (element type PNLxxx) with a skeleton library (element type SKLxxx) results in a merged data set with an element type of PNLxxx. The dialog updates the installation jobs in your order to use the name of the merged data set. The dialog does not, however, update any product-supplied code on your system (such as EXECs or CLISTs) that might refer explicitly to data sets by name. As with renaming data sets, be aware that merging data sets can cause conflicts in any products that reference data sets explicitly by name. When a merge action completes, the dialog reserves the names of component data sets so that you can, if desired, unmerge the data sets during the Modify System Layout phase of installation. Use care, however, in merging data sets. After you begin to run the installation jobs, unmerging a data set requires you to reinstall the order, starting from Modify System Layout.

Finding lost component data sets

If you forget where a particular data set is after you merge it, you can use the FINDCOMP (Find Component) primary command on the Select Values to Display panel to find it among your merged data sets. The FINDCOMP command allows you to search for a data set by either its shipped name or its new name if you renamed the data set during a subsequent phase of the installation. For more information, see the FINDCOMP command in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165.

Unmerging data sets

When unmerged, a data set returns to its pre-merge values for data set name, data set type, attributes, and space allocations, with the exception of any changes you made through the CHANGE command (these are retained). You can unmerge a merged data set of all of its component data sets at once, or you can remove particular component data sets from a merged data set. To unmerge a merged data set of all its component data sets at once, enter line command U to the left of the merged data set. When you press Enter, a message is displayed to indicate whether the unmerge action was successful.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

107

Modifying the system layout

To remove only particular component data sets from a merged data set, you must first expand the display of the merged data set to see its individual component data sets. To do so, enter line command X (expand) to the left of the merged data set. The pop-up window shown in Figure 70 is displayed.
CPPP605U ------------- Data Set List ( MD053718 ) ---- ROW 1 TO 10 OF 10 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Data Set List for: Element type Primary Commands:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT CHange OFile OList FindComp) Line Commands:(Merge eXpand Conflict Unmerge Select) -----------------------------------------------------DSName |CPPP605X :(Information Unmerge) Row 1 to 3 of 3 | - ----------| | ANF.AANFE | | ANF.AANFL | Merge Component Data Sets for: | ANF.AANFM | ANF.AANFEXEC | ANF.AANFM | S Data Set Name | X ANF.AANFP | - -----------------------------------| ANF.AANFS | * ANF.AANFPROC | ANF.SANFE | ASU.AASUEXEC | ANF.SANFL | ASU.AASUPROC | ANF.SANFM | | ANF.SANFM | | ANF.SANFP ----------------------------------------------------ANF.SANFSAMP SAMP FB PO

R Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

C N N N N N N N N N N N N

I N N N N N N N N N N N N

** BOTTOM OF DATA *

Figure 70. Panel: Expansion of a merged data set

Select individual component data sets for unmerging by entering a U to the left of the component data set and pressing Enter. (Note that the data set marked with an asterisk is the merge target data set, while the others are merge component data sets. The merge target data set is not allowed to be the target of an Unmerge line command; this command will act only on merge components.) A message is displayed to indicate whether the unmerge action was successful. Enter I to the left of a component data set and press Enter to get information about the component data set. As shown in Figure 70, the pop-up list indicates the target data set with an asterisk. This is the name of the target data set before it was merged. Only line commands I or U are valid for the target data set. It is also possible to completely unmerge the data set of all its component data sets from the EXPAND pop-up display. Simply enter a U for every component data set (the ones without an asterisk) in the pop-up display and press Enter. Note: This is not true for UNIX file system data sets. The dialog prevents you from unmerging all the components at once. They must be unmerged one at a time. See Unmerging UNIX file system data sets for more information.

Unmerging UNIX file system data sets

Unmerging UNIX file system data sets is different from unmerging other data set types.

108

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

The dialog will prevent you from unmerging a file system data set from a target file system data set if there is a third file system component data set with a mount point that is hierarchically below the mount point of the target file system and the selected component file system data sets. In this situation, you have the following options: v Deselect the file system data set you selected for unmerging and the unmerge should be canceled, or v Unmerge the third file system data set and then you can unmerge the other component file system data set. For example, a data set with a mount point of /a/b cannot be unmerged from a data set having mount point of /a if another component of the merge has a data set with a mount point of a/b/c. When you enter the line command eXpand to the left of a merged UNIX file system data set on panel CPPP605W, the Figure 71 panel appears.
CPPP605W --- Show Merged Data Set Components ( MD053718 ) --- ROW 1 TO 4 OF 4 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> HALF Line Commands:(Information Unmerge) Merge Component Data Sets for: OMVS.ROOT

S Data Set Name Mount Point - -------------------------------------------- ----- --- ---* OMVS.ROOT / OMVS.AS390 /usr/lpp/was OMVS.XML /usr/lpp/xml ******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ********************

Figure 71. Panel: Expansion of the merge component data set panel for UNIX file system data sets

Saving merged data sets

To preserve your merged data sets for merging with future ServerPac orders, you must save your configuration through the Save Configuration command (see Chapter 12, Saving the configuration, on page 153). The dialog saves the data for each merged data set and its component data sets.

Modifying a data sets attributes

The Data Set Attributes panel, shown in Figure 72 on page 110, appears when you enter a Select line command from a data set list panel or when you enter an Information line command from a data set merge candidate panel. This panel shows the attributes of a specific data set. When you navigate to this panel from any of the data set merge candidate panels (CPPP605M or CPPP605V), or CPPP605X, all fields are display only.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

109

Modifying the system layout

CPPP605D ------------- Data Set Attributes 1 of 2 ( MD053718 ) --------------------COMMAND ==> Data Set Name ==> Shipped Name : Data Set Type ==> SMPE.CICT500.SMPSTS SMPE.CICT500.SMPSTS PDS (PDS or PDSE) Shipped : PDS

Data set Element Type : SRC Category : Target Logical Volume ==> SMR002 Shipped : RES002 SMS Managed ==> No (Yes or No) Storage Class : SMSRCLAS Shipped: 154 Shipped: 16 Shipped: 100

Primary Tracks ==> 1544 Secondary Tracks ==> 16 Directory Blocks ==> 100

Product, Element, or Feature : CUSTOMPAC SMP/E DATA SETS

Figure 72. Panel: Data set attributes 1 of 2

Depending on the data sets type (VSAM, sequential, or partitioned), you can change the following fields on the Data Set Attributes 1 panel (Figure 72): v Data set name v Data set type (for HFS, PDS, PDSE, and zFS data sets only) v Logical volume. v SMS Managed status v Tracks The fields in the Data Set Attributes 1 panel are described as follows. Data set name Specifies the name of the data set. If the Data Set Name field is preceded by ==>, you can rename the data set, otherwise it is unrenameable. Unrenameable data sets cannot be renamed unless you first override this attribute through a CHANGE RENAME command. For information about unrenameable data sets, see the CHANGE RENAME command in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165. If you change the high level qualifier of a data set, you might need to re-establish its catalog and SMS relationships. For other considerations about changing the names of data sets in your configuration, see the CHANGE RENAME command in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165. Shipped name Specifies the shipped name of the data set. Data set type Specifies the data set type. For data sets that are eligible (see the CHANGE DSNTYPE command), the Data Set Attributes 1 panel (Figure 72) allows you to change v PDS data sets to PDSE data sets v PDSE data sets to PDS data sets v HFS data sets to zFS data sets v zFS data sets to HFS data sets Type over the Data set type field with the new value, as follows: HFS To change a zFS data set to an HFS data set

110

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

PDS PDSE ZFS To change a PDSE data set to a PDS data set (if the PDSE was originally shipped as a PDS data set). To change a PDS data set to a PDSE data set To change an HFS data set to a zFS data set

For data sets that are not eligible to be changed, the Data Set Type field is read-only. The dialog does not, for example, allow you to change your orders PDSE data sets to PDS data sets, because they contain members that cannot be loaded into a PDS. The dialog does not enforce all product requirements. You must determine whether data sets are allowed to be changed before changing them. For considerations about changing the data set type of data sets in your configuration, see the CHANGE DSNTYPE command in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165. Data set element type Specifies the element type of the data set. For example, MAC stands for macro library and LMOD is a load module. Category The Category field contains a 1-character value that indicates where the data set resides, as follows: DLIB DLIB volume Target Target library volume Operational Catalog volume. This value is set for operational data sets, such as page and dump data sets. User User-defined data set; not shipped as part of the order. Logical volume Specifies the logical volume to which the data set is assigned. This is a data entry field, preceded by ==>, if the logical volume is one you can change; otherwise, this will be a display-only field, preceded by a colon (:). Observe the following considerations: v If space recalculation is required (because the new logical volume is assigned to a physical volume that has different device capacity), the recalculation occurs automatically. v Two logical volumes, CSIVOL and IPLVOL, are reserved for the systems use. You cannot assign data sets to or from either of these logical volumes. If you attempt to do so, your request is rejected. For other considerations about changing the logical volumes of data sets in your configuration, see the CHANGE LVOL command in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165. SMS-managed Specifies whether SMS is to manage the data set (this is the SMS status of the data set). If the data entry area for the SMS-Managed field is active, you can change the setting for this data set. Data sets for which the SMS-Eligible field is set to YES can be SMS-managed or not, as you choose. Data sets for which the SMS-Required field is YES must remain SMS-managed data sets. To see which data sets in your configuration are eligible for SMS-management, use the dialogs View and Change Facility (described in Viewing and changing data sets on page 95). Be aware that you cannot assign data sets that reside on the IPLVOL logical volume to SMS-managed logical volumes.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

111

Modifying the system layout

For considerations about changing the SMS management status of data sets in your order, see the CHANGE SMS command in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165. Physical volume or storage class If the value for SMS Managed is No, the displayed name for this field is Physical Volume and the value is the name of the physical volume to which the logical volume has been assigned. If the value for SMS Managed is Yes, the displayed name for this field is Storage Class and the values is the storage class to which the data set has been assigned. Tracks Depending on a data sets record format (RECFM) and type (VSAM, sequential or partitioned), you can change the following fields on the Data Set Attributes 1 panel (Figure 72 on page 110): v Primary tracks v Secondary tracks v Directory blocks You cannot decrease the size of a shipped data set to less than its original, shipped amount. The fields in the Data Set Modification - Space panel are described as follows. Primary tracks Specifies the primary space allocation (in tracks) for the data set. You can specify any value from 1 to 999999 tracks. However, you cannot specify less than the Shipped amount shown on the right side of the panel. Note: If you want to change the primary space allocations for a large number of data sets, it might be faster to use the View and Change option and the CHANGE SPACE command (described in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165). Secondary tracks Specifies the secondary space allocation (in tracks) for the data set. You can specify any value from 0 to 999999 tracks. To specify no secondary space allocation for the data set, set this value to 0 (zero). You can, if necessary, reset this value at a later time. Notes: 1. If you want to change the secondary space allocations for a large number of data sets, it might be faster to use the View and Change option and the CHANGE SPACE command (described in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165). 2. Some data sets are not allowed to have secondary space because of operating system restrictions. These data sets are shipped with their Secondary Space fields set to zero. Directory blocks Specifies the number of directory blocks for a partitioned data set (PDS). You can set this field to any value between 1 and 99999, but you cannot decrease it below the shipped number of directory blocks. For information about directory blocks, see z/OS DFSMS Using Data Sets. Product, element, or feature Specifies the product, element, or feature associated with the data set.

112

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

If you press End on this panel, the previous panel appear. If you make modifications on the Data Set Attributes 1 panel (Figure 72 on page 110) and press Enter, the panel remains on display with the updated fields. If you then press Enter again, the Data Set Attributes 2 panel (Figure 73) appears for non-UNIX file system data sets. If you make no modifications on the Data Set Attributes 1 panel (Figure 72 on page 110) and press Enter, the Data Set Attributes 2 panel (Figure 73) appears for non-UNIX file system data sets.
CPPP605E ------------- Data Set Attributes 2 of 2 ( MD053718 ) ----------COMMAND ==> Data set Name : SMPE.CICT500.SMPSTS RECFM LRECL APF Authorized LPA Eligible LPA Required Link List Eligible SMP/E SYSLIB Data Set Required on IPL Volume SMS-Eligible SMS-Required Renameable Required in Master Catalog : : : : : : : : : : : : FB 80 No No No No No No Yes No Yes No

Figure 73. Panel: Data set attributes 2

This is an information only display panel. It presents the current values for the data set. Changes to eligible fields can only be made with the CHange command. The displayed values are for presentation only and may not reflect the actual internal value. For example, the internal value of Y is presented as the logical value Yes. Also, any value that has been overridden is displayed as its logical value (Yes or No) followed by the word Overridden. This panel displays different fields depending on the data set type. For example, Figure 74 on page 114 shows a panel for a shipped VSAM data set.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

113

Modifying the system layout

CPPP605E ------------- Data Set Attributes 2 of 2 ( ) ----------COMMAND ==> Data set Name : SMPE.GLOBAL.CSI

Required on IPL Volume SMS-Eligible SMS-Required Renameable Required in Master Catalog

: : : : :

No Yes No No Yes

Figure 74. Panel: Data set attributes 2 for a shipped VSAM data set

For UNIX file system data sets, when you press Enter on the Data Set Attributes 1 panel (Figure 72 on page 110), the Data Set Attributes 2 panel for a UNIX file system data set (Figure 75) appears. The entire mount point can be displayed on this panel along with the data set attributes. Pressing end on this panel returns you to the Data Set Attributes 1 panel.
CPPP605F ------------- Data Set Attributes 2 of 2 ( ) ----------COMMAND ==> Data set Name : OMVS.ROOT Mountpoint :/

Required on IPL Volume : No Renameable : No Required in Master Catalog : Yes

SMS-Eligible : No SMS-Required : No

Figure 75. Panel: Data set attributes 2 for a UNIX file system data set

Displaying device types

Figure 76 on page 115 shows the panel that is displayed when you enter Option T on the Modify System Layout options panel, or enter the DEVT command from another panel.

114

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

CPPP606# --------------------- Device Type Table ---------- Row 1 to 11 of 11 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Primary Commands:(?) Line Commands:(Select Delete Insert) S Device Unit Bytes/ Tracks/ Cylinders/ VTOC Index How Type Type Track Cylinder Volume TRKS TRKS Defined -------- ------ ------- -------- ---------- ---- ----- ------D001-001 D001 65536 19 17206 399 80 DYNAMIC 3380-1 3380 47476 15 885 30 6 IBM 3380-2 3380 47476 15 1770 45 9 IBM 3380-3 3380 47476 15 2665 60 12 IBM 3390-1 3390 56664 15 1113 30 6 IBM 3390-2 3390 56664 15 2226 60 12 IBM 3390-3 3390 56664 15 3339 75 15 IBM 3390-6 3390 56664 15 6678 150 30 USER 3390-9 3390 56664 15 10017 225 45 IBM ******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ****************************

Figure 76. Panel: Device type table

This panel shows the direct-access storage devices (DASD) defined to ServerPac. You cannot delete or edit the IBM-defined devices in this list. However, you can add entries for real or emulated devices and edit and delete those entries. The ? primary command is valid for this panel. This is a standard command for panels that display lists. See Primary commands on page 11. The following line commands are valid for this panel: S Select a user-defined device for editing. You can do this only if the device is not currently referenced by any data sets (see Inserting or editing device types). You cannot edit IBM-supplied DASDs or dynamically-created entries. Delete a user-defined device. You must confirm the delete request (see Deleting device types on page 116). You cannot delete IBM-supplied DASDs or dynamically-created entries. Insert a user-defined device. For more information, see Inserting or editing device types.

Inserting or editing device types

Figure 77 on page 116 shows the panel that is displayed when you enter Insert or Select for a device type on the Device Type Table panel. (This panel is not displayed for IBM-defined devices, because you cannot modify those devices.)

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

115

Modifying the system layout

CPPP606I --------------------- Device Type Table ----------------------------COMMAND ==> Device Type ==> Unit Type ==> Cylinders/Device ==> Tracks/Cylinder ==> Bytes/Track ==> How Defined : USER (Must be unique) (UNIT to be used for allocation) (50 to 32767 Cylinders) (10 to 999 Tracks) (32767 to 65535 Bytes)

Figure 77. Panel: Device type insertion/edit

The fields are described as follows: Device type Specifies the device type and model by which the DASD is to be known. Unit type Specifies the generic name to be used to allocate data sets on the device. For example, UNIT might be specified as 3390 or 3380. Cylinders/Device Specifies the number of cylinders for each DASD. Obtain this value from your DASD supplier; it need not match the number of cylinders available on any IBM device. Tracks/Cylinder Specifies the number of tracks for each cylinder on the DASD. Obtain this value from your DASD supplier. Bytes/Track Specifies the number of bytes for each track on the DASD. Obtain this value from your DASD supplier. How defined Specifies whether the device was user defined (USER) or dynamically defined (DYNAMIC). For a user defined device, you can modify any of the values in this panel. For a dynamically-defined device, you can modify only the Device Type value.

Deleting device types

Figure 78 on page 117 shows the panel that is displayed when you enter line command D to delete a user-defined device type from the Device Type Table panel.

116

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

CPPP606D ---------- Device Type Deletion, Confirmation Request --------------COMMAND ==> DELETE REQUESTED DEVICE ATTRIBUTES Device NAME: STAGEDEV Device TYPE: 3390 Bytes/Track : 56664 Tracks/Cyl : 15 Cyls/Device : 200

You MUST Confirm DELETION By Typing DELETE and pressing ENTER Press the END or RETURN key to CANCEL the DELETE request

Figure 78. Panel: Device type deletion

You can delete only user-defined device types. Confirm deletion by entering DELETE in the COMMAND ==> field and pressing Enter. If you attempt to delete a device name that is currently referenced by a data set, the dialog rejects your delete request.

Viewing and defining user data sets

To view a summary of user data sets, use the Modify System Layout panel (CPPP6052). From the Modify System Layout Options panel (Figure 44 on page 73), enter Option U to display the Summary of Data Sets panel (CPPP6052).
CPPP6052 ---------- Modify System Layout ( OS160125 ) --------- Row 1 to 1 of 1 COMMAND ==> I SCROLL ==> PAGE Summary Of User Defined Data Sets Primary Commands:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT CHange OFile OList FindComp) Line Commands:(Select, Insert, Delete) --- Data Set --- Primary S Data Set Name X F Type RECFM LRECL Tracks - -------------------------------------------- - - ---- ----- ----- ------SOME.VSAM.DATA.SET VSAM 210 =========================================================================

Figure 79. Panel: Modify system layout

To define a new user data set, enter the Insert command on the user defined data sets summary panel as shown in Figure 79 to display the Define a User Data Set panel (Figure 80 on page 118).

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

117

Modifying the system layout

CPPP605I ---------- Define a USER Data Set ( OS160125 ) ---------------------COMMAND ==> Data Set Name ==> USERDEFINED Logical Volume ==> LVUSER Data Set Type RECFM LRECL Block Size Primary Tracks Secondary Tracks Directory Blocks ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> 0 ==> 0 ==> 0 (PDS, PDSE, SEQ) (U, F-B-S-AM, V-B-S-AM) (0 - 32760) (1-32760 or blank for optimized BLKSIZE)

(Zero for sequential data set)

Figure 80. Panel: Define a USER data set

Displaying a summary of physical volumes

To see the physical volumes that are used by a particular feature or element, use the Summary of Features/Elements panel. From the Modify System Layout Options panel (Figure 44 on page 73), enter Option V to display the Summary of Physical Volumes panel. You can also display this panel by entering the SUMP command from the Summary of Features/Elements panel. The panel shown in Figure 81 is displayed.
CPPP605K ------------- Modify System Layout ( MD053718 ) --- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE SUMMARY Of Physical Volumes Primary Commands:(? DEVT) Line Commands:(Select Dslist) PVolume/ Seq Device Device S STORCLAS No. Number Type - -------- --- ------ -------MVSCAT CCUU 3390-3 MVSDLB CCUU 3390-3 MVSRES CCUU 3390-3 ******************************* Warnings -----VOL<<S VOL<<S VOL<<S BOTTOM Init ----------- Cylinders -----------Volume Existng RSVD Assignd Used Free ------ ------- ----- ------- ------ ----Y 0 0 4601 4601 0 Y 0 0 6643 6643 0 Y 0 0 9294 9294 0 OF DATA *********************************

Figure 81. Panel: Summary of physical volumes

For descriptions of the fields in this panel, press HELP (?). Use this panel to verify and change (if necessary) the attributes of the physical volumes. Before you proceed, however: v If there are warnings on this panel, you should not try to resolve them until you have completed any data set merges, space allocation changes, or volume assignment changes that you intend to make.

118

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

v If you have DYNAMIC DASD INFO set to No, you must use the Select line command to display the Display and Change Volume Attributes panel, on which you must specify the required information about each volume and may choose to reserve space on the volume or tell the dialog not to initialize it. v If you have DYNAMIC DASD INFO set to Yes, you can use the Select line command to reserve space on the volume or tell the dialog not to initialize it. v These changes should be among the last things you do before exiting Modify System Layout (because other changes you make could force you to do rework), but they must be completed before you attempt to run any jobs that install the data sets on your DASD volumes. To accommodate libraries that expand during the installation of service, and to make it less likely that libraries will have to be moved when you install a subsequent release, allow at least 15 percent free space for each physical volume allocation. You can create more space by moving some data sets to another volume. For more information, see Resolving over-allocated volume conditions on page 120. In the panel, the Warnings column indicates volume conditions you might have to resolve before continuing with the installation. The possible warnings are as follows: DEV<<S Incorrect device type specified for the volume. For more information, see the description of message CPP0605055S in Appendix B, Diagnostic messages, on page 195. OFF<<S Volume cannot be accessed because it is offline. For more information, see the description of message CPP0605056S in Appendix B, Diagnostic messages, on page 195. EXT<<W The combined size of the data sets to be allocated on this volume exceeds the size of the largest free extent on the volume. For more information, see the description of message CPP0605057W in Appendix B, Diagnostic messages, on page 195. VOL<<S Information about the volume could not be retrieved. For more information, see the description of message CPP0605058S in Appendix B, Diagnostic messages, on page 195. OVR<<S The number of cylinders to be allocated on the volume exceeds the total number of cylinders for the volume. For more information, see Resolving over-allocated volume conditions on page 120 and the description of message CPP0605059S in Appendix B, Diagnostic messages, on page 195. The following primary commands are valid for this panel: ? Displays help for this panel. See Primary commands on page 11.

DEVT Displays the currently-defined device types and their storage capacities (in cylinders). The following line commands are valid for this panel:

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

119

Modifying the system layout

Select Use the S line command to select physical volumes and SMS storage classes for reassignment, as follows: v For a physical volume, the S line command displays a panel that allows you to specify a different physical volume and to change the attributes of the current physical volume, as described in Changing the attributes of a physical volume on page 121. v For a storage class, the S line command displays a panel that allows you to specify a new storage class, as described in Changing an SMS storage class on page 122. Note: To assign a STORCLAS in place of a physical volume, you must assign the logical volume to the STORCLAS. Dslist Use the D line command to display the data sets for the selected physical volume or storage class. The Summary of Data Sets panel is displayed, allowing you to do any of the following: v Merge or unmerge ServerPac-shipped data sets (you cannot merge or unmerge user-defined data sets) v Make global changes to multiple data sets (using one of the CHANGE commands described in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165) v Modify the attributes of particular data sets or modify their space information (using one of the CHANGE commands described in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165) v Write a list of the data sets to the ISPF LIST data set or to a user-defined file (using the OLIST or OFILE command described in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165). .

Resolving over-allocated volume conditions

While processing the configuration you specify in Modify System Layout, the dialog might show that some volumes are over-allocated (as in Figure 81 on page 118). The dialog displays a message on the panel, with OVR<<S indicated for the over-allocated volume. Until you resolve this condition, the dialog prevents you from continuing to the next function. There are several ways to resolve this condition: v Change the device type to one having a larger capacity. v Move some or all data sets to another physical volume. See the topic, Recommended Data Set Placement in z/OS Planning for Installation for assistance in determining which data sets to move. For help in changing the device type or moving a data set to another physical volume, see the descriptions that accompany Figure 82 on page 121. To add another volume, use the CHANGE PVOL command (see Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165), or follow this process: 1. Enter the END command (or press PF3 using the default PF key definitions) to return to the Summary of Features/Elements panel. 2. On the Summary of Features/Elements panel, select entries to be moved to a new volume and press Enter. The Logical Volume by Feature/Element panel is displayed.

120

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

3. The Logical Volume by Feature/Element panel lists the logical volumes that have been defined for the feature or element. Write down the names of the logical volumes to be moved. Enter the END command to return to the Summary of Features/Elements panel. 4. Enter the SUML primary command to display the Summary of Logical Volumes panel. 5. On the Summary of Logical Volumes panel, select the logical volumes to be moved. Specify line command S for the volumes. Assign a physical volume to the logical volume. Enter the END command. 6. On the Summary of Features/Elements panel, enter the SUMP command to display the Summary of Physical Volumes panel. The new volume is shown.

Changing the attributes of a physical volume

When you select a physical volume from the Summary of Physical Volumes panel (through line command S), the panel shown in Figure 82 is displayed.
CPPP605J ------------- Modify System Layout ( MD053718 ) --------------------COMMAND ==> Display and Change Volume Attributes Volume Serial Device Number Device Type ==> MVSCAT ==> 07C2 ==> 3390-3 (Always required) (Enter ? For List of Available Devices) (See Device Type Table for UNIT Type) (Cylinders) (Y or N. Default is Y)

Reserved Space ==> 0 Initialize Volume ==> Y

Press Enter to continue or End to Cancel Note: Only the volume serial is required for online volumes when the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable is set to Yes.

Figure 82. Panel: Display and change volume attributes

You can change these attributes for a physical volume: Volume serial A unique name for the physical volume; you cannot use a name that is already defined to the dialog. Device number A unique device number for the volume, in hexadecimal. Each physical volume that you define in the dialog must have a unique device number. This field is filled in only if the DEFAULT DASD INFO variable is set to NO. Device type A device type that is defined to the dialog. For a list of available device names, enter a question mark (?) in the Device Name field. A pop-up window Defined Device Types displays the currently-defined device names and their storage capacities (in cylinders). By default, the device name is 3390-3.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

121

Modifying the system layout

If space recalculation is required because the new physical volume has a different device capacity, the dialog recalculates the space automatically. This field is filled in only if the DEFAULT DASD INFO variable is set to NO. Reserved space Amount of space, in cylinders, that you require to be reserved on the volume. Specify a value from 0 to 999. The maximum allowed value is the maximum allocatable space on the volume, minus one cylinder. The default is 0 (no space is reserved). To accommodate libraries that can use secondary extents, allow at least 15 percent free space for each physical volume allocation. Initialize volume Use this field to specify whether the dialog is to initialize the volume. Valid values are Y or N (yes or no). The default is Y. If the volume already contains data that you wish to preserve, specify N. IBM recommends that you defragment any existing volumes that you plan to use for data sets supplied with your order. Also, to avoid a warning message, ensure that the VTOCs of existing volumes are placed at the beginning or end of each volume. Also, check the names of data sets on the existing volumes; these names must be unique. They must not duplicate names of data sets shipped with your ServerPac order, or with product-specific VSAM data sets or file system data sets that you create when you submit your installation jobs. In checking for duplicate names, note that a name that includes an SSA prefix is considered to be the same as the name without the prefix. For example, within an existing volume, data sets named XYZ and ssa.XYZ are considered to be duplicates.

Changing an SMS storage class

When you select a storage class from the Summary of Physical Volumes panel (through line command S), the panel shown in Figure 83 is displayed.
CPPP605Q ------------- Modify System Layout ( MD053718 ) --------------------COMMAND ==> ASSIGN a Storage Class STORAGE CLASS : SMSDCLAS NEW STORAGE CLASS ==> SMSDCLS2 The STORCLAS you specify must be defined to SMS

Figure 83. Panel: Assign a storage class

To change the storage class, enter the 1-8 character name of the new storage class. The storage class you choose must be defined in the active SMS configuration before you run the first installation job that allocates a data set on an SMS-managed volume in this storage class.

122

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Modifying the system layout

You can also use ACS routines to override the storage classes that are assigned in the jobs generated by the dialog. In this case, the acceptable values for the storage class you enter are determined by the ACS routines.

Confirming processing requirements

The panel in Figure 84 an example of what is displayed if you attempt to exit the Modify System Layout function when problems exist. This panel is tailored to show only the problems that actually exist, so any actual panel displayed would likely show fewer problems. The panel shown in Figure 84 would be displayed only if you attempted to exit Modify System Layout when all of the following situations existed: v At least one physical volume has an invalid device number. The default deveice number is set to CCUU. You must change each CCUU to a valid hexadecimal device number. v Problems were encountered with physical volumes. v SMS is not active on the driving system.

CPPP6058 -------------------------------------------------------------------COMMAND ==> ***************************************************************************** ***** Warning! ***** ***** Configuration Problem Found ***** ***** ***** ***** Press ENTER to return to Modify System Layout. ***** ***** Press END or RETURN to save the current values and exit. ***** ***** ***** ***************************************************************************** Problem Type --------------------------Physical Volume SMS Subsystem NOT active What to do: ------------------------------------------------See Physical Volume Summary Display for more info Activate SMS subsystem

Figure 84. Panel: Confirm processing requirements

To continue working with the configuration, press the ENTER key and correct the problems identified on the panel. To exit the panel, press the END key. Your subsequent work with the dialog resumes at the Modify System Layout function.

Chapter 8. Modifying the system layout

123

124

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Chapter 9. Defining HLQ-to-catalog relationships

CPPPFLOW - - - - - - - - - - - Installation Options for Order ( MD053718 ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - OPTION ==> Complete these options to install the order:
C V Z M A * * Create Variables Zones Modify Alias SSA Installation Create the Work Configuration Specify Values for Variables Specify SMP/E Zone Names Modify the System Layout Specify Catalogs for High-Level Qualifiers Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs Create and Submit Installation Jobs (Option not available until download complete)

You can use Save any time after creating the work configuration:
S Save Save the Current Work Configuration

From the Installation Menu, enter A to begin the next dialog function, Specify Catalogs for High-Level Qualifiers. The dialog and the installation process for ServerPac use the standard order of catalog search when defining and locating data sets. Therefore, there must be an alias in the target system master catalog for each high-level qualifier used for data sets that will be cataloged in a user catalog. Also, there must be system-specific aliases (called SSAs) in the driving system master catalog for the temporary high-level qualifiers you will choose when you use the next dialog option. The Specify Catalogs for HLQ option defines the relationships between high-level qualifiers for target system data sets and target system catalogs. The SSA option defines relationships between the driving systems master catalog and the target systems catalogs. Another way to look at these relationships is: v There is an alias-to-catalog relationship defined for each intended (final) high-level qualifier. v There is an SSA relationship defined for each target system master catalog. Use the Specify Catalogs for HLQ function in the dialog to associate the high-level qualifiers for data sets to be cataloged in user catalogs with the appropriate user catalogs. Use the Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalog function to associate the SSAs you chose to install the ServerPac with the target systems master catalog. Before you start, use a worksheet like the following to plan the catalog and alias names, and their relationships.
Catalog High level qualifiers

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

125

Defining HLQ-to-catalog relationships

Some data sets must be cataloged in the master catalog because the operating system requires it. Also, ServerPac requires some additional data sets to be cataloged in the master catalog. For a list of the data sets that ServerPac requires to be cataloged in the master catalog, use the dialogs View and Change Facility to create a list of data sets that have the attribute Master Catalog (for more information, see Viewing and changing data sets on page 95). The list of master catalog data sets is also provided in the appendix Data Sets in This Order in ServerPac: Installing Your Order. You can override the master catalog requirement for data sets in your configuration. For more information, see CHANGE MCAT on page 171.

How SSAs are used during installation

Many of the data sets in your new order already exist on your driving system. While your orders data sets are intended for creating a new target system, there is a period during installation in which jobs running on your driving system must be able to locate the target systems data sets. Because many of these data set names already exist in your master catalog, ServerPac requires a way to find the data sets in the normal order of catalog search. This way, jobs on the driving system can locate the target systems data sets without disturbing the operation of the driving system. Without such a method, ServerPac could not build a target system with any data sets that were already cataloged and allocated on your driving system. In the Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs function of the dialog, you define temporary high-level-qualifiers (HLQs) for the target system data sets. During the installation, your orders data sets are cataloged with the temporary HLQs. To direct the catalog entries to the proper catalog, the temporary HLQs are defined as aliases in the driving systems master catalog. Thus, these alternate HLQs are called system-specific aliases or SSAs. Later, during the installation, a job renames the target systems data sets to their true names and an optional job is provided for you to remove the SSAs. Consider that your driving system always includes the SYS1.LPALIB data set. When you install a z/OS order, this data set must be cataloged and allocated on the new target system as SYS1.LPALIB. Because the data set must be named SYS1.LPALIB at IPL time and its catalog entry must have the same name, ServerPac needs a method of allocating and locating the data set in a catalog other than the current master catalog on the driving system. And, this method must work for all data sets that must be cataloged to be used, including SMS-managed and VSAM data sets. Generally, ServerPac uses SSAs as follows: v ServerPac creates at least one user catalog for your orders data sets. For a z/OS order, one of these catalogs will eventually become the master catalog, but for now it is just a user catalog. (For simplicity, this example uses only one catalog, but any others would also follow the same pattern.) v ServerPac defines one or more aliases that refer to the user catalog. If, for example, the alias is FRED, ServerPac defines the alias in the driving systems master catalog (which is the current master catalog) as follows:
DEFINE ALIAS(NAME(FRED) RELATE(TARGET.MASTER.CATALOG))

This action ensures that all new entries starting with the high-level qualifier FRED will be cataloged in the user catalog. In this example, the user catalog is named

126

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Defining HLQ-to-catalog relationships

TARGET.MASTER.CATALOG because that is what this catalog will become later in the install process. At this step in the process, however, TARGET.MASTER.CATALOG is still just a user catalog. v ServerPac allocates your orders data sets. In this example, ServerPac allocates your orders SYS1.LPALIB data set as FRED.SYS1.LPALIB. Because the data set name begins with FRED, and the alias for FRED points there, the data set is cataloged in TARGET.MASTER.CATALOG. v ServerPac renames the data sets and renames FRED.SYS1.LPALIB to SYS1.LPALIB. However, the data sets have not been recataloged yet. So, the catalog TARGET.MASTER.CATALOG does not yet have an entry for SYS1.LPALIB. Rather, it still has the entry for FRED.SYS1.LPALIB, which no longer exists. At this point (which exists for only a few minutes while the ALTCAT or RECATDS job is running), the current catalog entries do not allow the data sets to be located through the catalog. v ServerPac establishes catalog entries that will allow the data sets to be located. Specifically, ServerPac deletes the FRED.* entries from TARGET.MASTER.CATALOG, defines the entries needed to use the data sets from the target system, and then defines an alias for each data set that points to the entry for the data set. For data set LPALIB, for example, ServerPac does the following:
DELETE FRED.SYS1.LPALIB NOSCRATCH CATALOG(TARGET.MASTER.CATALOG) DEFINE NONVSAM( NAME(SYS1.LPALIB) VOLUMES(sysres) DEVT(33n0)) CATALOG(TARGET.MASTER.CATALOG) DEFINE ALIAS( NAME(FRED.SYS1.LPALIB) RELATE(SYS1.LPALIB)) CATALOG(TARGET.MASTER.CATALOG)

Even now, TARGET.MASTER.CATALOG is still a user catalog. Up until the time you IPL the new system, you can locate the data sets using the FRED- qualified names. (Even after you IPL the new system, the FRED- qualified names can still be used from the driving system in the Full-System Replacement installation path.) When you IPL the new system (and afterward), you use TARGET.MASTER.CATALOG as the master catalog and you can locate the data sets by their real names. Later, an optional job will allow you to remove the SSAs. The installation jobs for your order are described in ServerPac: Installing Your Order.

Default catalog structure for full system replacement

Figure 85 on page 128 shows the default catalog structure that you generate on the driving system through a full system replacement installation. The figure shows the driving systems master catalog referencing the target system user catalog T1U and the target system master catalog T1M. The jobs that you run on the driving

Chapter 9. Defining HLQ-to-catalog relationships

127

Defining HLQ-to-catalog relationships

system use the SSA to find the target system data sets, such as SYS1.LINKLIB. Without the SSA, your jobs would update the driving system data sets.

Figure 85. Default catalog structure for full system replacement

Figure 85 shows the minimum required system. Through the SSA option, you can change the default catalog structure. Figure 86 shows a structure that includes a second user catalog, T1n.

Figure 86. ServerPac installation dialog flow

You modify the default structure by entering X on the SSA panels to refer to a second target system user catalog instead of referring to the IBM-supplied default user catalog. You must supply these values to identify a catalog: v The desired data set name for the catalog v The system specific alias name referring to this catalog v The alias referring to this catalog. v The volume serial for the volume on which the catalog is to reside

128

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Defining HLQ-to-catalog relationships

v The device type of the volume on which the catalog is to reside. v The primary and secondary space with which this catalog is to be allocated (in cylinders)

Defining catalog data set names

The Specify Catalogs for HLQ function of the dialog allows you to define a catalog data set name for each alias in your order. Entering option A on the Installation Menu (Figure 2 on page 7) displays the panel shown in Figure 87.
CPPP6021 -------------- ALIAS to CATALOG ( MD053718 ) ---- ROW 1 TO 9 OF 9 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Define CATALOG Data set Names Primary Commands:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT CANcel SAVE) Line Commands:(Delete Insert Repeat Mcat NoMcat) S Alias STA Target System Catalog Data Set Name Type - -------- --- -------------------------------------------- ---COB2 ???????.CATALOG GIM ???????.CATALOG ICQ ???????.CATALOG CPAC M ?MASTER.CATALOG MCAT ISP ???????.CATALOG ISR ???????.CATALOG NETVIEW ???????.CATALOG SMPE ???????.CATALOG SYS1 M ?MASTER.CATALOG MCAT *************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *****************************

Figure 87. Panel: Define catalog data set names

The catalog names are initially shown as ??????? because they are not yet defined. You can specify the catalog name with which an alias is to be associated by typing over the question marks in the Target System Catalog Data Set Name field. Blank out the rest of the line after the catalog name. To associate the master catalog with an alias, type over ?MASTER.CATALOG with the actual master catalog name. Then, to use the master catalog for another alias, enter the following:
?MCAT

To use a catalog name that is already defined for another alias, enter a question mark (?), followed by the alias name, for example:
?SYS1

If a data set must be in the master catalog, then all data sets with the same high level qualifier must be in the master catalog. If you do not want all data sets with that high level qualifier to be in the master catalog, you can either: v Rename the data set that must be in the master catalog to use a high level qualifier that is cataloged in the master catalog (SYS1, for example), or v Rename the data sets that should not be in the master catalog to use a high level qualifier that will cause them to be cataloged in a user catalog. For a list of the data sets that ServerPac requires to be cataloged in the master catalog, use the dialogs View and Change Facility to list the data sets having the attribute Master Catalog (for more information, see Viewing and changing data
Chapter 9. Defining HLQ-to-catalog relationships

129

Defining HLQ-to-catalog relationships

sets on page 95). The list of master catalog data sets is also provided in the appendix Data Sets in This Order in ServerPac: Installing Your Order. You can override the master catalog requirement for data sets in your configuration. For more information, see CHANGE MCAT on page 171. STA field indicates, for each currently-existing high level qualifier, which ones must be associated with catalogs because data sets starting with them existed at the conclusion of Modify System Layout, and which of them must be associated with the master catalog. This field can show any of the following values: Value (blank) Meaning This high-level qualifier can be associated with any catalog. You must associate this high-level qualifier with the master catalog or a user catalog. This high-level qualifier must be associated with the master catalog. This high-level qualifier is not associated with any of the data sets in the work configuration. You created it with the R or I line command on this panel. You must associate it with the desired catalog.

M U

The following primary commands are valid for this panel: ? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT CANcel SAVE These are standard commands for panels that display lists. See Primary commands on page 11. CANCEL This command, abbreviated as CAN, discards any changes that you have made since the last checkpoint and exits the Specify Catalogs for HLQ function. (A checkpoint is taken when you enter and exit the function, and after any SAVE command). SAVE This command saves any changes that you have made and establishes a new checkpoint. (A checkpoint is taken when you enter and exit the function, and after any SAVE command). The following line commands are valid for this panel: D Delete a user-defined alias (only aliases with a status (STA) of U can be deleted). You must confirm your delete request on the panel that results. Confirm deletion by entering DELETE in the COMMAND ==> field and pressing Enter. If aliases are already defined (perhaps because you are re-installing the package) for one or more high level qualifiers in the driving systems master catalog, the target systems master catalog, or both, the D line command will not delete them. Any previously-defined alias entries must be deleted manually. I R Insert a user-defined alias. You must specify the alias and catalog name on the panel described in Inserting a user-defined alias on page 131. Repeat the insertion of a user-defined alias. You must specify the alias name, but the catalog name is copied from the alias on which you entered this command. See Inserting a user-defined alias on page 131.

130

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Defining HLQ-to-catalog relationships

When an order does not contain any aliases that must be cataloged in the master catalog (often, a subsystem order), this panel shows the following line commands only: M N Associate the high-level qualifiers alias with the master catalog (the Type field is set to MCAT). Delete an existing master catalog association (the Type field is reset to blanks). You can use this command to reverse the effect of entering line command M earlier, if you change your mind.

When you exit the Define Alias to Catalog Relationships function, your changes are automatically saved. The dialog checks to ensure that all aliases are associated with valid catalog data set names. If not, the panel described in Confirming processing requirements on page 132 is displayed to prompt you for a correct name. When this function completes, the panel shown in Figure 88 is displayed.
CPPP6021 -------------- ALIAS to CATALOG ( MD053718 ) ------- Row 1 to 2 of 2 COMMAND ==> _ SCROLL ==> CSR Define CATALOG Data set Names Primary Commands:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT CANcel SAVE) Line Commands:(Delete Insert Repeat) S Alias STA Target System Catalog Data Set Name Type - -------- --- -------------------------------------------- ---SPAC ZOS.CATALOG SYS1 ?MASTER.CATALOG MCAT ******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Figure 88. Panel: Define catalog data set names (updated)

Inserting a user-defined alias

If you attempt to insert a user-defined alias (line command I), the panel in Figure 89 is displayed.
CPPP6023 -------------- ALIAS to CATALOG ( MD053718 ) ------------------COMMAND ==> INSERT (REPEAT) Alias Details ALIAS Name ==> HARRIGAN

Catalog DSNAME ==> CATALOG.ICK.GLASS9

Figure 89. Panel: Specify alias and catalog names

The following fields are required:

Chapter 9. Defining HLQ-to-catalog relationships

131

Defining HLQ-to-catalog relationships

ALIAS CATALOG The alias to be defined as part of the ServerPac installation process. The alias can be associated with any catalog. Catalog data set name.

To use the same catalog name as one already defined for another alias, enter a question mark (?) followed by the model alias name, for example:
?SYS1

To use the master catalog name, enter the following:

?MCAT

Confirming processing requirements

The Confirm Processing Requirements panel is displayed if you attempt to exit the Define Alias to Catalog Relationships function while one or both of the following conditions exist: v At least one alias has not been defined (the Target System Catalog Data Set Name field contains question marks). v At least one catalog has an invalid data set name. To continue working with the configuration, press Enter. If you press End, you exit the panel, but you will have to return to it before you can continue with the installation.

132

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Chapter 10. Defining system-specific aliases (SSAs)

CPPPFLOW - - - - - - - - - - - Installation Options for Order ( MD053718 ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - OPTION ==> Complete these options to install the order:
C V Z M A SSA * Create Variables Zones Modify Alias SSA Installation Create the Work Configuration Specify Values for Variables Specify SMP/E Zone Names Modify the System Layout Specify Catalogs for High-Level Qualifiers Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs Create and Submit Installation Jobs (Option not available until download complete)

You can use Save any time after creating the work configuration:
S Save Save the Current Work Configuration

From the Installation Menu, enter SSA to begin the next dialog function, Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs. When you install a z/OS order, you must allocate and catalog many data sets on the driving system. To do so, you must first define one or more system specific aliases (SSAs) to be prefixed to each of the target systems data set names defined in a particular catalog. SSAs allow the driving system to refer to commonly named data sets on the target system. Choose one alias for each catalog in which you will define new duplicate data set names. For an example of using SSAs, see How SSAs are used during installation on page 126. The SSAs you choose: v must be unique v must not exceed 8 characters in length v must not match any aliases that are already defined in the master catalog for the driving system or target system v must not match any of the high-level qualifiers you choose for the data sets in your order v must not contain a pound sign (#) or dollar sign ($), if the SSA is for a UNIX file system data set or the HFSFILE data set. Before specifying SSAs for the catalogs, use a worksheet such as the following to plan the catalog names and their associated SSAs.
Catalog name Associated system-specific aliases

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

133

Defining system-specific aliases (SSAs)

Notes: 1. If your order defines data sets whose names conflict with data set names that are already cataloged in the standard order of catalog search, then before you run the installation jobs you must either: v Rename data sets to eliminate the conflicts, or v Define SSAs for the catalogs in which the orders data sets will reside. 2. For a software upgrade installation, the dialog will not allow you to define a master catalog, so the target system master catalog must exist before you start the installation. 3. To define SSAs, you must be able to update the driving systems master catalog. 4. If you enter the N for the Define SSA field, the dialog attempts to allocate and catalog all data sets with that high-level qualifier on the driving system with the data set names that you defined in the Modify System Layout function. When you leave the Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs function, your changes are automatically saved. The dialog checks to ensure that all catalog names either have valid SSA entries or have N specified in the Define SSA field. If not, the panel described in Confirming processing requirements on page 139 is displayed.

Selecting the catalog

Use the Catalog Selection List panel (Figure 90) to specify an SSA for each catalog. The SSAs you specify here are used to create alias entries for these catalogs in the driving systems master catalog.
CPPP6031 ---------------- SSA to CATALOG ( MD053718 ) ------ Row 1 to 5 of 5 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE CATALOG Selection List Primary Commands:(? CANcel SAVE) Line Commands:(Select) Allocate Define | | S Catalog Name SSA Name Type VOLume | | Unit - -------------------------------------------- -------- ---- ------ - - ---TONY.CATALOG ? UCAT AMHCAT Y Y 3390 NET.CATALOG ? UCAT NETCAT Y Y 3390 SMOMP.CATALOG ? UCAT SMCAT Y Y 3390 TSO.CATALOG ? UCAT TSOCAT Y Y 3390 VS4.MASTCAT ?MCAT MCAT MVSCAT Y Y 3390 ******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************

Figure 90. Panel: Catalog selection list

For a software upgrade installation, the target systems master catalog must already exist (the Allocate Catalog field is set to N and cannot be changed). User catalogs can be new or existing catalogs. When you first display the Catalog Selection List panel, you might see a message warning you that you have not defined at least one SSA. If you try to exit this panel before completing the SSA definitions, the message reappears. Whether you receive this message or not, you should ensure that the needed SSA definitions exist and that any SSA definitions inherited from a saved configuration are still valid.

134

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Defining system-specific aliases (SSAs)

The following primary commands are valid for this panel: ? This is a standard command for panels that display lists. See Primary commands on page 11.

CANCEL This command, abbreviated as CAN, discards any changes that you have made since the last checkpoint and exits the Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs function. (A checkpoint is taken when you enter and exit the dialog, and after any SAVE command). SAVE This command saves any changes you made, and establishes a new checkpoint. (A checkpoint is taken when you enter and exit the dialog, and after any SAVE command.) The following line command is valid for this panel: S Selects a catalog, allowing you to specify: v SSA v When an SSA is to be used for this catalog, the SSA name v Whether the catalog is to be allocated v When the catalog is to be allocated, the unit and volume v When the catalog is to be allocated, its size

Enter line command S for a data set name on this panel and press Enter to display the next panel, which is described in Defining SSA and catalog data. After you define the SSAs, the dialog displays the Catalog Selection List panel again with the updated SSA information. When you are satisfied with the results, return to the Installation Menu panel (Figure 2 on page 7).

Defining SSA and catalog data

The process you use to define SSAs depends on your installation type: full system replacement or software upgrade. See the section that applies to your installation, as follows: v Defining SSA and catalog data for full system replacement v Defining SSA data for software upgrade on page 137.

Defining SSA and catalog data for full system replacement

For a full system replacement, define your SSA and catalog with the panel shown in Figure 91 on page 136.

Chapter 10. Defining system-specific aliases (SSAs)

135

Defining system-specific aliases (SSAs)

CPPP6033 --------------- SSA to CATALOG ( MD053718 ) ------------------------COMMAND ==> _ Define SSA and CATALOG Data Catalog : TONY.CATALOG Type : UCAT Define SSA ==> Y Allocate Catalog ==> Y SSA Name Catalog Volume ==> SMPESSA ==> AMHCAT (? for List of Available Volumes) ( Y or N ) ( Y or N )

If allocating the catalog, the following information is required: Primary Space ==> 12 Secondary Space ==> 12 (1-999 Cylinders) (1-999 Cylinders)

Figure 91. Panel: Define SSA and CATALOG data for full system replacement

In the panel, the fields are as follows: Catalog Name of the catalog. Type Type of catalog. MCAT indicates a master catalog; UCAT indicates a user catalog. Define the following fields: Define SSA Set this value to Y (yes) to define a new SSA in the driving systems master catalog. Set this value to N (no) if the SSA is already defined in the driving systems master catalog. If you set the Allocate Catalog field to Y, you must set the Define SSA field to Y. Allocate Catalog Specifies whether to allocate the catalog. Set this value to Y (yes) if the catalog does not yet exist on the target system, and is to be allocated. Set this value to N (no) if the catalog already exists on the target system; it cannot be allocated again. All catalog names must be unique. SSA Name Specifies the system-specific alias to be used to locate target system data sets that will be cataloged in the specified catalog. The name you choose must not have an existing alias entry in the driving systems master catalog, and cannot be the same as the high-level qualifier of any data set cataloged in the driving systems master catalog. Catalog Volume Specifies the volume serial of the DASD on which the catalog is to reside. For a pop-up list of volumes that exist in the work configuration, enter a question mark (?). Select a volume by entering S before the desired volume serial. You are not required to choose a volume from the list. Any volume serial may be specified; if it does not exist, it is added to the configuration.

136

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Defining system-specific aliases (SSAs)

If the volume you specified already exists in the work configuration, the unit you specify here must match the unit value you specified previously. Otherwise, a message is displayed to prompt you to resolve the mismatch. Space Specifies the primary and secondary space to be allocated to the catalog. See the section Determining Catalog Size in z/OS DFSMS Managing Catalogs, SC26-7409 for information on how much space to allocate for catalogs. If you did not specify that the catalog is to be allocated (you set the Allocate Catalog field to N), do not enter values for these fields.

Defining SSA data for software upgrade

For a software upgrade installation, two panels are used to define SSAs: one for the master catalog and one for user catalogs. For the master catalog, define your SSAs with the panel shown in Figure 92.
CPPP6035 --------------- SSA to CATALOG ( PC000226 ) ------------------------COMMAND ==> Define SSAs

Catalog : MASTER.CATALOG Type : MCAT

SSA Name

==> ZORT

(Required)

Figure 92. Panel: Define SSA and catalog data (software upgrade) master catalog

In the panel, the fields are described as follows: Catalog Name of the catalog for which an SSA is to be defined. Type Type of catalog. Always MCAT, indicating the master catalog. Define the following field: SSA Name Specifies the system-specific alias to be used to locate target system data sets. The name you choose must not have an existing alias entry in the driving systems master catalog, and cannot be the same as the high-level qualifier of any data set cataloged in the driving systems master catalog. For a software upgrade installation, these same restrictions apply to existing entries in the target systems master catalog. For user catalogs, define your SSAs with the panel shown in Figure 93 on page 138.

Chapter 10. Defining system-specific aliases (SSAs)

137

Defining system-specific aliases (SSAs)

CPPP6036 --------------- SSA to CATALOG ( PC000226 ) ------------------------COMMAND ==> _ Define SSA and CATALOG Data Catalog : TONY.CATALOG Type : UCAT SSA Name ==> SMPESSA (Required)

Allocate Catalog ==> (Y or N) If allocating the catalog, the following information is required: Catalog Volume ==> AMHCAT Primary Space ==> 1 Secondary Space ==> 1 (? For List of Available Vols) (1-999 Cylinders) (1-999 Cylinders)

Figure 93. Panel: Define SSA and catalog data (software upgrade)

In the panel, the fields are described as follows: Catalog Name of the catalog for which an SSA is to be defined. Type Type of catalog. Always UCAT, indicating a user catalog. Define the following fields: SSA Name Specifies the system-specific alias to be used to locate target system data sets that will be cataloged in the specified catalog. The name you choose must not have an existing alias entry in the driving systems master catalog, and cannot be the same as the high-level qualifier of any data set cataloged in the driving systems master catalog. For a software upgrade installation, these same restrictions apply to existing entries in the target systems master catalog. Allocate Catalog Specifies whether to allocate the catalog. Set this value to Y (yes) if the catalog does not yet exist on the target system, and is to be allocated. Set this value to N (no) if the catalog already exists on the target system; it cannot be allocated again. Catalog Volume If you specify that the catalog is to be allocated (that is, you set the Allocate Catalog field to Y), use the Catalog Volume field to specify the volume serial of the DASD on which the catalog is to reside. For a pop-up list of volumes that exist in the work configuration, enter a question mark (?). Select a volume by entering S before the desired volume serial. You are not required to choose a volume from the list. Any volume serial may be specified; if it does not exist, it is added to the configuration. If the volume you specified already exists in the work configuration, the unit you specify here must match the unit value you specified previously. Otherwise, a message is displayed to prompt you to resolve the mismatch. If you did not specify that the catalog is to be allocated (you set the Allocate Catalog field to N), do not enter a value for this field. Space Specifies the primary and secondary space to be allocated to the catalog, if the catalog does not yet exist on the target system and must be allocated. See the

138

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Defining system-specific aliases (SSAs)

section Determining Catalog Size in z/OS DFSMS Managing Catalogs, SC26-7409 for information on how much space to allocate for catalogs. If you did not specify that the catalog is to be allocated (you set the Allocate Catalog field to N), do not enter values for these fields.

Confirming processing requirements

If, when you try to exit the Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs function, the dialog detects an invalid catalog alias definition or (for a software upgrade installation) that there is not at least one catalog alias defined, the panel shown in Figure 94 is displayed.
CustomPac ---------------- SSA to CATALOG ( MD053718 ) -----------------------COMMAND ==> Confirm Processing Requirements

Some Catalog to SSA Relationships have not been defined OR were Invalid

Press the ENTER key to continue editing the table Press the END or RETURN key to save the current values and EXIT, Processing will resume at this function

Figure 94. Panel: Confirm processing requirements

To continue working with the configuration, press Enter. To exit the function, press End. Subsequent processing of the dialog resumes at the Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs function.

Chapter 10. Defining system-specific aliases (SSAs)

139

140

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Chapter 11. Submitting the installation jobs

CPPPFLOW - - - - - - - - - - - Installation Options for Order ( MD053718 ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - OPTION ==> Complete these options to install the order:
C V Z M A SSA I Create Variables Zones Modify Alias SSA Installation Create the Work Configuration Specify Values for Variables Specify SMP/E Zone Names Modify the System Layout Specify Catalogs for High-Level Qualifiers Specify Temporary Aliases (SSAs) for Catalogs Create and Submit Installation Jobs (Option not available until download complete)

You can use Save any time after creating the work configuration:
S Save Save the Current Work Configuration

From the Installation Menu, enter I to begin the next dialog function, Create and Submit Installation Jobs. The Job Selection List is displayed (Figure 95 on page 142), showing the installation jobs, plus any additional jobs you might have defined. Note: The I option is not selectable until the order has been successfully downloaded. You can use the GENSKEL command to tailor all of the installation jobs at one time. When GENSKEL completes, the dialog saves the jobs in a backup data set. You can select the jobs from the backup data set through line command B (rather than line command S). GENSKEL saves you time during installation, and frees your TSO/E session for other tasks while the jobs are being tailored. For more information, see Using GENSKEL to generate the installation jobs on page 145.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

141

Submitting the installation jobs

CPPP6121 -------------- Installation JOBs ( MD053718 ) ---------- Row 1 of 159 -----COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> HALF JOB Selection List SS$( EXCLUDE )

Primary Commands:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous GENskel OFile OList SUMmary SS$ VARedit) Line Commands:(Backup Delete Edit Insert Log Output Select SS-block Vars) S Description STEP MC STAtus RC -- --- ---------------------------------------- -------- -- ---------- ---SRC DEFAULT JOBCARD ==> INSTALLATION JOBS DOC RUNNING INSTALLATION JOBS DOC DIALOG VERIFY DOC INSTALLATION SETUP JOBS JOB INITIALIZE REQUIRED DASD DOC DEFINE CATALOGS AND RESTORE JOB RACF PROFILES ON DRIVING SYSTEM JOB DEFINE CATALOGS JOB DEFINE SYSTEM-SPECIFIC ALIASES JOB ALLOCATE AND CATALOG DS

OFFLINIT 00 RACFDRV DEFCAT DEFSSA ALLOCDS 00 00 00 00

Figure 95. Panel: Job selection list

At this stage of the installation process, your primary source of information is ServerPac: Installing Your Order. This chapter supplements the information in that book. When you have finished running the installation jobs and verification programs (IVPs) described in ServerPac: Installing Your Order, you continue with Chapter 12, Saving the configuration, on page 153. The panel displays the jobs and documentation that are required to install your order, based on the installation type that you chose earlier in the installation (full system replacement or software upgrade). The Jobs used to install the ServerPac table in ServerPac: Installing Your Order lists all of the jobs and indicates the installation type to which they apply (full system replacement or software upgrade). The job selection list includes the maximum return code (MC) of the STEP, the status of the STEPand the actual return code of the STEP. For a system abend, the RC field shows SYST. As Figure 95 shows, the installation jobstream has three types of components, as follows: SRC Identifies the default job statement (or source data). The source data always appears first in the jobstream. You can browse it by selecting it, or edit it through ISPF EDIT using the E line command. Identifies a part of the tailored documentation for your order. You can browse the documentation by selecting it. Identifies an installation job for your order. If you enter S for the job, the dialog displays the job, tailored according to your work configuration. You can submit the job for execution.

DOC

JOB

142

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Submitting the installation jobs

If you include the job within a set of block Select (SS) line commands, the dialog tailors all the included STEPs into a single job and displays it. If you enter B for the job (and have run GENSKEL), the dialog displays the previously-tailored job. You can always edit a job and submit it, no matter how you select it. Note, however, that your changes will be saved only if you: v Use the ISPF EDIT CREATE command to save the altered job, or v Use the ISPF EDIT REPLACE command to create a BACKUP member, or v Edit an IBM-supplied job in the backup library (SCPPBENU), or v Edit a user-supplied job in the skeleton library (SCPPSENU). The following primary commands are valid for this panel: ? SET Locate Find Next Previous These are standard commands for panels that display lists. See Primary commands on page 11. GENSKEL This command generates the installation jobs for your order and stores them in the SCPPBENU data set. Of these jobs, the Job Selection List panel displays only those jobs that apply to your orders installation type (full system replacement or software upgrade). For more information, see Using GENSKEL to generate the installation jobs on page 145. OFILE This command writes a list of the installation jobs to a user-defined file (see page OFILE on page 187). OLIST This command, writes a list of the installation jobs to the ISPF LIST data set. SUMMARY This command, abbreviated as SUM, displays the processing log, which is a list of the jobs that were submitted from the jobstream and their return codes. If output logging is active, you can browse the job output (see Displaying the processing log on page 146). SS$ This command controls whether user-defined jobs are included with any file-tailored jobs that you select through line command SS. On the panel, the SS$( ) field shows the current status of this setting. For example, Figure 95 on page 142 shows SS$( EXCLUDE ) to indicate that user-defined jobs will not be selected by block select (SS) commands. To change this setting to its other value (INCLUDE), enter the SS$ command. VAREDIT This command, abbreviated as VAR, invokes the Specify Values for Variables function (described in Chapter 6, Defining installation variables, on page 59). All variables are reloaded on exit from this function; changes to data values are available for immediate use.

Chapter 11. Submitting the installation jobs

143

Submitting the installation jobs

The following line commands are valid for this panel: B Back-up command. This command displays backup members you have created by running GENSKEL or saved by using the BACKUP or REPLACE command after selecting the job with the Select line command. You can edit the job and submit it for execution. Any modifications you make will be saved. See Using line command B on page 146. Delete command. Use this command to delete any user-defined job (you cannot delete IBM-supplied jobs). You must confirm your DELETE request. The job is deleted, but the processing log entries, if any, remain. See Deleting a user-defined job on page 151. Edit command. Use this command if you want to edit the SRC member or any user-defined job. Your changes are saved when you exit ISPF Edit. See Editing a user-defined job on page 151. Insert command. Use this command to insert user-defined jobs, if any, into the jobstream. See Inserting a user-defined job on page 149. Log command. Use this command to display the processing log for the selected job, which contains a list of executions of the job and their return codes (the job might have been run more than once because of previous processing failures). If output logging is active, you can browse the job output. This command uses the same processing as the SUMMARY primary command (see Displaying the processing log on page 146). Activate output logging. Use this command to display the job output through ISPF Browse. The maximum return code from the job is shown in the RC field. If output logging is not active, only the processing status of the job is reported (for example, ON OUTPUT QUEUE). Select command. Use this command to file tailor a component in foreground mode. Use of this command depends on the type of component that you have selected, as follows: For JOB components: v The job is tailored and displayed. The default job statement is automatically inserted before the STEP JCL (unless it is a user-defined job and the MAX return code field is blank). v You can submit the job for execution using the ISPF Submit command (for more information, see Using line command S on page 147. v To file tailor jobs in background mode (batch), use the GENSKEL primary command. For DOC or SRC components: v The data is tailored and displayed (through ISPF Browse). SS Block Select. Use this command to select a block of jobs (mark the start and end of the block of jobs with the SS command pair). The marked block can contain any kind of component, but only JOB components are selected. If user-defined jobs are contained in the block, they are selected only if the current setting of the SS$ command indicates INCLUDE. The job is tailored and displayed for edit. The default job statement is automatically inserted before the first step JCL. You can submit the job for execution. Do not use the block selection method for steps with a blank MC field. V VARS command. Use this command to see the CustomPac variables (those prefixed with F) that are relevant for the selected job. See Chapter 6, Defining installation variables, on page 59.

I L

144

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Submitting the installation jobs

If you change the value of any of the variables, and you used GENSKEL previously, you must rerun GENSKEL to tailor the jobs with the updated values. For information about running the jobs in the Job Selection List, see ServerPac: Installing Your Order.

Using GENSKEL to generate the installation jobs

When you enter the GENSKEL primary command from the Job Selection list panel, the panel shown in Figure 96 is displayed.
CPPP6126 -------------- Installation JOBS ( MD053718 ) ---------------COMMAND ==> GENERATE File Tailored Installation Jobs This function generates a BATCH job which will file tailor ALL Installation Jobs in one pass, and save the jobs to the BACKUP dataset. If a job already exists in the backup dataset REPLACE Job ==> Y (Y or N)

Note: After submitting the GENSKEL job, you must exit the dialog to release GENSKEL processing. Also, to avoid dataset contention, you may not invoke the dialogs until the GENSKEL job has completed.

Figure 96. Panel: Generate file-tailored installation jobs

You must tailor each of the installation jobs before you submit them. You can use the GENSKEL command to tailor installation jobs in the background. GENSKEL generates the installation jobs for your order, and stores them in the backup data set (SCPPBENU). Having the installation jobs stored in SCPPBENU allows you to review them, if desired, after the order is installed. File-tailored jobs might already exist in the SCPPBENU data set. Specify whether GENSKEL is to replace these jobs or preserve them. Set the Replace Job field to Y to replace jobs; set the field to N to preserve them. Press Enter to generate the GENSKEL job. Then, submit the job with the SUBMIT command. Exit the dialogs until the GENSKEL job completes. For your convenience, the Job Selection List panel displays only the installation jobs that apply to your orders installation type (full system replacement or software upgrade). To view the entire set of jobs generated by GENSKEL, including jobs that are not needed for your installation type, check the SCPPBENU data set. (The GENSKEL output lists all generated jobs in the SYSPRINT output data set. ) To access these jobs, enter line command B on the Installation Jobs display.

Selecting job output logging

When you submit a job for execution, the job number is written to a processing log.

Chapter 11. Submitting the installation jobs

145

Submitting the installation jobs

You can capture the job output by having it written to data set SCPPOENU. Doing so requires that you set the installation variable synonym OUTPUT LOGGING to YES. The jobname also needs to be the users id plus a character. The process for setting installation variables is described in Chapter 6, Defining installation variables, on page 59. If data set SCPPOENU runs out of space, rename it, and allocate a new one with more space. Copy the renamed data set into the new SCPPOENU data set and then delete the original.

Displaying the processing log

If you enter the SUMMARY primary command at the Job Selection List, the Processing Log panel is shown (Figure 97). This panel lists the jobs that were submitted from the jobstream and their respective return codes. If output logging is active, you can browse the job output.
CPPP6125 -------------- Installation JOBs ( MD053718 ) ----- ROW 1 TO 6 OF 6 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Processing LOG PRIM Cmds:(? SET Locate First Next Previous SORT) LINE Cmds:(Output) S STEPname JOB name - -------- -------CPPUPDT CE59526S RESTORE CE59526A ALLOCDS CE59526Z RACFDRV CS59526A OFFLINIT CS59526A job ID RC UserID DATE stamp -------- ---- -------- ----------------JOB29412 CE59526 03/05/11 10:21:03 JOB27452 CE59526 03/05/08 22:52:09 JOB25783 CE59526 03/05/07 18:47:10 JOB22763 CS59526 03/05/05 16:54:47 JOB22478 CS59526 03/05/05 15:40:31

* Bottom of data **

Figure 97. Panel: Processing log

The following primary commands are valid for this panel: ?, SET, F, L, N, P, SORT These are standard commands for panels that display lists. See Primary commands on page 11. The following line commands are valid for this panel: O Output. Displays the job output through ISPF Browse and shows, in the RC field, the highest return code for the job. If output logging is not active, this command shows only the processing status of the job (for example, ON OUTPUT QUEUE).

Using line command B

If you enter line command B for a job in the Job Selection List, the panel in Figure 98 on page 147 is displayed.

146

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Submitting the installation jobs

CPPPEDIF - BACKUP MEMBER(OFFLINIT) -------------------------- COLUMNS 001 072 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> HALF ****** ***************************** TOP OF DATA ****************************** 000100 //STOB4A00 JOB (7928),PROGRAMMER NAME, 000200 // CLASS=S,MSGCLASS=K,MSGLEVEL=(1,1) 000300 //* 000600 //*------------------------------------------------------------------000700 //* GDE: SERVERPAC INSTALLATION 000800 //* DOC: INITIALIZE ALL NEEDED DASDS. 000900 //* 001000 //* BEFORE RUNNING THIS STEP, BE SURE THAT THE FOLLOWING 001100 //* DEVICES HAVE BEEN PUT OFFLINE : 001200 //* A00 001300 //* B00 001400 //* C00 001500 //* AFTER HAVING COMPLETED THIS STEP, BE SURE THAT ABOVE 001600 //* DEVICES ARE PUT ONLINE. 001700 //* 001800 //* NOTE: THIS JOBS REQUIRES AN OPERATOR RESPONSE FOR EACH DASD TO BE 001900 //* INITIALIZED . 002000 //* 002100 //* MRC: THE MAXIMUM EXPECTED RETURN CODE IS: 0 002200 //*------------------------------------------------------------------002300 //OFFLINIT EXEC PGM=ICKDSF,COND=(4000,LT)

Figure 98. Panel: Edit backup member

This edit session acts directly on the named member in the backup library (SCPPBENU). If you delete all of the records from the member, you cannot exit the panel until you enter the CANCEL primary command. An empty member is not allowed in the backup library. Standard editing commands have the following effects when entered for a backup job: CANCEL Ends the edit session without saving your changes.

END/RETURN Ends the Edit session and saves your changes. If the backup member has no records, the command is ignored, and you must use the CANCEL command. REPLACE Saves your changes from the edit session in the backup member. If a backup member does not exist, one is created. If a backup member already exists, the member is replaced. If the backup member has no records, this command is ignored. The job is submitted for execution and the job number is written to the processing log.

SAVE SUBMIT

Using line command S

If you enter line command S for a job or doc in the Job Selection List, the panel in Figure 99 on page 148 is displayed.

Chapter 11. Submitting the installation jobs

147

Submitting the installation jobs

CPPPEDIF - JOBSTREAM(DEFCAT) -------------------------------- COLUMNS 001 072 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> HALF ****** ***************************** TOP OF DATA ****************************** 000001 //USER JOB (ACCTNUM,EXP),PROGRAMMER NAME, 000202 // CLASS=S,MSGCLASS=K,MSGLEVEL=(1,1) 000003 //* 000004 //JOBLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CUSTNAME.AD000115.LOADLIB 000005 //* 000006 //*-------------------------------------------------------------------000007 //* GDE: SERVERPAC INSTALLATION 000008 //* DOC: DEFINE THE TARGET SYSTEMS CATALOG(S) INTO THE DRIVING 000009 //* SYSTEMS MASTER CATALOG. 000010 //* 000011 //* IMPORT/CONNECT EVENTUAL TARGET SYSTEM USER CATALOG(S) INTO 000012 //* THE TARGET SYSTEMS MASTER CATALOG. 000013 //* 000014 //* MRC: THE MAXIMUM EXPECTED RETURN CODE IS: 0 000015 //* 000016 //*---------------------------------------------------------------------

Figure 99. Panel: Edit jobstream

This ISPF Edit session allows you to edit the job before submitting it. If you make changes, you can save the job in the backup data set by using the BACKUP or REPLACE command as described below. To reselect a job you have edited and saved in the backup data set, use the B line command to select it on the previous panel, rather than the S line command. In this session, ISPF edit commands work as expected, with the exceptions of End, Replace, Save and Submit. The effects of these commands are described, as follows: END REPLACE SAVE SUBMIT Ends the edit session, but does not save your changes. Replaces an existing backup member (created by the BACKUP command; see below). Is disabled. Submits the job for execution (as expected), but also tells the dialog that the job was submitted, for tracking purposes.

Besides the ISPF Edit commands, you can use the dialogs BACKUP command to save the contents of this edit session in a new member of the backup library, SCPPBENU. When you end the session, the new member is shown in the STEP column in the dialog. If the member already exists, the BACKUP command is rejected with the message BACKUP MEMBER EXISTS. (To replace an existing backup member, use the REPLACE command.) The BACKUP command creates members in the SCPPBENU library only. You cannot use BACKUP to create members in other libraries. You can, however, use the ISPF Edit Create command to do so.

148

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Submitting the installation jobs

Working with user-defined jobs

Besides working with the IBM-supplied jobs, you can add your own jobs to the installation job stream; see the following sections: v Inserting a user-defined job v Editing a user-defined job on page 151 v Deleting a user-defined job on page 151.

Inserting a user-defined job

When you attempt to insert a user-defined job into the jobstream, the panel in Figure 100 is displayed.
CPPP6122 -------------- Installation JOBs ( MD053718 ) -------COMMAND ==> INSERT a USER Defined JOB

User STEP Name

==> $ : User Names are ALWAYS a $ plus 1 to 7 characters

Max Return Code ==> 00 Data Description ==>

Figure 100. Panel: Insert a user-defined job

Fill in the following fields: Step Name Specifies the name by which the job is to be known (this is not the jobname). The name must be unique. Otherwise, the dialog displays a duplicate message. The first character must be a dollar sign ($), so the dialog inserts the $ character ahead of the data entry field. For the rest of the member name, you can use up to 7 valid characters: alphabetic, numeric, or national (@,#, or $). MAX Return Code Specifies the maximum expected return code for the step. If you specify a value in the range 00-99, the default JCL job statement is automatically inserted before the step when you select the file from the Job Selection List (through line command S). If you leave the value blank, the dialog assumes that the user-defined job already includes a valid job statement and does not insert a job statement. Data Description Enter a meaningful description of the step. A scan of the skeleton library (SCPPSENU) is made. If the STEP name you wish to use does not exist as a current member of the library, EDIT processing is invoked to allow creation of source JCL for the step. (See Editing a user-defined job on page 151).

Chapter 11. Submitting the installation jobs

149

Submitting the installation jobs

If a member currently exists which has the same name as the step name you wish to use, it is possible that: v It is an old version v It is a previously deleted user-defined job, but physical delete of the skeleton member was specified as no. You must determine the cause. To assist you, the dialog displays the member, for example:
BROWSE -- STOB4.MD053718.SCPPSENU($IDCAMS) --------- LINE 00000000 COL 001 080 COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> PAGE ********************************* TOP OF DATA ********************************** //STEP001 EXEC PGM=IDCAMS 00000100 //* 00000200 //* ********************************************************** 00000300 //* * THIS JOB REPROS THE TEST LOGS FOR THE PREVIOUS SYSTEM * 00000400 //* * TO STOBBS USERID DATASETS, THEN DELETES THEM * 00000500 //* * * 00000600 //* * THE TEST LOGS CONTAIN INSTALLATION VERIFICATION DATA * 00000700 //* ********************************************************** 00000800 //* 00000900 //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 00001000 //* 00001100 //SYSIN DD * 00001200 REPRO INDATASET(SYSSTOBB.TESTLOG.AYNUK) + 00001300 OUTDATASET(STOB4.TESTLOG.AYNUK) 00001400 00001500 REPRO INDATASET(SYSSTOBB.TESTLOG.ALIUK) + 00001600 ************************************************************************* 001700 * CPP0612001W User JOB $IDCAMS EXISTS as a member of the File Tailoring* 001800 * Library, REVIEW The Contents of the Member * 001900 ************************************************************************* 002000 ******************************** BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************

Figure 101. Panel: Browse existing user job

You must confirm that the member in the skeleton library can be used as source for the step user-defined job (Figure 102). Do so by entering USE in the COMMAND ==> field and pressing enter.
CPPP6123 -------------- Installation JOBs ( MD053718 ) --------------COMMAND ==> INSERT a USER Defined JOB W A R N I N G The JOB you have tried to insert EXISTS as a member in the SOURCE Library You must verify this member can be used Confirm the Member can be USED, Type USE and press ENTER Press the END or RETURN key to CANCEL the INSERT request

Figure 102. Panel: Insert a user-defined job - confirmation

When confirmed, EDIT processing is invoked to allow changes to the source JCL for the step (see Editing a user-defined job on page 151).

150

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Submitting the installation jobs

Editing a user-defined job

If you enter line command E for a user-defined job in the Job Selection List, the panel in Figure 103 is displayed.
CPPPEDIF - SOURCE MEMBER($IDCAMS) --------------------------- COLUMNS 001 072 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> HALF ****** ***************************** TOP OF DATA ****************************** 000100 //STEP001 EXEC PGM=IDCAMS 000200 //* 000300 //* ********************************************************** 000400 //* * THIS JOB REPROS THE TEST LOGS FOR THE PREVIOUS SYSTEM * 000500 //* * TO STOBBS USERID DATASETS, THEN DELETES THEM * 000600 //* * * 000700 //* * THE TEST LOGS CONTAIN INSTALLATION VERIFICATION DATA * 000800 //* ********************************************************** 000900 //* 001000 //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=* 001100 //* 001200 //SYSIN DD * 001300 REPRO INDATASET(SYSSTOBB.TESTLOG.AYNUK) + 001400 OUTDATASET(STOB4.TESTLOG.AYNUK) 001500 001600 REPRO INDATASET(SYSSTOBB.TESTLOG.ALIUK) + 001700 OUTDATASET(STOB4.TESTLOG.ALIUK) 001800 001900 DELETE SYSSTOBB.TESTLOG.AYNUK 002000 DELETE SYSSTOBB.TESTLOG.ALIUK ****** **************************** BOTTOM OF DATA ****************************

Figure 103. Panel: Edit source member

This edit session acts directly on the job source member. Do not create a job statement for a user-defined job. When you later select the job from the Job Selection List (Figure 95 on page 142), the dialog will automatically insert a job statement in the job. If you delete all of the records from the member, you cannot exit from the panel unless you enter the CANCEL primary command. An empty member is not allowed in the skeleton library. Standard editing commands have the following effects when entered for job source: CANCEL The edit session is ended; nothing is saved.

END/RETURN If the member has no records, the command is ignored, and you must use the CANCEL command. SAVE SUBMIT If the member has no records, the command is ignored. This command is disabled. To submit a job, you must first select it from the Job Selection List panel. See Figure 95 on page 142

Deleting a user-defined job

If you enter line command D to delete a user-defined job, the panel in Figure 104 on page 152 is displayed.

Chapter 11. Submitting the installation jobs

151

Submitting the installation jobs

CPPP6124 -------------- Installation JOBs ( MD053718 ) ----------------------COMMAND ==> DELETE a USER Defined JOB $IDCAMS JOB : COPY TEST LOGS FOR PREVIOUS INSTALL Delete Member from the Skeleton Library ==> N You MUST Confirm DELETION By Typing DELETE and pressing ENTER Press the END or RETURN key to CANCEL the DELETE request

Figure 104. Panel: Delete a user-defined job - confirmation

To confirm your request, enter DELETE in the COMMAND ==> field and press Enter. By default, the physical skeleton from the skeleton library (SCPPSENU) is retained; only the entry for the job in the control table is deleted, to allow the job to be re-inserted at a later stage. To delete the physical skeleton, specify Y in the Delete Skeleton field.

152

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Chapter 12. Saving the configuration

You can use Save any time after creating the work configuration:
* Save Save the Current Work Configuration

After you install a ServerPac order, use the Save the Current Work Configuration function of the dialog to save your work configuration. Doing so can help you save time in installing subsequent ServerPac orders. Rather than manually re-entering all of the data required for each new order, you can merge the saved configuration with the new order and avoid much of the data entry. For example, while installing your order, you might have chosen to customize the shipped configuration. You might have: v Merged it with a saved work configuration v Changed the values of variables v Added your own user variables and installation jobs v Changed data set names v Changed the space allocated for data sets v Assigned data sets to physical volumes v Merged data sets v Changed the catalog configuration. To keep these settings available for a future order, save the configuration. Another, equally important reason to save a configuration is to take a checkpoint to which one can return. You can use the Save command at any time after the work configuration is created. If you wish to preserve the work configuration in a particular state (for example, to be able to return to that state if a subsequent step goes awry), you can save it. You can save it more than once; each time you save it, the previously saved copy is overlaid. To return to the saved state, recreate the configuration and select the saved configuration for merging. The work configuration will then reflect the saved configuration. However, you must re-select each previously-completed option on CPPPFLOW, in turn, before being able to return to the option in use when the configuration was last saved. Figure 105 on page 154 shows the panel that you use to save the work configuration. To display this panel, select option S (Save the Current Work Configuration) from the Installation Menu.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

153

Saving the configuration

CPPP6041 -------------- SAVE Configuration ( MD053718 ) ---------------------COMMAND ==> _ Specify SAVE Library Enter the High Level Qualifier of the Library to which the Order Configuration will be Saved ==> CPP.MD053718.CONFIG The default qualifier used is OrderHLQ. You may enter a Comment to identify the Configuration. This is recommended if you use a qualifier other than the default. ==> DEBBIES Z/OS REL.5 SET-UP WITH RECOMMENDED LAYOUT MASTER HLQ is : CPPMASTR

Figure 105. Panel: Specify save configuration library

Enter the high level qualifiers for the saved work configuration (up to 35 characters, including the periods). To uniquely identify the saved configuration, it is recommended that you use your order qualifier as one of the specified qualifiers, along with something meaningful (such as CONFIG or SAVECFG) to identify the configuration. To your specified qualifiers, the dialog appends one of the following low-level qualifiers to the data sets in the saved configuration : SCPPSENU For skeleton libraries SCPPTENU For table libraries. For example, if the order qualifiers are CPP.MD053718, a good high level qualifier to use for the saved configuration would be:
CPP.MD053718.CONFIG

and the two libraries used to save the configuration are:

CPP.MD053718.CONFIG.SCPPSENU CPP.MD053718.CONFIG.SCPPTENU

If you use ACS routines, ensure that these routines permit the allocation of the dialog data sets, SCPPSENU and SCPPTENU. Or, preallocate these data sets before saving the configuration. Otherwise, your SAVE command might fail with a dynamic allocation error. For information about writing ACS routines, see z/OS DFSMS Storage Administration Reference. It is recommended that you enter a meaningful description in the comment field. Include the release level of the product that you installed, for example:
DEBBIES Z/OS REL.5 SET-UP WITH RECOMMENDED LAYOUT

During your next installation of a ServerPac order, you will find the description of the saved configuration displayed on the Select Configuration panel (shown in Creating the configuration on page 44). If the saved configuration data sets do not exist, the dialog prompts you to confirm that the data sets can be automatically allocated.

154

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Saving the configuration

You can save only one configuration for an order. If a saved work configuration already exists, the dialog prompts you to confirm that the configuration can be deleted (see Figure 106). Processing cannot continue until you allow the existing configuration to be deleted.
CPPP6042 -------------- SAVE Configuration ( MD053718 ) ---------------------COMMAND ==> DELETE an EXISTING Configuration A Saved Configuration already exists in Library CPP.MD053718.CONFIG This must be DELETED before SAVE can continue You MUST Confirm DELETION By Typing DELETE and pressing ENTER Press the END or RETURN key to CANCEL the DELETE request

Figure 106. Panel: Deleting an Existing Configuration - Confirmation

To confirm that the configuration can be deleted, enter DELETE in the COMMAND ==> field and press Enter.

Chapter 12. Saving the configuration

155

156

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Chapter 13. Working with orders

Selecting an order
Figure 107 shows the Order Selection panel, which allows you to specify the orders to be displayed. This panel is displayed when Option D is selected from CPPPPOLI
CPPP607B ---------------- Select Orders to Display ---------------------------COMMAND ==>

Display Orders by Status: Received Started Installed **Error** ==> ==> ==> ==> Y Y Y Y (Y (Y (Y (Y or or or or N) N) N) N)

Figure 107. Panel: Order selection

To display only those orders having a specific status, specify a Y for each status type to be included in the order display list and an N for each status type to be excluded from the order display list. Any field left blank defaults to Y. If all status fields are specified as Y (the default), all orders are shown. The available status selections are: Received This status is set when the order can be selected on the order list panel. For orders delivered on tape, this is after the RECEIVE job has run. For orders that are downloaded, this is after the first phase of the download has been completed. Started This status is set when the work configuration has been created. Installed This status is set once the installation jobs for the order have been run. **Error** This status is set when the RECEIVE job fails and the failure is detected by the job. (It cannot be set if the job is canceled, abends, or ends due to a system failure.) When an orders status is **Error**, examine the output of the RECEIVE job, correct the problem, and resubmit the job. If no orders meet your selection criteria, a message is displayed and the panel allows you to enter a different selection.

Displaying an order
When you complete the Select Orders to Display panel, a list of orders that matches your selection criteria is displayed in the Order List panel (Figure 108 on page 158). (This panel is also displayed if you enter Option I on panel CPPPPOLI.)

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2007

157

CPPP6071 ------------------------ ORDER LIST --------------------- Row 1 of 2 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> HALF Primary Commands: (? SET Locate Find Next Previous OFile SORT VErbose VERsion) Line Commands: (Select Edit Delete Products Report Output) --- Last Change -S Order System Name SREL Package Build Date Status User Date - -------- ----------- ---- -------- ---------- ---------- ------- ---------JE000001 SYSNAME1 Z038 SERV 2002/10/23 Started TONY 2003/05/09 JE000002 Z038 SERV 2002/11/05 Received NANCY 2003/04/03 JE000003 Z038 SERV 2002/11/05 Installed WAYNE 2003/04/03 JE000007 Z038 SERV 2004/07/04 **Error** JOHN 2003/07/24 ******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Figure 108. Panel: Order list (terse mode)

The Order List panel indicates the status of your orders with one of the following status codes (in the Status column): Received This status is set when the order can be selected on the order list panel. For orders delivered on tape, this is after the RECEIVE job has run. For orders that are downloaded, this is after the first phase of the download has been completed. Started This status is set when the work configuration has been created. Installed This status is set once the installation jobs for the order have been run. **Error** This status is set when the RECEIVE job fails and the failure is detected by the job. (It cannot be set if the job is canceled, abends, or ends due to a system failure.) When an orders status is **Error**, examine the output of the RECEIVE job, correct the problem, and resubmit the job. The following primary commands are valid for this panel: ? SET Locate Find Next Previous OFile SORT VErbose VERsion These are standard commands for panels that display lists. See Primary commands on page 11. OFILE This command, abbreviated as OF, writes the list of orders to a user-defined file (see page OFILE on page 187). VERSION This command, abbreviated as VER, displays the current version of the dialog. The following line commands are valid for this panel: D E P Delete. Deletes an order from the order inventory. You will prompted to confirm the deletion. Edit. Allows an existing order to be edited. Only the orders System Name, Status, and Comment fields are editable. Products. Displays the products, elements, and features in the order, including the individual program names and numbers, their versions, and the number of FMIDs in each product, element, or feature. Report. Displays a panel on which you can request a report that writes all information associated with an order and its products and features to a data set. The panel prompts you for information about the report data set.

158

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

S O

Select. Select an order for installation. Output. Displays a panel that lists the installation jobs you have submitted. You can use this panel to display any associated job output for a selected installation job.

Editing an order
Figure 109 shows the panel that is displayed when you select an order for editing through line command E on the Order List panel.
CPPP6074 ----------------------- Order Details -------------------------------COMMAND ==> Order Number Package Type Production Date SREL Customer Name Customer Number : : : : : : JE000001 SERV 2004/08/31 ZO38 ( MVS IBM Corp. 1234567

Last Changed On : 2004/09/01 Last Changed By : DAVID Status ==> S (Started, Received, Installed, **Error**) System Name ==> SYSA Comments ==> z/OS R6 Last Saved Configuration: Description ==> Z/OS R4 ORDER #1 Qualifiers ==> DAVID.DO000277.CONFIG4

Figure 109. Panel: Editing an order

Update the order information in the panel and press Enter to save the changes. You can change only the Status, System Name, and Comment fields, and (if they appear), the Description and Qualifiers fields under Last Saved Configuration. You cannot change the other fields. The Last Saved Configuration: text, the two data entry fields that follow it, the content of those fields, and their descriptions are displayed only when there is a saved configuration for the order. When there is a saved configuration, they appear regardless of the orders status. The fields are described as follows: Order number This value is supplied by IBM. Package type Package type of the order. Valid values are: CPP ProductPac CRMO Selected Follow-On Service CRS RefreshPac EXP SubSystem ServerPac or SystemPac Full Volume Dump format EXPDD SystemPac Dump by Data Set format FPAC FunctionPac HCHK Health Check OMIS OMIS
Chapter 13. Working with orders

159

SERV

ServerPac

Production date Production date. The date is in the format:

YYYY/MM/DD

SREL System release of the order. These are the SRELs defined by IBM: MULT Multiple SRELs P115 DB2 C150 CICS P115 IMS Z038 MVS (represents a z/OS order) P004 NCP Customer name Your company name. Customer number Your customer number. Last changed on You cannot change this field. This is the date the status field was last changed. It is updated automatically whenever the status field is changed. Last changed by You cannot change this field. This is the userid of the person or program that last changed the status field. It is updated automatically whenever the status field is changed. Status The current install status of the order. Possible values are: R Received S Started I Installed E **Error** Notes: 1. No data entry value is allowed for a status of **Error**, which can be displayed, but not set. 2. Orders having a status of Finalized, which could be set using prior levels of the dialog, are displayed as Installed. 3. For the meaning of each status code, see Selecting an order on page 157. 4. You must confirm the change in status (see Verifying the status of an order on page 163). The normal status sequence is: v Received Started v Started Installed System name This optional field is reserved for your use; it is not set by IBM. You can put whatever you want here or leave it blank. Comment This is an optional, user-defined field. You can change it at any time. Description This is an optional, user-defined field. You can change it at any time. Qualifiers This is an optional, user-defined field. You can change it at any time.

160

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Displaying the products and features of an order

From the Order List panel (Figure 108 on page 158), you can view the products, elements, and features of a particular order by entering line command P. Figure 110 shows the panel that is displayed.
CPPP6076 ---------------- ORDER DETAILS ( MD053718 ) -------- ROW 1 TO 6 OF 6 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Shipped PRODUCTS/FEATURES PRIM Cmds:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT OFile) LINE Cmds:(Fmids) S Product/Feature Name PGM# VERsion FMID# - ---------------------------------------- -------- ------- ----F C/C++ NO DEBUG 5647-A01 020500 8 COBL LB CMP DBG ENU 1.04.0 5668-958 010400 8 DFSMS DSS/HSM 5647-A01 020500 2 DFSORT 5647-A01 020500 8 z/OS BASE 5647-A01 020500 110 SDSF 5647-A01 020500 2 ***************************** Bottom of data *****************************

Figure 110. Panel: Shipped products/features

This panel shows the products, features, and elements in the order, including the individual program names and numbers, their versions, and the number of distinct FMIDs in each product or feature. The following primary commands are valid for this panel: ?, SET, Locate, Find, Next, Previous, SORT These are standard commands for panels that display lists. See Primary commands on page 11. OFILE This command, abbreviated as OF, writes a list of the products and features to a user-defined file (see page OFILE on page 187). The following line command is valid for this panel: F Displays the FMIDs for a product or feature. See Displaying the FMIDs for a product or feature.

Displaying the FMIDs for a product or feature

From the panel shown in Figure 110, you can view the FMIDs for a particular product or feature by entering line command F. Figure 111 on page 162 shows the panel that is displayed.

Chapter 13. Working with orders

161

CPPP6079 -------------- ORDER DETAILS ( MD053718 ) -------- Row 1 to 1 of 1 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Shipped FMIDs for PRODUCT/FEATURE C/C++ NO DEBUG Primary Commands: (? Find Next Previous) Line Commands: (NONE) FMID ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------HCKVB00 HLB4701 HLC4731 HTV4721 H24P111 JCKVB03 JLB4702 JTV4722 ***************************** Bottom of data *******************************

Figure 111. Panel: Shipped FMIDs for a product/feature

The following primary commands are valid for this panel: ?, Find, Next, Previous These are standard commands for panels that display lists. See Primary commands on page 11.

Requesting an order report

From the Order Information panel (Figure 108 on page 158), you can request that a report (order data; products, elements, and features; FMIDs) for an order be written to a data set by entering line command R. Figure 112 shows the panel that is displayed.
CPPP6077 -------------------- ORDER INFORMATION ----------------------------COMMAND ==> REPORT File Details Send REPORT to ISPF LIST Dataset ==> ? OR Enter Details of the Dataset to which the Report will be Written. Dataset Name ==> MD053718.PRINT DISPosition ==> NEW (NEW, MOD, OLD or SHR) (DSORG=PS,RECFM=FB,LRECL=80) (Y or N)

When Allocated NEW

Volume Serial ==> WORK14 (Default=SYSDA)

Figure 112. Panel: Specify a report data set

Specify a fully qualified data set name {without quotes} and volume serial for the output of the report data set. If the data set is a PDS, you must also specify a member name. Also, the output data set must have an LRECL of 80 bytes. Specify OLD SHR NEW the data sets allocation disposition as one of the following: An existing data set is to be used An existing data set is to be used A new data set is to be allocated and cataloged

162

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

MOD

If it exists, a sequential data set is to have the report appended to it. If it does not exist, a new sequential data set will be created and the report will be written to it.

If the specified data set already exists and you specified a disposition of NEW, or the data set name implies a change to the DSORG attribute (for example, the data set is DSORG=PS and you specify a member name), the data set is deleted and re-allocated. Here, you must confirm that the existing data set can be deleted by entering DELETE on the command line and pressing the Enter key. Or, you can use the END or RETURN keys to cancel the delete request. Also, you can also choose to browse the report when it is created.

Verifying the status of an order

Figure 113 shows the panel that is displayed when you attempt to change to the status of an order. This can occur, for example, if you edit the status field (see Editing an order on page 159) .
CPPP607C -------------------- ORDER INFORMATION ----------------------------COMMAND ==> STATUS CHANGE REQUESTED STATUS ATTRIBUTES Old Status : STARTED New Status : RECEIVED You MUST Confirm UPDATE By Typing STATUS and pressing ENTER Press the END or RETURN key to CANCEL the UPDATE request

Figure 113. Panel: Status verification

The normal status sequence is: v Received Started Installed You entered a status that will cause a jump in the normal status sequence. This is allowable, but you must confirm it by typing STATUS on the command line and pressing Enter. You can cancel the status change request by pressing End.

Chapter 13. Working with orders

163

164

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Appendix A. Primary command reference

BACKUP Purpose
When issued from a selected job in the Job Selection list panel the BACKUP command will save the content of that selected JOB in a new member of the backup library, SCPPBENU.

Syntax
BACKUP
BACKUP

Parameters
None.

Results
When the session ends, the new member is copied into the SCPPBENU data set.

Restrictions
1. The BACKUP command creates members only in the SCPPBENU library. You cannot use BACKUP to create members in other libraries. You can, however, use the ISPF Edit CREATE command to do so. 2. If the member already exists, the BACKUP command is rejected. To replace an existing backup member, use the REPLACE command.

Examples
To save the contents of the current edit session in a new member of the backup library, select the JOB from the Job Selection list panel and enter BACKUP. You will see message CREATE BACKUP DEFERRED. Once you end the session the new member is copied into the backup library, SCPPBENU.

CHANGE Purpose
CHANGE is a powerful command that you can use to make changes to many data sets at once. Using CHANGE is much faster than making changes to individual data sets in the dialog, so you should use it whenever possible to save time. The following syntax diagram shows the primary keywords for the CHANGE command. Each of these keywords is separately documented, along with their unique parameters, in the following sections.

165

CHANGE

Syntax
CHANGE
CHANGE CH DSNAME DSNAME *HLQ* DSNTYPE LVOL MCAT PVOL RENAME SECOND SMS SPACE

Parameters
DSNAME Renames one or more data sets. See CHANGE DSNAME on page 167 for details. DSNAME *HLQ* Changes the high level qualifier for one or more data sets. See CHANGE DSNAME *HLQ* on page 168 for details. DSNTYPE Allows changing between PDS and PDSE or HFS and zFS data sets. See CHANGE DSNTYPE on page 169 for details. LVOL Reassigns one or more data sets to a different logical volume. See CHANGE LVOL on page 171 for details. MCAT Overrides the dialogs requirement for one or more data sets to be defined in the systems master catalog. See CHANGE MCAT on page 171 for details. PVOL Reassigns one or more data sets to a different physical volume. See 173 for details. RENAME Overrides for one or more data sets the dialogs restriction on renaming the data set. See CHANGE RENAME on page 174 for details. SECOND Change secondary allocation of data sets with shipped value of 0. See CHANGE SECOND on page 175 for details. SMS Changes the SMS management status of one or more data sets. See CHANGE SMS on page 176 for details. SPACE Changes the space attributes for one or more data sets. See CHANGE SPACE on page 178 for details.

166

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CHANGE

Processing
The general procedure for using the CHANGE command is: 1. Decide which data sets you want to change 2. Pick a characteristic of those data sets for which you can display a list of desired data sets. You will probably want to pick a characteristic that eliminates as many unwanted data sets as possible. 3. Enter the desired CHANGE command on the resulting display list 4. Based on the parameters specified on the CHANGE command, the dialog checks the data sets in the current display list and returns a candidate list of data sets that are eligible to be changed by the command. At this point, changes are only simulated; no data sets have actually been changed. 5. Determine whether to: v Commit the changes as shown in the display (by pressing Enter or End) v Exclude particular data sets from the candidate list before committing the changes (by identifying the data sets to be excluded with the X line command and then pressing Enter or End), or v Cancel the change request (by entering the ISPF CANCEL command and pressing Enter). 6. Unless you cancel the change request, the CHANGE command will apply the specified change to all selected data sets (that is, all the data sets on the list that you did not exclude). Note: The CHANGE command may be abbreviated as CH.

CHANGE DSNAME Purpose

You can use the CHANGE DSNAME command to modify a string of characters in a data set name. Only data sets that are allowed to be renamed are displayed in the candidate list that results from a CHANGE DSNAME command. For information about unrenameable data sets, see the CHANGE RENAME command. The dialog checks the new data set name to ensure that it is a valid data set name and conforms to ServerPac standards.

Syntax
CHANGE DSNAME
CHANGE CH DSNAME DSN D source target

Parameters
source Specifies the character string to be replaced. target Specifies the new character string.

Appendix A. Primary command reference

167

CHANGE DSNAME

Restrictions
1. Only data sets that are allowed to be renamed are displayed in the candidate list that results from a CHANGE DSNAME command. Unrenameable data sets cannot be renamed unless you first override this attribute with the CHANGE RENAME command (see CHANGE RENAME on page 174). 2. For each order you install, choose unique names for the orders SMP/E data sets (those beginning with SMP*), for example, SMPPTS and SMPLTS. For the CSI data sets, IBM recommends that you choose names that are unique throughout your entire installation or enterprise, not merely within your driving systems environment. The CSI data sets include: v SMPE global CSI v SMPE target CSI v SMPE DLIB CSI

Examples
Use care in entering the CHANGE DSNAME command because it replaces all occurrences of the source string in the names of your data sets. For example, assume that you want to rename data set CBC.SCBCMOD1 to XXX.SCBCMOD1. If you enter the CHANGE DSNAME command as follows:
CH DSN CBC XXX

the resulting data set name is XXX.SXXXMOD1, which is probably not what you wanted. Here, to make the correct change, you must include the period (.) with the source string, as follows:
CH DSN CBC. XXX.

The resulting data set name is XXX.SCBCMOD1.

CHANGE DSNAME HLQ Purpose

You can use the CHANGE DSNAME *HLQ* command to change the high level qualifiers of renameable data sets. To change the high level qualifiers of data sets, enter the CHANGE DSNAME *HLQ* command from any data set list panel. From the resulting display, exclude any data sets that you do not want to change and press Enter. The high level qualifiers in the list are changed to the new high level qualifier.

Syntax
CHANGE DSNAME *HLQ*
CHANGE CH DSNAME DSN *HLQ* target

Parameters
target specifies the new high level qualifier of the data sets.

168

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CHANGE DSNAME HLQ

Restrictions
1. Only data sets that are allowed to be renamed are displayed in the candidate list that results from a CHANGE DSNAME *HLQ* command. Unrenameable data sets cannot be renamed unless you first override this attribute with the CHANGE RENAME command (see CHANGE RENAME on page 174). 2. If you change the high level qualifier of a data set, you might need to re-establish its catalog and SMS relationships.

Examples
Assume that in a data set list you have created, some data sets begin with JOAN.* and some begin with WAYNE.*. You can use one command to change all of these data sets to use the same high level qualifier (for example, JOHN.*) as follows:
CH DSN *HLQ* JOHN

The CHANGE DSN *HLQ* command also allows you to change single high level qualifiers to multiple high level qualifiers. For example, assume that you want to change all of the listed data sets to use the high level qualifiers SYS9.MARNA.*. To do so, display the desired data sets and enter the CHANGE DSN *HLQ* command, as follows:
CH DSN *HLQ* SYS9.MARNA

CHANGE DSNTYPE Purpose

You can use the CHANGE DSNTYPE command to convert your shipped orders data sets to a different format: v PDS data sets to PDSE data sets v PDSE data sets to PDS data sets (This can be done only for data sets that were originally PDS data sets) v HFS data sets to zFS data sets v zFS data sets to HFS data sets The main advantage of using a PDSE over a partitioned data set is that a PDSE uses DASD space more efficiently. The size of a PDS directory is fixed, regardless of the number of members in it, while the size of a PDSE directory is flexible and expands or contracts to fit the stored members. Also, PDSEs do not need to be compressed. PDSEs offer other functional benefits, too, such as the ability to store program objects or data. For a complete description of PDSEs and their restrictions, see z/OS DFSMS Using Data Sets, SC26-7410. A zFS data set is a VSAM Linear Data Set (LDS), which offers some performance and file sharing features not available in HFS. The dialog displays only those data sets that are allowed to be changed. The dialog does not, for example, allow you to change your orders PDSE data sets to PDS data sets, because they contain members that cannot be loaded into a PDS. You can change a PDSE data set to a PDS only if the PDSE was originally shipped as a PDS data set. You can use the dialogs View and Change Facility to display a list of data sets that can be changed. In View and Change, select Switchable and then select Yes to get the list.
Appendix A. Primary command reference

169

CHANGE DSNTYPE

Syntax
CHANGE DSNTYPE
CHANGE CH DSNTYPE TYPE T PDS PDSE PDSE PDS HFS ZFS ZFS HFS

Parameters
PDS PDSE specifies that PDS data sets should be converted to PDSE data sets. PDSE PDS specifies that PDSE data sets should be converted back to PDS data sets. HFS ZFS specifies that HFS data sets should be converted to ZFS data sets. ZFS HFS specifies that zFS data sets should be converted to HFS data sets.

Restrictions
1. The following system data sets cannot be converted to PDSE format: v SYS1.NUCLEUS v SYS1.SVCLIB v Data sets listed in the LPALSTxx member of parmlib v Data sets in the parmlib concatenation used for IPL. v Master JCL data sets, such as: Procedure libraries concatenated to IEFPDSI or IEFJOBS SYS1.UADS v DB2 DBRM data sets. 2. A data sets type cannot be changed if any of the following are true: v The data set was originally shipped as a PDSE v Record format (RECFM) is U v Logical volume is IPLVOL. 3. The dialog does not enforce all product requirements. You must determine whether data sets are allowed to be in a different format before changing them.

Examples
To change PDS data sets to PDSE data sets, enter the CHANGE DSNTYPE command as follows:
CH TYPE PDS PDSE

To change HFS data sets to zFS data sets, enter the CHANGE DSNTYPE command as follows:
CH TYPE HFS ZFS

170

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CHANGE LVOL Purpose

You can use the CHANGE LVOL command to reassign data sets to a different logical volume. The dialog displays only those data sets that are allowed to be reassigned. If you specify an existing logical volume for the target, the device attributes are inherited from the target. If you specify an undefined logical volume for the target, the device attributes are inherited from the source.

Syntax
CHANGE LVOL
CHANGE CH LVOL LV L source target

Parameters
source Specifies the logical volume to which the data sets are currently assigned. target Specifies the logical volume to which the data sets are to be re-assigned.

Restrictions
1. You cannot assign non-SMS-eligible data sets to logical volumes that are assigned to a storage class. 2. You cannot assign SMS-required data sets to logical volumes that are assigned to physical volumes. 3. The following logical volume names will be rejected if specified as either a source or target name: CSIVOL IPLVOL Reserved for the CSI data sets that are used to hold the DLIB and target zones for the ordered features and elements. Reserved for data sets that must reside on the IPL volume.

Examples
Assume that for all data sets in the current Display List, you want to change logical volume RES001 to RES999. Enter the following command:
CH L RES001 RES999

CHANGE MCAT Purpose

The installation dialog requires some data sets to be defined in the target systems master catalog. The CHANGE MCAT command can be used to override the dialogs requirements.
Appendix A. Primary command reference

171

CHANGE MCAT
Attention: This command has no effect on any operating system restrictions, so injudicious use of CHANGE MCAT might result in an unusable system. Note: A Master Catalog attribute of No just means that the dialog does not require that data set to be defined in the target systems master catalog. It will not prevent you from doing so.

Syntax
CHANGE MCAT
CHANGE CH MCAT N Y

Parameters
N Y Override the master catalog requirement for selected data sets Restore the master catalog requirement for selected overridden data sets

Restrictions
You cannot change data sets having a Master Catalog attribute of No, unless they were originally shipped with an attribute of No.

Examples
To override the master catalog requirement for data sets in your configuration, do the following: v Use the dialogs View and Change Facility to display data sets with a Master Catalog attribute of Yes. v From the list of master catalog data sets, enter the CHANGE MCAT command as follows:
CH MCAT N

v Exclude any data sets that you do not want to change (through line command X) and press Enter. v Press Enter or End to refresh the display. The overridden data sets are removed from the list. To view the overridden data sets in your configuration, return to the selection list for master catalog data sets and display data sets having a Master Catalog attribute of Overridden. To reverse the preceding action, display the data sets having a Master Catalog value of Overridden. Then, enter the CHANGE MCAT command as follows:
CH MCAT Y

After excluding any data sets that you do not want to change, and press Enter. Then, press Exit to refresh the display. The changed data sets are removed from the list.

172

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CHANGE PVOL Purpose

You can use the CHANGE PVOL command to reassign data sets to a different DASD volume. If the volume serial you enter is known to the dialog, the data sets are assigned to it. If there is enough space remaining on the volume for the data sets, no other actions are needed. If the volume serial that you enter is not known to the dialog, then: v If DYNAMIC DASD INFO is set to Yes (the default), the dialog tries to dynamically retrieve the physical attributes of the device. If this is successful, the Global Change Candidate List panel (CPPP6050) is displayed. If the dialog cannot dynamically retrieve the device information, but the dialog expects the device to be offline, the dialog accepts the input on the command and displays the Global Change Candidate List panel. The dialog will not require the volume to be online, but will recheck volume availability during some operations and, if the volume has become available, it will verify the volumes attributes and correct them, if necessary. If the dialog does not expect the device to be offline, then you must either press the Enter key to tell the dialog that the device is expected to be offline and to accept the input and display the Global Change Candidate List panel, or press the End key to discard the input and cancel the command. v If DYNAMIC DASD INFO is set to No, the device type is set to 3390-3 and the device number is set to CCUU.

Syntax
CHANGE PVOL
CHANGE CH PVOL DLIB OPERATIONAL TARGET volume_serial

Parameters
DLIB Specifies that distribution library data sets are to be reassigned. DLIB can be abbreviated as D. OPERATIONAL Specifies that operational data sets are to be reassigned. OPERATIONAL can be abbreviated as O or OP. TARGET Specifies that target library data sets are to be reassigned. TARGET can be abbreviated as T or TARG. volume_serial Specifies the physical volume to which the data sets are to be reassigned.

Appendix A. Primary command reference

173

CHANGE PVOL

Restrictions
You cannot use this command to reassign SMS-managed data sets or data sets that must reside on the IPL volume.

Examples
To assign operational data sets to volume_serial OPRVOL, enter:
CH PVOL OPERATIONAL OPRVOL

CHANGE RENAME Purpose

The installation dialog marks some data sets as being unrenameable to prevent them from being renamed by a CHANGE DSNAME command. Only data sets that are allowed to be renamed are displayed in the candidate list for a CHANGE DSNAME command. You can use the CHANGE RENAME command to override the dialogs settings to make such data sets renameable. Data sets that normally cannot be renamed include the following: v CSSLIB v LINKLIB v LPALIB v MIGLIB v NUCLEUS v PROCLIB v SVCLIB Attention: This command has no effect on any data set naming requirements that might be imposed by the operating system or by a product, so injudicious use of CHANGE RENAME might result in an unusable system.

Syntax
CHANGE RENAME
CHANGE CH RENAME Y N

Parameters
Y N Override the unrenameable attribute for selected data sets Restore the unrenameable attribute for selected overridden data sets

Restrictions
Unlike other changes you make to data sets, the dialog does not preserve the overridden value when you later save the configuration for use with future orders.

174

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CHANGE RENAME

Examples
To make selected data sets renameable, enter the dialogs View and Change Facility and display the data sets in the configuration with a renameable attribute of NO. From any data set list, enter the CHANGE RENAME command, as follows:
CH RENAME Y

Then, exclude any data sets that you do not want to rename and press Enter. The data sets that you did not exclude will have their renameable attribute changed to Overridden. When the data set display is updated, the data sets whose renameable attribute you overrode will no longer be displayed (because they no longer match the original display criteria). If did not exclude any data sets, this will result in an empty display list. To reverse the preceding action, display only the data sets having a renameable attribute value of overridden. Then, enter the CHANGE RENAME command as follows:
CH RENAME N

If you issued a CHANGE DSNAME or CHANGE DSNAME *HLQ* command and did not find a data set you wanted on the candidate list, it might be because the desired data set was not renameable. In this case, you could: 1. Return to the original data set list (from the change candidate list for CHANGE DSNAME) 2. Issue CHANGE RENAME Y to get a new change candidate list 3. Select the desired data set (by excluding the others) and press Enter 4. Return to the original data set list (from the change candidate list for CHANGE RENAME) 5. Reissue the original CHANGE DSNAME or CHANGE DSNAME *HLQ* command.

CHANGE SECOND Purpose

ServerPac ships the link list data sets with no secondary space allocations. The CHange SECOND command allows you to override this and allocate secondary space for these data sets. Only the data sets in the list that were originally shipped with no secondary are eligible to have secondary space allocation changed. This command has no effect on data sets with shipped secondaries. For instance, if you use the CHange SECOND Y command to allocate secondary spaces for data set that were shipped with no secondary space, you can subsequently use the CHange SECOND N command to restore the no secondary attribute. You cannot, however, use this CHange SECOND N command to restore the no secondary attribute for data sets that were shipped with secondary space allocated. You can eXclude data sets from this list.

Appendix A. Primary command reference

175

CHANGE SECOND

Syntax
CHANGE SECOND
CHANGE CH SECOND Y N

Parameters
Y Override the no secondary attribute for selected data sets. When you issue the CH SECOND Y command, secondary space is set to a value that is 10% of the primary for the selected data sets shipped with no secondary space. Restore the no secondary attribute for selected overridden data sets.

Restrictions
You can only use these commands with data set that were shipped with no secondary space allocated.

Examples
To override the no secondary attribute for a data set, enter the CHange SECOND command, as follows:
CH SECOND Y

Then, exclude any data sets for which you do not want to change the secondary space attribute and press Enter. To reverse the preceding action, display only the data sets having a secondary space attribute value of overridden. Then, enter the CHANGE SECOND command as follows:
CH SECOND N

CHANGE SMS Purpose

You can use the CHANGE SMS command to change the SMS management status of data sets in your work configuration. As of the time this book was written, orders shipped from IBM contain no SMS-managed data sets. In most cases, however, the dialog allows you to modify the SMS status of a particular data set to indicate that SMS is to manage the data set. Use valid SMS storage classes for any data sets that you assign to SMS management, and ensure that these classes are defined before running installation jobs that allocate SMS-managed data sets. For information on assigning SMS storage classes, see Changing an SMS storage class on page 122. Also, when you later examine the installation jobs, ensure that the SMS attributes assigned by the installation jobs are acceptable and will allow the system to be used if you plan to IPL it.

176

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CHANGE SMS
If you use SMS to manage the data sets in your order configuration, the userid that you later use to submit the installation jobs requires at least READ access to the FACILITY class profile for STGADMIN.IGG.DIRCAT. To see which data sets in your configuration are eligible for SMS-management, use the dialogs View and Change Facility.

Syntax
CHANGE SMS
CHANGE CH SMS YES NO

Parameters
YES Adds unmanaged data sets to SMS management. YES can be abbreviated as Y and is accepted in any combination of uppercase and lowercase letters. NO Removes from SMS management any data sets in the candidate list that are currently managed by SMS. NO can be abbreviated as N and is accepted in any combination of uppercase and lowercase letters.

Restrictions
1. You cannot assign data sets that reside on the IPLVOL logical volume to SMS-managed logical volumes. 2. You cannot use the dialog to assign catalogs to SMS management. To use SMS to manage your catalogs, you must do one of the following: v Modify the ServerPac installation jobs to allocate SMS-managed catalogs v Use pre-allocated SMS-managed catalogs v Have your ACS routines redirect the allocation of the catalogs to SMS-managed volumes. 3. Be aware that the dialog allows you to change the SMS status for all eligible data sets, regardless of whether such changes make the best sense for your particular installation. Therefore, it is important that you carefully consider the consequences of using SMS to manage your target data sets and operational data sets, such as the following: v For a full system replacement, SMS-managed data sets on your driving system are not easily accessible from the target system before you run the CATCVTM and CATCONV installation jobs. These jobs are described in ServerPac: Installing Your Order. v SMS-managed data sets on your target system are not easily accessible from the driving system after you run the DELDSN and DELSSA clean-up jobs. These jobs are described in ServerPac: Installing Your Order. v When you re-assign a data set to SMS management, the dialog does not automatically remove the VOLUME parameter from JCL in all the jobs that allocate or locate the data set. Depending on your SMS configuration, you might have to remove the VOLUME parameter from jobs that allocate or locate SMS-managed data sets.

Appendix A. Primary command reference

177

CHANGE SMS

Examples
To add unmanaged data sets to SMS management, enter the CHANGE SMS command, as follows:
CH SMS Y

This command activates SMS management for any data sets in the candidate list that are not already managed by SMS. To remove data sets from SMS management, enter the CHANGE SMS command, as follows:
CH SMS N

This command removes from SMS management any data sets in the candidate list that are currently managed by SMS.

CHANGE SPACE Purpose

You can use the CHANGE SPACE command to change the following values for data sets: v Amount of primary space v Amount of secondary space v Number of directory blocks needed (only for partitioned data sets).

Syntax
CHANGE SPACE
CHANGE CH SPACE SP S primary *

secondary *

dirblocks

Parameters
primary Specifies the percentage by which to increase or decrease the current primary space value. The following values are valid: v To increase the space, specify an integer from +1 through +100 (the prefixed plus sign is optional). v To decrease the space, specify an integer from 1 through 50 (the prefixed minus sign is required). v To leave the primary space unchanged while changing other space values, specify an asterisk (*). secondary Specifies the percentage by which to increase or decrease the current secondary space value, or specifies a fixed percentage of primary space on which to base the amount of secondary space. The following values are valid: v To increase the space, specify an integer from +1 through +100 (the prefixed plus sign is optional).

178

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CHANGE SPACE
v To decrease the space, specify an integer from 1 through 50 (the prefixed minus sign is required). v To define the amount of secondary space as a percentage of primary space, specify an integer from P0 through P100 (the prefixed P is required). This amount is based on the current primary space value and will not be recalculated if the primary space is later changed. v To set secondary space to zero, specify P0. v To leave the secondary space unchanged while changing other space values, specify an asterisk (*). IBM recommends increasing the primary space allocation when you use P0. dirblocks Specifies the percentage by which to increase or decrease the current number of directory blocks. The following values are valid: v To increase the space, specify an integer from +1 through +100 (the prefixed plus sign is optional). v To decrease the space, specify an integer from 1 through 50 (the prefixed minus sign is required).

Restrictions
1. For IBM-supplied data sets, you cannot decrease the primary space allocation to less than the original, shipped amount. If you attempt to do so, the dialog uses the shipped amount instead. 2. For user-defined data sets, you cannot decrease the primary space allocation to less than it was when you first defined it. You can increase the amount, but you cannot reduce it unless you delete the data set and redefine it with a smaller space allocation. 3. If the shipped secondary space allocation for a data set is zero, it means that secondary space is not allowed for the data set. This allocation must remain at zero. 4. You cannot decrease the number of directory blocks for a data set to a value that is less than its original, shipped value. If you attempt to do so, the dialog uses the shipped value instead.

Examples
To increase primary space 25 percent, enter:
CH S 25 (or CH S +25 )

To increase the secondary space by 20 percent, enter:

CH S * 20 (or CH S * +20)

To remove the secondary space altogether (for example, for link list eligible data sets), enter the following command:
CH S * P0

Assume that for all data sets in the current display list, you want to increase the number of directory blocks by 40 percent. Enter the following command:
CH S * * 40

Assume that for all data sets in the current display list, you want to increase the primary space by 20 percent and the secondary space by 50 percent. Enter the following command:
Appendix A. Primary command reference

179

CHANGE SPACE
CH S 20 50 (or CH S +20 +50)

Assume that for all data sets in the current display list, you want to decrease the primary space by 10 percent and increase the secondary space by 25 percent. Enter the following command:
CH SPACE 10 25 (or CH S 10 +25)

Assume that for all data sets in the current display list, you want to decrease the primary space by 15 percent and set the secondary space to 40 percent of the primary space amount. Enter the following command:
CH SP -15 P40

Assume that for all data sets in the current display list, you want to set the secondary space to 30 percent of the primary space amount. Enter the following command:
CH S * P30

CREATE Purpose
Use the CREATE command on the Select Configuration panel (described in Creating the configuration on page 44) to create a new work configuration from the shipped configuration and any desired saved configurations. The CREATE command processing merges eligible UNIX file system data sets in the shipped configuration when they were merged in a saved configuration and you selected that saved configuration to be merged with the shipped configuration.

Syntax
CREATE
CREATE CR

Parameters
None for the CREATE command itself. You can, however, use the Select line command to identify the desired saved configurations that the CREATE command is to use when creating the new configuration.

Restrictions
Saved configuration selection is restricted to those created in the current release or up to three prior releases. For example, if your shipped configuration was created in Dialog Level 18, you can merge it with a saved configuration created in Dialog Level 15, 16, 17, or 18, but you can not merge it with a saved configuration from Dialog Level 14.

Results
The Select Configuration panel (shown in Figure 30 on page 45) is displayed with the message Work Configuration Created if the configuration was successfully created.

180

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

FIND Purpose
The FIND command searches the field specified on the SET command for a character string that matches a specified string. FIND searches from the top of the panel to the bottom. There are two steps to using the FIND command: 1. Enter SET with the desired field. 2. Enter FIND with the desired character string.

Syntax
FIND
FIND F string

Parameters
string specifies the character string to be found. Notes: 1. FIND is not case sensitive; both string and the field contents are treated as uppercase characters. For example, FIND treats SERV as a match for serv. 2. string can begin in any character position of the field; it can be imbedded in the field. For example, FIND treats SER as a match for SERV. 3. FIND has only one comparison operator, EQ, which is also the default.

Results
The FIND command searches the field specified on the SET command for a character string that matches the specified string. FIND searches from the top of the panel to the bottom. If a match is found, the panel entry that contains string is displayed at the top of the scrollable area.

Examples
1. To search the Customer Name field for FINANCIAL, enter the following:
SET CUST F FINANCIAL

2. If the string contains blanks, enclose it your search argument in quotation marks. For example, the following is a search for AND SHIP.
SET CUST F and Ship

FINDCOMP Purpose
If you forget where a particular data set is after you merge it, you can use the FINDCOMP (Find Component) primary command on the Select Values to Display
Appendix A. Primary command reference

181

FINDCOMP
panel to find it among your merged data sets. The FINDCOMP command allows you to search for a data set by either its shipped name or its new name if you renamed the data set during a subsequent phase of the installation. If you specify a data set that is not a component of a merged data set, the dialog displays the message component not found.

Syntax
FINDCOMP
FINDCOMP FC dsname

Parameters
dsname Specifies the name of the data set that you want to find. To search on a fully qualified data set name, enter the complete name of the data set. The dialog displays the name of the merged data set that contains the specified data set. To search on a partially qualified data set name, enter the first few characters of the data set name and a wildcard (*). The dialog displays a pop-up list of data sets the Data Set Selection List that match the specified argument.

Examples
For example, entering
FC SYS1.M*

results in a list of all component data sets beginning with SYS1.M, allowing you to select the desired data set with line command S to obtain the name of the merged data set.

GENSKEL Purpose
Use the GENSKEL command to tailor all of the installation jobs at one time in the background (rather than individually in the foreground). GENSKEL saves you time during installation and frees your TSO/E session for other tasks while the jobs are being tailored. When GENSKEL completes, the dialog saves the jobs in a backup data set. You can then review and submit jobs from the backup data set. For more information, see Using GENSKEL to generate the installation jobs on page 145.

182

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

GENSKEL

Syntax
GENSKEL
GENSKEL GEN

Parameters
None. You supply information needed for the job generation on panels displayed by GENSKEL.

Results
GENSKEL generates the installation jobs for your order and stores them in the SCPPBENU data set.

Examples
Enter GENSKEL to display the panels used to generate the installation jobs.

HELP Purpose
The HELP command invokes the dynamic help, if available, for the current panel.

Syntax
HELP
HELP ?

Parameters
None.

Results
Invokes the dynamic help facility for the current dialog functions (if available).

Examples
If you want more information about the current dialog function, enter ? to invoke the dynamic help facility.

Appendix A. Primary command reference

183

LOCATE Purpose
The LOCATE command searches the field specified on the SET command for a character string that satisfies the comparison operator. LOCATE searches from the top of the panel to the bottom. There are two steps to using the LOCATE command: 1. Enter SET with the desired field. 2. Enter LOCATE with the desired character string and (optionally) the desired comparison operator.

Syntax
LOCATE
EQ LOCATE L string GE GT LE LT NE

Parameters
string specifies the character string to be located. Notes: 1. The locate command is case sensitive. For example, SERV does not match serv. 2. You cannot use LOCATE to find substrings of larger strings. That is, LOCATE does not treat SER as a match for SERV. comparison operator The optional comparison operator can be any of the following: Operator EQ GE GT NE LE LT Meaning Equal to. EQ is the default value. Greater than or equal to Greater than Not equal to Less than or equal to Less than

Results
The LOCATE command searches the field specified on the SET command for a character string that satisfies the comparison operator. LOCATE searches from the top of the panel to the bottom. If a match is found, the panel entry that contains string is displayed at the top of the scrollable area.

184

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

LOCATE

Examples
1. The following example searches the Package Type field for a character string that matches SERV.
SET P L SERV

2. The following example searches the SREL field for any character string that does not match Z038.
SET SR L Z038 NE

3. To search for a string that contains blanks, enclose the search argument in quotation marks. For example, to search the Customer Name field for legal services, enter the following:
SET CUST L legal services

MERGE Purpose
Use the MERGE command to merge eligible selected data sets with the merge target data set you selected on a list data set panel. You can also use the MERGE command to merge eligible selected UNIX file system data sets with the merge target UNIX file system data set you selected on a list of data set panel. MERGE is a two step process: 1. Use the line Merge command from a Data Set List panel such as CPPP605U (Figure 65 on page 97) to select the merge target data set. 2. Select one or more file system data sets from the Data Set Merge Candidates panel such as CPPP605M (Figure 68 on page 103) or CPPP605V (Figure 69 on page 105) to be merged with the target data set, type the primary MERGE command on the panel command line, and press Enter.

Syntax
MERGE
MERGE M

Parameters
None. You select the data set(s) to be merged with the target data set from the merge data set candidate list provided.

Restrictions
These restrictions apply only to merging UNIX file system data sets. Any eligible file system data set is allowed to be a merge target data set. UNIX file system data sets are eligible to be merge component data sets when the merge target data set is either an HFS or zFS data set and the following criteria are met: v The merge allowed flag is set to Y in the logical volume table for the data set v The data set is one of the following:
Appendix A. Primary command reference

185

MERGE
The same data set type as the merge target An HFS or zFS data set that is marked as switchable, or The merge target data set has a lower-level mount point.

Results
Eligible selected data sets are merged with the target data set.

Examples
1. A configuration contains the following three UNIX file system data sets at the specified mount points: File system data set Mount point OMVS.A /usr/lpp/a OMVS.AB /usr/lpp/a/b OMVS.ABC /usr/lpp/a/b/c If you select OMVS.A as the merge target on panel CPPP605U, OMVS.AB and OMVS.ABC are displayed as candidates on panel CPPP605V. You can select either OMVS.AB, or both OMVS.AB and OMVS.ABC as valid merge candidates. You cannot, however, select OMVS.ABC as the sole merge candidate because OMVS.AB has an intermediate mount point between OMVS.ABC and the merge target. If you select OMVS.AB as the merge target on panel CPPP605U, OMVS.ABC is displayed as the only merge candidate on panel CPPP605V and is the only valid selection. 2. A configuration contains the following three data sets: v sys1.data v sys1.abcd v sys1.efgh If you select data set sys1.data as the merge target on panel CPPP605U (Figure 65 on page 97), sys1.abcd and sys1.efgh are displayed as eligible merge candidates on panel CPPP605M (Figure 68 on page 103). You can select either or both of the data sets listed using the Select command. Once you have made your selection, enter the primary Merge command to merge the data sets.

NEXT Purpose
Use the NEXT command to repeat the last FIND or LOCATE command, searching forward.

Syntax
NEXT
NEXT N

186

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Parameters
None.

Results
If a match is found, the panel entry that contains the character string is displayed at the top of the scrollable area

Examples
If you had previously entered the following commands:
SET SR L Z038 NE

Then NEXT would search forward in the SREL field for any character string that does not match Z038.

OFILE Purpose
The OFILE command writes the currently displayed data set list to a user-defined file. There are three steps to using the OFILE command: 1. Enter OFILE with the OPEN keyword to dynamically allocate the user file and open it 2. Enter OFILE without any keywords to send the list of data sets to the file. 3. Enter OFILE with the CLOSE keyword to close the file and free the dynamic allocation.

Syntax
OFILE
OFILE OF OPEN dsname

OLD MOD NEW SHR

Parameters
dsname is a fully-qualified data set name (enclosed in single quotation marks). If you do not enclose the data set name in quotes, your TSO/E PROFILE PREFIX is used as the high level qualifier. CLOSE Specifies that the data set identified by dsname is to be closed and to free the dynamic allocation. CLOSE can be abbreviated as C. OPEN Specifies that the data set identified by dsname is to be dynamically allocated and opened for output by the OFILE command.
Appendix A. Primary command reference

187

OFILE
OLD Specifies that the data set identified by dsname is an existing data set that is to be overwritten with the new data set list. OLD is the default. MOD Specifies that the data set identified by dsname is either an existing data set, to which the new data set list is to be appended, or a new data set, to which the list will be written. NEW Specifies that the data set identified by dsname is a new data set, which will be allocated and cataloged. SHR Specifies that the data set identified by dsname is an existing data set that is to be overwritten with the new data set list.

Results
The output data sets written by OFILE are in fixed block (FB) format with a record length (LRECL) of 120 bytes. The record format is as follows:
Columns 144 45 46 4750 5154 5559 6064 6570 7178 7982 8390 9198 99102 103120 Field size 44 01 01 04 04 05 05 06 08 04 08 08 04 18 Description Data set name Data set merged flag Data set changed flag Record format (RECFM) Data set organization (DSORG) Logical record length (LRECL) Reserved for IBM use Logical volume Physical volume or SMS storage class Device number Generic or esoteric unit name Device type Space required (in cylinders) Reserved for IBM use

When the OFILE command is issued from panel CPPP6071, however, the output data set is written in (VB) format with a LRECL of 7086.

Examples
Here are the three steps required to send the list of data sets to a new file: 1. Enter OFILE OPEN MY.OFILE.TEXT NEW to open a new file MY.OFILE.TEXT. 2. Enter OFILE without any keywords to send the list of data sets to MY.OFILE.TEXT. 3. Enter OFILE CLOSE to close and free MY.OFILE.TEXT.

188

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

OLIST Purpose
This command, abbreviated as OL, writes the list of data sets to the ISPF LIST data set. For more information about ISPF LIST data sets, see z/OS ISPF Users Guide Vol I.

Syntax
OLIST
OLIST OL

Parameters
None.

Results
Same as OFILE output.

Examples
Enter OLIST to write the list of data sets to the ISPF LIST data set.

PREVIOUS Purpose
Use the PREVIOUS command to repeat the last FIND or LOCATE command, searching backwards.

Syntax
PREVIOUS
PREVIOUS P

Parameters
None.

Results
If a match is found, the panel entry that contains the character string is displayed at the top of the scrollable area

Appendix A. Primary command reference

189

Examples
If you had previously entered the following commands:
SET SR L Z038 NE

Then PREVIOUS would search backwards in the SREL field for any character string that does not match Z038.

REPLACE Purpose
When issued from a selected job in the Job Selection list panel, the REPLACE command saves the contents of the selected JOB into an existing member of the backup library, SCPPBENU.

Syntax
REPLACE
REPLACE

Parameters
None.

Results
When the session ends, the member is replaced into the SCPPBENU data set.

Restrictions
The REPLACE command replaces members in the SCPPBENU library only. You can, however, use the ISPF Edit CREATE command to create members in other libraries.

Examples
To save the contents of the current edit session into an existing member of the backup library, select the JOB from the Job Selection list panel and enter REPLACE. The message REPLACE BACKUP DEFERRED appears. When the session ends, the new member is replaced in the backup library, SCPPBENU.

SET Purpose
The SET command specifies the field to be acted on by the FIND and LOCATE primary commands. The SET command is not available on some panels.

190

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

SET

Syntax
SET
SET setto_ field

Parameters
setto_ field specifies the column heading or synonym for the field to which the FIND and LOCATE primary commands are to apply. The available setto_ fields vary from panel to panel. Note: Some column headings have synonyms that you can use with the SET command. Synonyms are identified in uppercase letters in the column heading. See Examples for an example of using synonyms with the SET command.

Results
The column heading for the current SET field is displayed in turquoise. Subsequent FIND and LOCATE commands will operate on the current SET field.

Examples
Enter SET OID if you want the FIND command to find an order number on the panel.

SORT Purpose
For panels with sortable fields, the SORT command specifies the field by which the display should be sorted and, optionally, whether the sorted field should be displayed in ascending or descending order.

Syntax
SORT
SORT sort field A D

Parameters
sort field specifies the column heading or synonym for the field by which the display is to be sorted. The available sort fields vary from panel to panel.

Appendix A. Primary command reference

191

SORT
Note: Some column headings have synonyms that you can use with the SORT command. Synonyms are identified in uppercase letters in the column heading. See Examples for an example of using synonyms with the SORT command. A or D specifies the order in which the specified field is to be sorted: A Sort the display by the specified field in ascending order D Sort the display by the specified field in descending order Notes: 1. If neither A nor D are specified, the display will be sorted using the sequence that was pre-programmed for the specified field. 2. Usually, the Date field is pre-programmed so that the most recent date is shown first, with earlier dates following in descending order.

Results
The SORT command sorts the display by the specified field in ascending or descending order. The column heading for the current SORT field is displayed in yellow.

Examples
Suppose you want to sort the panel shown in Figure 114 by customer name in ascending order.
CustomPac ----------- Sample Panel Display MODE(TE) ------- ROW 1 TO 12 OF 99 COMMAND ==> SCROLL ==> PAGE Primary Commands:(? SET Locate Find Next Previous SORT VErbose) Line Commands:(Browse Delete Edit Select) S Order ID - -------MD010001 MD010022 MD010023 MD010032 MD010048 MD010057 MD010059 MD010068 MD010069 MD010070 MD010083 MD010101 Pack ---SERV CRS SERV EXPDD SERV EXPDD SERV SERV SERV CPP CPP CPP SREL ---Z038 C150 Z038 Z038 Z038 Z038 Z038 Z038 C150 Z038 Z038 Z038 CUSTomer ---------------------------------HERMANS ASSURANCE, LTD. EELLS ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN T. HOOD USABILITY, INC. LAMASTRO CONTAINERS AND SHIPPING DAYNE-TRONICS ESMAT TECHNICAL SUPPORT EELLS ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN HARRIGAN MANAGEMENT CORP. WALLE BUILDING AND SUPPLY CO. B-MAZURIK FINANCIAL SERVICES CORNELL LEGAL SERVICES LANDER OBRIEN PARTNERSHIP STatus -----R R F R R R R R A R F I

Figure 114. Sample panel for SORT example

To do this, enter the following:

SORT CUST A

where CUST is the synonym for the Customer field and A specifies ascending order. Likewise, you could sort this panel by the Order ID field in descending order with this command:
SORT OID D

192

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

SUMP Purpose
Use the SUMP command to displays the Summary of Physical Volumes panel, which lists the physical volumes that are referred to by your system. Use this panel to change device numbers and device types. This panel is described in Displaying a summary of physical volumes on page 118.

Syntax
SUMP
SUMP

Parameters
None.

Results
The Summary of Physical Volumes panel is displayed.

TERSE Purpose
Use the TERSE command to display the panel with only one line of information for each item. Terse display mode remains active until you enter a VERBOSE command. TERSE is valid only for panels that have both a terse and verbose mode.

Syntax
TERSE
TERSE TE

Parameters
None.

Results
The panel is displayed with only one line of information for each item.

Examples
See Figure 3 on page 10 and Figure 4 on page 10 for examples of a panel in terse and verbose mode.

Appendix A. Primary command reference

193

VERBOSE Purpose
Use the VERBOSE command to display the panel with multiple lines of information for each item. Verbose display mode remains active until you enter a TERSE command. VERBOSE is valid only for panels that have both a terse and verbose mode.

Syntax
VERBOSE
VERBOSE VE

Parameters
None.

Results
The panel is displayed with more than one line of information for each item.

Examples
See Figure 3 on page 10 and Figure 4 on page 10 for examples of a panel in terse and verbose mode.

194

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

This appendix describes the CustomPac installation dialog messages. The message number has the following format: v Program prefix (CPP) v Four-digit CustomPac program number v Three-digit message number within the specific program v Severity I Information W Warning E Error S Severe error
CPP0149009S Allocation failed for dataset dsname Explanation: The dialog could not allocate data set dsname. The data sets volume is offline or no default volume/unit setup has been defined for the system on which the dialog is running. System programmer response: Manually preallocate the data set or vary the volume online. CPP0149117S RC from LISTDSI=17, System or user abend occurred. Explanation: The dialog encountered an internal error when you attempted to save the create configuration report output. As a result, the system did not save your report configuration data. System programmer response: Check your orders work configuration for a LOG report data set from a previous order. If an older LOG report data set exists, delete the data set and retry the operation. If this problem persists, contact IBM Support for assistance. CPP0601001E Configuration is INCOMPLETE or CORRUPTED Explanation: You requested that a merged configuration be created, but the saved configuration SCPPTENU library does not contain all of the tables needed for a full saved configuration, or the library is corrupted. The library is missing one or more of the following members: v CPPDEVT v CPPITBL v CPPVTBL System programmer response: If the work configuration that you used to create the saved configuration is still available, do the following: 1. Ensure that the orders status is S (started). If not, change the orders status to S on panel CPPP6074 (entered by using line command E from CPPP6071, after getting the list by selecting Option O (orders) on CPPPOLI). 2. Resave the order. 3. Use the newly-saved configuration for the merge. CPP0601002E In addition to the MASTER configuration, ONLY ONE Saved Configuration is allowed for MERGE, De-Select those not required Explanation: You selected more than one saved configuration to be merged with the shipped order configuration, which is not allowed. System programmer response: Select only one saved configuration to be merged with the order. CPP0601003I Config Request CANCELLED Explanation: You requested that the configuration is to be created, however one or both of the following conditions exist: v A configuration already exists. v You attempted to create a merged configuration. These conditions required confirmation, which was refused. System action: The configuration was not created. System programmer response: None. CPP0601004I WORK Configuration Created Explanation: The orders work configuration has been created successfully. System programmer response: None. CPP0601005E Data set NOT Allocated dsname, sys-msg Explanation: You attempted to create a merged configuration, however the saved or master configuration library could not be allocated.

195

System programmer response: Determine why the library (dsname) was not allocated. See message sys-msg. If the data set has been deleted, restore it from your system backups. CPP0601006I Report output has been saved in data set dsname Explanation: You used the SAVE command to save the output of the Create Configuration process in the specified data set, dsname. System programmer response: None. CPP0601007E A JES element must be selected for its zones to be merged. Explanation: You specified that a JES elements SMP/E zones were to be merged with the BCP zones, but you did not select the JES element for installation. You must select the JES element for installation if you plan to merge its zones. System action: None. System programmer response: Do either of the following: v If you want to install the JES element, select it for installation and determine whether to merge its zones with the BCP zones. v If you do not want to install the JES element, do not choose the option to merge its zones. For considerations about merging JES zones, see Selecting a JES for the configuration on page 43. CPP0601008E Select a merge option for JESn. Explanation: You selected a JES element for installation, but did not specify whether its SMP/E zones were to be merged with the BCP zones. System programmer response: Specify Y or N to indicate whether the selected JES elements zones are to be merged with the BCP zones. For considerations about merging JES zones, see Selecting a JES for the configuration on page 43. CPP0601009E Configuration selected for merge is not supported. Explanation: You chose a saved configuration from a level of the dialog that is no longer supported. Only configurations saved within three releases of the current dialog are supported. System action: Saved configuration is not selected. System programmer response: Do either of the following: v Select a supported level of a saved configuration.

v Choose to base the new configuration on the shipped configuration only. CPP0602001E NOT a Valid Catalog Data Set Name Explanation: You entered a catalog data set name that is not valid. System programmer response: Correct the catalog data set name. CPP0602002S Catalog information for at least one entry is INVALID or NOT DEFINED Explanation: At least one alias is associated with an invalid catalog data set name or the catalog data set name has not yet been defined. System programmer response: Enter a valid catalog data set name for all aliases. CPP0602003I Changes to the TABLE have been SAVED Explanation: Your changes to the orders alias-to-catalog relationships have been saved. System programmer response: None. CPP0602004I Processing CANCELLED by User <changes> Explanation: You entered the CANCEL command; your changes to the orders alias-to-catalog relationships were discarded. <changes> might show more information, such as the message: CHANGES TO THE TABLE WERE NOT SAVED. System programmer response: None. CPP0602005E DELETE Request Refused, This Alias Is NOT USER DEFINED, It is Needed By CustomPac to Install Your Package Explanation: You attempted to delete an HLQ that was not user-defined in the alias option. You can delete only user-defined aliases. System programmer response: To get rid of a shipped HLQ, you must use Modify System Layout to rename all the data sets that use it. CPP0602006W Catalog Connection FORCED to MCAT, Either Alias MUST be in Master Catalog or Master Catalog DSNAME Specified Explanation: The catalog data set name you specified is the master catalogs data set name. Or, one or more data sets named using this high-level qualifier must be

196

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

cataloged in the master catalog. All of the data sets beginning with this high-level qualifier will be cataloged in the master catalog. CPP0602007I Changes to the Alias-to-Catalog Relationships REQUIRE you to Re-evaluate your SSA to Catalog Relationships Explanation: Changes that you have made to the orders alias-to-catalog relationships require you to synchronize your changes with the SSA-to-catalog relationships. System programmer response: Repeat the Define SSA-to-Catalog Relationships function. CPP0602008E Only ONE Master Catalog Can be Defined Explanation: You have already defined a data set name for the master catalog. You cannot have a master catalog with more than one catalog data set name. System programmer response: If you wish to use a different catalog data set name for the master catalog, enter line command N for the catalog data set name that is marked as the master catalog. Then, enter line command M for the correct catalog data set name to mark it as the master catalog. CPP0602009E Command option is INVALID for this Alias Explanation: You entered a line command, where option is M or N as follows: v M - Mark master catalog v N - Unmark master catalog. However, the catalog target for the selected alias would conflict with what is expected by CustomPac. You cannot change this entry because the installation dialog requires it to be in the master catalog. System programmer response: Review your change request. CPP0602010E You Cannot Change the Catalog Name for this Line Command Explanation: You entered a line command and also changed the catalog data set name, which caused a command conflict. The original catalog data set name has been retained. System programmer response: Enter the line command with the catalog data set name unchanged.

CPP0603002S SSA Information for at least one entry is INVALID or NOT DEFINED Explanation: At least one catalog data set name has not yet been associated with an SSA (system specific alias), or the catalog definition has not been supplied. System programmer response: Enter a valid SSA or catalog definition for all catalog data set names. CPP0603003E If Catalog is to be Allocated, then the SSA must be defined Explanation: You specified that the catalog is to be allocated, but have not specified an SSA (system specific alias) for the catalog. System programmer response: Supply an SSA so that the selected catalog can be accessed by the driving system through the master catalog of the target system. CPP0603004I Changes to the TABLE have been SAVED Explanation: Your changes to the orders SSA-to-catalog relationships have been saved. System programmer response: None. CPP0603005I Processing CANCELLED by User <changes> Explanation: You entered the CANCEL command; your changes to the orders SSA-to-catalog relationships were discarded. <changes> might show more information, such as the message: CHANGES TO THE TABLE WERE NOT SAVED. System programmer response: None. CPP0603006E Cannot Change Catalog VOLSER unless you also ALLOCate the Catalog Explanation: You specified that the catalog is not to be allocated, but you have changed the DASD volume serial. This action caused a conflict of information. System programmer response: To allocate the catalog, set the ALLOC CATALOG field to Y. CPP0603007E You are trying to allocate a CATALOG without SSA definition. This is allowed ONLY for SUB-Systems and FunctionPac. Explanation: You did not specify an SSA definition. An SSA definition can be omitted only for a subsystem or FunctionPac installation. System programmer response: Specify an SSA definition.
Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

197

CPP0603011E SSA name is TOO long. This catalog has a data set (dsname) with a length of length, which limits the SSA to max-length characters. Explanation: During SSA assignment, it was detected that the combined length of the SSA name specified, plus the data set associated with this SSA, exceeded the maximum of 44 characters. The name of the data set with the longest name is identified by dsname. Based on this length, the length of the SSA cannot be longer than max-length characters. System programmer response: Shorten the length of the SSA definition to the specified maximum, or return to the Modify System Layout function of the dialog and change the name of the data set so that the combined length of data set and SSA does not exceed 44 characters. CPP0603012W Conflicting units stored for volume. This must be resolved to proceed beyond the SSA option. Press Enter to continue. Explanation: The unit specified for volume volume does not match the value that was previously specified for this volume when defining or altering another SSA. Only one unit should be specified for any particular volume. System action: None. System programmer response: You must resolve this mismatch before you can proceed beyond the SSA dialog option. Press Enter or End to accept the unit specified or select a different unit. If you accept a mismatched unit, you must resolve the mismatch. Specify the same unit for all entries for the same volume. CPP0604001S Configuration is INCOMPLETE or CORRUPTED Explanation: The order configuration SCPPTENU library does not contain all tables needed for a full work configuration, or is corrupted. At least one of the following tables is missing from the library: NEWDEVT Device types table NEWITBL Installation jobs table NEWVTBL Installation variables table System programmer response: Review the order configuration SCPPTENU library. CPP0604002E You CANNOT Save to the ORDER Configuration Library Explanation: The high level qualifiers that you have specified plus one of the low level qualifiers would result

in a data set name that is the same as the your order configuration libraries. The order configuration libraries have the following low level qualifiers: v SCPPSENU v SCPPTENU For example, suppose that you received your order into the following libraries: v STOB4.MD000277.SCPPSENU v STOB4.MD000277.SCPPTENU and you specified a high level qualifier of STOB4.MD000277. System programmer response: Specify a different high level qualifier. CPP0604003E HLQ Specified is NOT available, it is Used by Order ordernum Explanation: The high level qualifiers that you have specified are used by another order ordernum. System programmer response: Save the configuration to a unique set of configuration libraries. Specify the high level qualifiers for the order configuration libraries. CPP0604004E Data set NOT Allocated dsname, system-message Explanation: The saved order configuration libraries could not be allocated. System programmer response: Review the message system-message to determine why data set dsname was not allocated. System programmer response: None. CPP0604005I SAVE Request CANCELLED Explanation: The saved configuration libraries already contain a valid configuration. To continue with the save request, the older configuration must be deleted. This required confirmation, which was refused. As a result, nothing was saved. System programmer response: None. CPP0604006I SAVE Request SUCCESSFUL Explanation: The work configuration was successfully copied to a saved or master configuration. System programmer response: None. CPP0605001I CustomPac LVT has been INITIALIZED With SHIPPED Values Explanation: All data sets were restored to their original, shipped values. Any customization that you might have done has been lost.

198

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

System programmer response: None. CPP0605002I RESTORE Confirmation has been denied, SHIP Command will NOT be Executed Explanation: Your request for all data sets to be restored to their original, shipped values was canceled because you did not confirm your request. System action: The data sets remain at their current values. System programmer response: None. CPP0605003I Changes to the TABLE have been SAVED Explanation: Your changes for the logical volume table have been saved to the order table library. System programmer response: None. CPP0605004I Processing CANCELLED by User <changes> Explanation: You entered the CANCEL command; your changes to the logical volume table were discarded. <changes> might show more information, such as the message: CHANGES TO THE TABLE WERE NOT SAVED. System programmer response: None. CPP0605005S At least one physical volume has problems which need to be resolved. Explanation: One or more of the specified volumes has a problem that you must resolve before you can continue with the installation. In the panel, these volumes are indicated by nnn<<n and an associated message. System programmer response: See the description of the associated message. If you have completed the ServerPac installation , you may get this message if you return to the Modify System Layout option and have used Initialize Volume of N for your physical volumes. In this case, you must set Initialize Volume to Y to end the option without error. Setting the option to Y will stop the Modify System Layout process from checking space on the volumes. CPP0605006I VOLUME is NOT Available, It is Already Defined to CustomPac Explanation: You attempted to assign a physical volume by changing the volume serial number, but the volume serial number you entered is already defined to CustomPac.

System programmer response: Assign the physical volume to a volume serial number that is not defined to CustomPac. CPP0605007I ADDRESS is NOT Available, It is Already Defined to CustomPac Explanation: You attempted to assign a physical volume by changing the device address, but the device address you entered is already defined to CustomPac. System programmer response: Assign the physical volume to a device address that is not defined to CustomPac. CPP0605008E Missing or invalid device type. Explanation: The device type you specified for the volume was not defined to the dialog, or you did not specify a device type for the volume when one was required. System action: None. System programmer response: Depending on the value that you specified for the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable, do one of the following: v If DYNAMIC DASD INFO is set to YES, the dialog attempts to retrieve information about devices dynamically. To allow this action to complete, either make the device for the specified volume available (for example, vary it online) or specify a valid device type. v If DYNAMIC DASD INFO is set to NO, either specify a valid device type or use the Device Type Table option of the Modify System Layout function to define a device of the correct type and return to this panel to specify the device type. To see the list of currently-defined devices, enter a question mark (?) in the Device Type field or enter the DEVT command on the command line and press Enter. CPP0605009E PHYSICAL VOLUME(p-vol) is NOT an IPL Pack, BUT the LOGICAL VOLUME(l-vol) Contains IPL DATA SETS Explanation: You attempted to assign a logical (l-vol) to a different physical volume (p-vol), but the logical volume contains data sets that must reside on the system IPL volume. The physical volume is not the system IPL volume, so you cannot use it with this logical volume. System programmer response: Assign the logical volume to the physical volume that is the system IPL volume.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

199

CPP0605010E PHYSICAL VOLUME(p-vol) IS an IPL Pack, BUT the LOGICAL VOLUME(l-vol) Does NOT Contain IPL DATA SETS Explanation: You attempted to assign a logical volume (l-vol) to a physical volume that is the system IPL volume (p-vol). However, the logical volume contains data sets that do not reside on the system IPL volume. You cannot use the system IPL volume for this logical volume. The system IPL volume is reserved for data sets that must reside on the system IPL volume. System programmer response: Assign the logical volume to a different physical volume. CPP0605011E LOGICAL VOLUME(IPLVOL) is RESTRICTED, It CANNOT be ASSIGNED, or be the Target of an ASSIGNMENT Explanation: Logical volume IPLVOL is a reserved logical volume that contains data sets that must reside on the system IPL volume. Therefore, you cannot use IPLVOL as the source or target of an assignment. System programmer response: Correct and resubmit your assignment request. CPP0605013W PHYSICAL VOLUMES are Referenced that DO NOT have a valid DEVICE ADDRESS (CCUU) Assigned, << RUN THE SUMP COMMAND >> Explanation: Some data sets are mapped to physical volumes that do not have a valid device number (CUU). A physical volume must have a valid hexadecimal device number. System programmer response: Enter the SUMP command and assign valid device numbers. CPP0605014E DUPLICATE DATA SET NAME, Data set Name is Already Used by CustomPac Explanation: You attempted to use an existing data set name, which is not allowed. System programmer response: Specify a different data set name. CPP0605015E DUPLICATE DATA SET NAME, Data set Name is an ORIGINAL SHIPPED Data set Name Explanation: You attempted to use the original, shipped data set name of another data set, which is not allowed. System programmer response: Specify a different data set name.

CPP0605017E INVALID BLKSIZE, Data Set is UNBLOCKED, RECFM is F .. BLKSIZE must be LRECL Explanation: You specified a DCB RECFM of F, but the BLKSIZE is not the same as the LRECL. For RECFM=F data sets, the BLKSIZE must be the same as the LRECL. System programmer response: Reset the BLKSIZE to match the LRECL. CPP0605018E INVALID BLKSIZE, Data Set is UNBLOCKED, RECFM is V .. BLKSIZE must be LRECL + 4 Explanation: You specified a DCB RECFM of V, but the BLKSIZE is not the same as the LRECL + 4. For RECFM=V data sets, the BLKSIZE must be the same as the LRECL + 4. System programmer response: Reset the BLKSIZE to match the LRECL + 4. CPP0605019E INVALID BLKSIZE, RECFM is F .. BLKSIZE must be a MULTIPLE of the LRECL Explanation: You specified a DCB RECFM of F, but the BLKSIZE is not a multiple of the LRECL. For RECFM=F data sets, the BLKSIZE must be a multiple of the LRECL. System programmer response: Reset the BLKSIZE to a multiple of the LRECL. CPP0605022W High Level Qualifier has CHANGED, You MUST Re-Evaluate the ALIAS to CATALOG and SSA to CATALOG Relationships Explanation: You changed the high level qualifier of the data set. The new high level qualifier is not defined in the Alias-to-Catalog Table. System programmer response: Rerun the Alias-to-Catalog and SSA-to-Catalog functions. CPP0605023E Missing or invalid device type. Explanation: Either the device type you specified for the volume was not defined to the dialog, or you did not specify a device type for the volume when one was required. System action: None. System programmer response: Do one of the following: v If you have the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable set to YES, to indicate that the dialog should retrieve information about devices dynamically, you must either make the device for the specified volume

200

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

available (for example, vary it online) or specify a valid device type. You can enter a question mark (?) in the Device Type field or enter the DEVT command on the command line and press Enter to see the list of currently-defined devices. v If you have the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable set to NO, you must either specify a valid device type or use the Device Type Table option of Modify System Layout to define a device of the correct type and then return to this panel to specify it. You can enter a question mark (?) in the Device Type field or enter the DEVT command on the command line and press Enter to see the list of currently-defined devices. CPP0605024I Data set Profile UPDATED Explanation: You changed the data set profile. Your changes are stored in a temporary table until you save them or complete the Modify System Layout function of the installation dialog. System programmer response: None. CPP0605026E INVALID RECFM Explanation: You entered an invalid record format. System programmer response: Enter a valid RECFM (U, FB, FA, FM, FS, VB, VA, VM, VS). CPP0605027E LOGICAL VOLUME(CSIVOL) IS RESTRICTED, It CANNOT be Assigned, or be the Target of an ASSIGNMENT Explanation: Logical volume CSIVOL is reserved; you cannot use it as the source or target of an assignment (you can, however, assign CSIVOL to another physical volume). System programmer response: Correct your assignment request and resubmit it. CPP0605028S INVALID Data Set Name OR INVALID Symbolic Syntax Explanation: You attempted to change the data set name using a symbolic variable, but after symbolic substitution, the resulting data set name does not pass syntax checking. System programmer response: Either the fixed portion of the data set name is invalid, or the symbolic variable is in error. To correct the symbolic variable, return to the V (Define Installation Variables) function of the dialog and reassign the variable. CPP0605029E Symbolics are NOT ALLOWED for the High level or Low level Qualifiers Explanation: You cannot use symbolics for high level qualifiers or low level qualifiers. System programmer response: Use symbolics for

the middle level qualifiers only. CPP0605031E Global CHANGE, Incorrect Option. Explanation: You entered the CHANGE command with an incorrect option. The following options are valid: DSN, LV, TYPE, SPACE, SMS, RENAME, PVOL, MCAT, SECOND. System programmer response: Enter a valid change command. For correct syntax, see Making changes to data sets on page 98. CPP0605032E Global CHANGE, Missing Parameter(s) Explanation: Your entered the CHANGE command without specifying one or more required parameters. The following parameters are valid: DSN, LV, TYPE, SPACE, SMS, RENAME, PVOL, MCAT, SECOND. System programmer response: Reenter the command, including all required parameters. For examples, see Making changes to data sets on page 98. CPP0605033E Global CHANGE, Unknown Parameter(s) parm Explanation: You entered the CHANGE command with one or more incorrect parameters, which are indicated by parm. System programmer response: Enter the command with valid parameters. For examples, see Making changes to data sets on page 98. CPP0605034I Global CHANGE, NO Data matched your Selection Criteria Explanation: The data set list was searched to apply your changes, but no matching data sets were found. System programmer response: Review your change requirements. CPP0605035I Global CHANGE was CANCELLED by user or all changes were excluded Explanation: The data set list was searched to apply your changes and some matches were found. However, you entered the CANCEL command or excluded all data sets from the candidate list. Therefore, no changes were made. System programmer response: None.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

201

CPP0605036E Global CHANGE, Incorrect Parameter parm Explanation: The CHANGE command parameter shown in parm is incorrect. System programmer response: Correct the parameter and enter the CHANGE command again. CPP0605037E Global CHANGE, Value OUT OF RANGE parm Explanation: The CHANGE SPACE parameter shown in parm contains a value that is outside the allowable range. System programmer response: Correct the parameter and enter the CHANGE command again. CPP0605038I GLOBAL CHANGE, ALL Data that Matched Your selection Criteria resulted in Invalid Substitution, Nothing Changed Explanation: The data set list was searched to apply your changes. Some data sets were found to match your selection criteria, but the CHANGE command would cause an invalid substitution. Therefore, no changes were made. For example, suppose you entered the following: CH DS AB DAPPLET and a data set was named SYS1.CABS. If the change were applied, it would result in SYS1.CDAPPLETS, which would be an invalid substitution because CDAPPLETS is an invalid data set name. System action: The system ignores your request. System programmer response: Review your change requirements. CPP0605040E INVALID Data set Name or Data set Name Not Defined Explanation: The OFILE OPEN data set name you have entered is not valid. System programmer response: Correct the OFILE OPEN data set name. CPP0605041E INVALID Member Name Explanation: You entered the OFILE OPEN command with an incorrect member name. System programmer response: Reenter the command with the correct member name.

CPP0605042E INVALID Data set DISPosition or NOT Supplied (OLD, SHR, NEW, MOD) Explanation: The OFILE OPEN data set disposition is not valid, or the default of OLD was used and the data set does not exist. System programmer response: Correct the OFILE OPEN data set disposition. You can use OLD, SHR, NEW, or MOD. By default, the disposition is OLD. CPP0605043E INVALID Data set DISPosition NEW and MOD are NOT allowed for a MEMBER Explanation: The OFILE OPEN data set disposition was NEW or MOD, and you specified a member as part of the data set name. You must use OLD or SHR if you specify a member name. System programmer response: Correct the OFILE OPEN data set disposition. CPP0605044E Data set ATTRIBUTES are INCOMPATIBLE with the OFILE Command Explanation: The OFILE data set has DCB attributes that are incompatible with the output record. System programmer response: Review the DCB attributes of the data set you are trying to use for the output of the OFILE command. The OFILE data set must be compatible with RECFM=F LRECL=120. CPP0605045I Data set OPEN SUCCESSFUL Explanation: The OFILE output data set is open and available for your use. System programmer response: To write the data set list to the OFILE data set, enter the OFILE command without parameters. CPP0605046E Data set OPEN FAILED Explanation: The OFILE output data set was not allocated or failed to open correctly. System programmer response: If you attempted to open the data set as NEW, verify that the data set does not already exist. If you tried to open the data set as SHR or OLD, verify that the data set exists and is not in use by another user or job. Also, review the DCB attributes of the data set that you are attempting to use for the output of the OFILE command. The OFILE data set must be compatible with RECFM=F LRECL=120.

202

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CPP0605047I OFILE Output Data set IS ACTIVE dsname Explanation: The OFILE output data set dsname is open and available for your use. System programmer response: None. CPP0605048I Data set CLOSED Explanation: The OFILE output data set is now closed, and can be accessed by other users or jobs. System programmer response: None. CPP0605049E Data set OPERATION INVALID or NOT DEFINED (OPEN CLOSE) Explanation: You entered the OFILE command incorrectly. System programmer response: Reenter the OFILE command correctly, as follows: v To open the OFILE data set, enter OFILE OPEN data set.name disposition v To write the OFILE data set, enter OFILE without parameters v To close the OFILE data set, enter OFILE CLOSE CPP0605050I OFILE Output Data set is NOT ACTIVE (Use OPEN) Explanation: You entered the OFILE write output data set command, but the output data set is not open. System programmer response: Use the OFILE OPEN command to open the output data set. Enter OFILE OPEN data set.name disposition. CPP0605051I Data set List SAVED to dsname Explanation: The data set list has been written to data set dsname. System programmer response: Close the output data set through the OFILE CLOSE command. CPP0605052I Data set List SENT to ISPF LIST Data Set Explanation: The data set list has been written to the ISPF list data set. System programmer response: You can dynamically close the ISPF list data set through the ISPF LIST command. Otherwise, the data set is freed when your ISPF session is ended.

CPP0605053E INVALID command Parameters, Specify USER, SHIPPED, or MERGED (Can be abbreviated to U, S, or M) Explanation: You entered the SUMD primary command to display the Summary of Data Sets panel. However, you included an incorrect filter with the SUMD command. Valid filters are as follows: (blank) Display all data sets. M Display only merged data sets. S Display shipped data sets and merged data sets. U Display only user-defined data sets. System programmer response: Reenter the SUMD command. To filter the display output, specify a valid filter (U, S, or M) after the SUMD command. CPP0605055S Actual device type attributes do not match those specified. Explanation: You specified a device type or device number that does not match the volumes actual device type or device number. System action: None. System programmer response: Specify the correct information for the volume, including its device type and device number. CPP0605057W Volume (volume) largest free space overallocated. Explanation: The combined size of the data sets to be allocated on this volume is greater than the size of the largest free extent on the volume. In the panel, the volume is indicated by EXT<<W. System action: Processing continues. System programmer response: To ensure that all data sets fit on the volume, do one or both of the following: v Consolidate the free space on the volume into a smaller number of extents. (For example, run the DFSMSdss DEFRAG command to create a smaller number of free extents.) This might create a large enough free space extent to allocate the data sets currently assigned to this volume. v Reduce the number of data sets defined in the configuration that are identified to be allocated on the volume. For example, move some of the existing data sets on the volume to another volume; or, if they are not needed, delete them.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

203

CPP0605058S Volume (volume) information not retrievable. Explanation: Information about the volume volume could not be retrieved. In the panel, the volume is indicated by VOL<<S. System action: The dialog prevents you from installing the order until you resolve this condition. System programmer response: Ensure that the specified volume has been initialized, has a VTOC index, and is online. If so, rebuild the volumes VTOC index through the ICKDSF BUILDIX command and try again to use the volume. If the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable was set to Y and it is acceptable for volumes to be offline, select each volume (with the Select line command) in turn and respond to the resulting CPP0605087W message. If this message persists after you rebuild the VTOC index, contact IBM for support. CPP0605059S Volume (volume) is overallocated. Explanation: The number of cylinders to be allocated on volume volume exceeds the total number of cylinders for the volume. In the panel, overallocated physical volumes are indicated by OVR<<S. System action: The dialog prevents you from installing the order until you resolve this condition. System programmer response: There are several ways to resolve this condition: v Specify another volume that has greater capacity. v Use the SUMP command to select a device type that has a larger capacity. v Move data sets from the overallocated volume to another physical volume, or add a new volume for the data sets. See the topic, Recommended Data Set Placement in z/OS Planning for Installation for assistance in determining which data sets to move. v If this message is displayed after you have run the ALLOCDS job (as described in ServerPac: Installing Your Order), and you have not changed the data set layout since last using the Modify System Layout function, you can resolve the condition by resetting the Initialize Volume field from N to Y. v If the volume resides on a device with a reconfigurable size (and the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable is set to Yes), exit the panel, reconfigure the volume, and retry the operation. For help in changing the device type or moving a data set to another physical volume, see the descriptions that accompany Figure 82 on page 121.

To add another volume, use the dialogs View and Change facility (or the CH PVOL command) to move the data sets to another volume. If DYNAMIC DASD INFO is set to Yes and the volume is online, the dialog will determine how full the new volume is. If it is set to No, and the volume already exists in the configuration, the dialog will determine how full the new volume is. Otherwise, the new volume will have to be defined (on panel CPPP625D or CPPP605J). CPP0605060I Driving System DFP level is dfplevel. Explanation: This message identifies the level of DFSMSdfp being used on the driving system. System action: None. System programmer response: None. CPP0605061E SPACE value CANNOT be LESS than SHIPPED VALUE. Explanation: You attempted to decrease the space for a shipped data set to less than its original, shipped amount. This action is not allowed. System action: Your request is ignored. System programmer response: Resubmit your request, specifying an amount of space that is equal to, or greater than, the original, shipped amount. CPP0605062E DIRECTORY blocks CANNOT be LESS than SHIPPED VALUE. Explanation: You attempted to decrease the number of directory blocks for a shipped data set to less than its original, shipped number. This action is not allowed. System action: Your request is ignored. System programmer response: Resubmit your request, specifying a number of directory blocks that is equal to, or greater than, the original, shipped number. CPP0605065W The configuration contains one or more PDSE or HFS data sets. SMS activation is required on the driving system. Explanation: The shipped configuration contains one or more PDSE or HFS data sets. These data sets cannot be allocated because SMS is not active on the driving system. SMS must be active in at least a null configuration. System action: Dialog processing stops. System programmer response: To complete the Modify System Layout option, you can do either of the following: v Reset all PDSE data sets in the configuration to PDS data sets, if the PDSE data sets are eligible to be

204

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

converted (for details, see the CHANGE DSNTYPE command in Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165). v Exit the installation dialog and activate SMS on the driving system. Return to the dialog at the Modify System Layout option. CPP0605069E Invalid combination of data set types specified for the CHANGE TYPE command. Explanation: You entered the CHANGE DSNTYPE command incorrectly. This command allows changing between PDS and PDSE data sets, and between HFS and zFS data sets. Other combinations are not allowed (for example, changing a PDS to a zFS). System action: The system ignores your request. System programmer response: Use the correct syntax of the CHANGE DSNTYPE command. For information, see Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165. CPP0605071E Only Y(es) and N(o) allowed for CHANGE SMS Command Explanation: You entered a CHANGE SMS command without a valid operand. The only operands allowed for CHANGE SMS are Y, YES, N and NO. Other operands are not supported. System action: Command is not accepted. System programmer response: Enter the command with a valid operand. CPP0605072E Physical Volume and Storage Class are mutually exclusive. Explanation: You entered both a physical volume and a storage class for the logical volume being assigned. Only one may be specified. System programmer response: Specify either a physical volume or a storage class, but not both. CPP0605073E All data sets on a logical volume must be either SMS-managed or unmanaged. Change either the logical volume or the value of SMS-managed. Explanation: Mixing SMS-managed data sets and non-SMS data sets on the same logical volume is not allowed. A volume can be either SMS-managed or unmanaged, but not both. System action: Modify System Layout cannot be completed. System programmer response: To complete Modify System Layout, do either of the following:

1. Change the logical volume name to specify a volume whose SMS status matches the data sets SMS status 2. Change the volumes SMS status to match the data sets SMS status. CPP0605074E Logical Volume to-vol does not match SMS-managed status of logical volume from-vol Explanation: You entered the command: CH LVOL from-vol to-vol, but the data sets represented by logical volume from-vol have different SMS attributes than the data sets represented by logical volume to-vol. The change request is ignored. System programmer response: Ensure that the data sets represented by from-vol and to-vol have matching SMS attributes, and enter the CHANGE command again. CPP0605075E Physical Volume OR Storage Class is required. Explanation: Neither a physical volume nor a storage class was assigned. You must assign the logical volume to either a physical volume or a storage class before leaving this panel. System programmer response: Assign either a physical volume or a storage class to this logical volume. CPP0605076E Name not allowed. Specify SMxxxx for SMS-managed logical volumes. Do not specify SMxxxx for unmanaged volumes. Explanation: You attempted to rename a logical volume. However, the name you chose violates one or more of the following naming conventions for logical volumes: v For SMS-managed data sets, logical volume names must start with the letters SM and be 3 to 8 characters long. v For non-SMS-managed data sets, logical volume names must not begin with the letters SM and must be 6 characters long. If you want to change the SMS management status of a logical volume, you must apply the change to the individual data sets on the volume or through the SUML command for the entire logical volume. System action: The operation is disallowed. System programmer response: Specify a valid name, according to the logical volume naming conventions, or change the SMS management status of the volume, if appropriate.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

205

CPP0605077E Invalid syntax. The correct syntax is: CH PVOL TARGET|DLIB|OPERATIONAL new_volume Explanation: You entered the CHANGE PVOL command incorrectly. System action: None. System programmer response: Use the correct syntax, as shown in the text of the message. For an example of how to enter the CHANGE PVOL command, see 173. CPP0605078E Invalid syntax. The correct syntax is: CH RENAME Y|N Explanation: You entered the CHANGE RENAME command incorrectly. System action: None. System programmer response: Use the correct syntax, as shown in the text of the message. For an example of how to enter the CHANGE RENAME command, see Appendix A, Primary command reference, on page 165. CPP0605079E Data set dsname would exceed 44 characters. Explanation: The CHANGE command you specified would cause one or more data set names to exceed the maximum allowable length of 44 characters. The first of the data set names that would have exceeded 44 characters is shown. System action: None. System programmer response: Enter a CHANGE command that does not attempt to create data set names longer than 44 characters. VSAM and zFS data sets are restricted to 40 characters. Non-VSAM and zFS data sets are restricted to 42 characters. CPP0605080E Unmatched or too many SS selections. Two or no SS selections allowed. Explanation: Your SS block commands are mismatched. Enter them in pairs. System action: None. System programmer response: Enter the select command as follows: v To display a single data set, enter one S command. v To display data sets for a range of values, use a pair of block select commands. That is, enter SS next to the first value and SS next to the last value. v To display data sets for a range of values, and for values outside the range, use a pair of SS commands to select the largest range, and individual

S commands to select the additional values for which data sets are to be displayed. CPP0605081I No values were found to display. Explanation: Your search resulted in no matches. System action: None. System programmer response: None. CPP0605082E No value was selected. Explanation: You entered the LIST primary command, but did not specify a value to display. System action: None. System programmer response: Select a value before entering the LIST command. CPP0605083E Invalid syntax. The correct syntax is: CH MCAT Y|N Explanation: You entered the CHANGE MCAT command incorrectly. System action: None. System programmer response: Use the correct syntax, as shown in the text of the message. For an example of how to enter the CHANGE MCAT command, see CHANGE MCAT on page 171. CPP0605084E Physical Volume volume is already in use as a Storage Class. Explanation: When assigning a logical volume to a physical volume, you entered a physical volume name that matches an existing SMS storage class name, which is not allowed. System action: None. System programmer response: Specify a physical volume name that is not the same as the name of a storage class. CPP0605085E Storage Class storage-class is already in use as a Physical Volume. Explanation: When assigning a logical volume to a physical volume, you entered an SMS storage class name that matches an existing physical volume, which is not allowed. System action: None. System programmer response: Specify a storage class name that is not the same as the name of a physical volume.

206

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CPP0605086I Device information updated Explanation: The dialog successfully retrieved device information for the volume for which you specified the volume serial. The device type and device number were set from the retrieved information. If you entered No in the Initialize Volume field, available space on the volume was set using the amount of free space actually found. System action: None. System programmer response: None. CPP0605087W Device information could not be retrieved for volume volume. Explanation: Because the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable was set to Yes, the dialog attempted to retrieve device information for the volume for which you specified the volume serial. However, the information could not be retrieved. System action: None. System programmer response: If the volume does not exist or is intentionally offline, press the Enter key to bypass the warning. Then, use Option V (Physical Volume Summary) from the Modify System Layout Options panel to specify a device that has been defined in the Device Type Table. To display defined devices or to define a new device, select Option T (View and change device type table) from the Modify System Layout Options panel. If the required device is not defined, exit the panel, define the device, and then retry the operation. If the volume should be online, ensure that: v The correct volume serial is specified on the panel. v The volume is online and available (for example, not pending offline or boxed). If the volume is not online and available, exit the panel and make the volume available. Then, retry the operation. v The device and control unit are working correctly. For example, check the system log for IOS000I messages that might indicate a problem. If these actions do not resolve the problem, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0605088W Device number found for volume1 conflicts with the device number found for volume2. Respecify volume serial or press Enter to continue. Explanation: You entered a volume serial on the panel while the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable was set to Yes. The dialog retrieved the information for the volume, but found that its device number matches a device number already specified for another volume in the configuration. System action: None.

System programmer response: Do either of the following: v Respecify the volume serial. v Press Enter to continue. The device number for the other volume will be set to CCUU. When you complete the panel, use Option V on the Modify System Layout Options panel to correct the device number for the other volume. CPP0605089E Missing or invalid device number. Explanation: Either the device number you specified for the volume was invalid, or you did not specify a device number for the volume when one was required. System action: None. System programmer response: Do either of the following: v If you have the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable set to YES, to indicate that the dialog should retrieve information about devices dynamically, either make the device for the specified volume available (for example, vary it online) or specify a valid device number. v If you have the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable set to NO, specify a valid device number. CPP0605090E Invalid syntax. The correct syntax is CH SECOND Y|N. Explanation: You typed an incorrect syntax statement for a CHange SECOND command. Note: Reviewers please note: We try to avoid the use of the word invalid in messages. Incorrect syntax would be better. System action: No change is made to the data sets. System programmer response: Reissue the command with the correct syntax. CPP0605091E Reserved space cannot be greater than amount. Explanation: The value you entered for the reserved space exceeds the amount available on the volume. At least one cylinder must remain unreserved on the volume after the VTOC and VTOC index have been allocated. System action: None. System programmer response: Enter a smaller amount of reserved space, or increase the volumes size.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

207

CPP0605092I PDS data sets when changed to PDSE with no secondary space specified will automatically be assigned (10% of primary). Explanation: When you change a PDS data set with no secondary space to a PDSE data set, ServerPac automatically allocates a secondary space that is 10% of the primary space to the PDSE data set. System action: The system automatically assigns the secondary space to the switched data set. System programmer response: None. CPP0605093I PDSE data sets when changed back to PDS will have their automatic assigned secondary space (of 10% primary) removed. Explanation: When you change a PDS data set with no secondary space to a PDSE data set, ServerPac automatically allocates a secondary space that is 10% of the primary space to the PDSE data set. If you then change the PDSE data set back to a PDS data set, ServerPac automatically removes the secondary space that it previously allocated. System action: The system automatically removes the secondary space. System programmer response: None. CPP0605094E PDSE data sets must have secondary space specified between 1 and 65536. Explanation: The secondary space was not correctly specified. System action: None. System programmer response: Specify the secondary space between 1 and 65536. CPP0605109E Logical Volume IPLVOL cannot be placed on the same physical disk used by the Standalone Dump Bootstrap. Explanation: You attempted to assign logical volume IPLVOL to the physical volume that is to be used for the standalone dump program. You cannot place the IPL text and the standalone dump program on the same physical volume. The standalone dump program is placed on the physical volume that contains the data set SYS1.PAGEDUMP. System programmer response: Specify a different physical volume.

CPP0605110E Logical Volume l-vol Cannot be placed on the same physical disk as the System IPL Volume. Explanation: The physical volume you specified already has logical volume IPLVOL assigned to it. However, the logical volume you attempted to assign to the same physical volume contains data set SYS1.PAGEDUMP. The standalone dump program must be installed on the physical volume that contains this data set. You cannot have IPL text and the stand alone dump program on the same physical volume. System programmer response: Specify a different physical volume. CPP0605150W The configuration contains SMS-managed data sets. SMS activation is required on the driving system. Explanation: The work configuration contains one or more SMS-managed data sets. These data sets cannot be allocated because SMS is not active on the driving system. System programmer response: To complete Modify System Layout, do either of the following: v Change the SMS-managed data sets in the configuration to unmanaged data sets v Exit the dialog, activate SMS on the driving system, return to Modify System Layout, and continue. CPP0605200I Data Set merge request successful Explanation: The component data sets that you selected on the Merge Candidates panel were successfully merged with the target data set. System programmer response: None. CPP0605201I Merged data set is now the target for a merge action Explanation: You have selected a data set to be the target of a data set merge action. System programmer response: None. CPP0605202E UNMERGE line command is not allowed for a target data set Explanation: You attempted to completely unmerge a merged data set. However, the pop-up display permits you to unmerge only individual component data sets. System programmer response: To completely unmerge a merged data set, you can do either of the following: v From the current pop-up display: 1. Enter a U for every component data set.

208

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

2. Press Enter. v From the Summary of Data Sets panel (you must first exit the pop-up): 1. Enter a U for the data set to be unmerged. 2. Press Enter. CPP0605203W Merged data set was unmerged. Therefore, you must re-evaluate the alias-to-catalog and SSA-to-catalog relationships Explanation: You have unmerged a component data set from a merged data set, causing it to revert to the high level qualifier it had before it was merged. Therefore, the data sets alias-to-catalog and SSA-to-catalog relationships are also changed. System programmer response: Reestablish the data sets alias-to-catalog and SSA-to-catalog relationships. For more information, see Chapter 9, Defining HLQ-to-catalog relationships, on page 125 and Chapter 10, Defining system-specific aliases (SSAs), on page 133. CPP0605204E Filesystem data set 1 cannot be merged because filesystem data set 2 has an intermediate mount point. Explanation: You selected a file system data set (data set 1) to be merged into another file system data set. However, a third file system data set (data set 2) has a mount point that is hierarchically in between the first two data sets. For example, a data set with a mount point /a/b/c cannot be merged into a data set having mount point /a if another unmerged data set has a mount point of /a/b. In this example, /a would be the mount point of the merged target data set,/a/b/c would be the mount point of the data set you selected to cause the message to be issued, and /a/b would be the mount point of the third data set. System action: None. System programmer response: Either: v Deselect the data set you selected for merging, or v Select the data set described in the message text in addition to the one you selected for merging. Note: This message may appear more than once if you choose the second option above and there are one or more other data sets with intermediate mount points. . CPP0605205E EXPAND line command may only be used on a merged data set Explanation: You have attempted to display the component data sets of a data set that has no component data sets. Only a merged data set has component data sets.

System programmer response: Limit your expansion selections to merged data sets. CPP0605206I Merged data set has been unmerged Explanation: You have successfully unmerged a merged data set of all of its component data sets. System programmer response: None. CPP0605207I Component data set unmerged Explanation: You have successfully unmerged the selected component data set from the merged data set. The merged data set is left with at least one remaining component data set. System programmer response: None. CPP0605208I Last component data set unmerged; therefore, the merged data set is unmerged Explanation: You have successfully unmerged the last component data set from the merged data set. System programmer response: None. CPP0605209E Selected data set dsname is not valid for merge processing. Explanation: The data set you selected (dsname) is not eligible for merging. System programmer response: Review the rules for merging data sets in Merging and unmerging data sets on page 102. CPP0605210E Select at least one data set with the SELECT line command when entering the MERGE primary command Explanation: You have entered the Merge command for a target data set without selecting component data sets for the target data set. System programmer response: Enter an S to the left of one or more data sets to select them for merging with the target data set. CPP0605211E Member conflict exists between two data sets. Data set dsname1 is merged. Data set dsname2 is not merged. Explanation: A data set that you have selected is ineligible for merging because it contains a member name that matches a member of a data set that was previously merged into the target data set. System action: The data set is not merged. Merge processing continues with the next selected data set. System programmer response: Review your selection.
Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

209

CPP0605212E No candidate data sets exist for merging with the target data set Explanation: You selected a target data set for merging, but no data sets are eligible for merging with it. System action: The data set is not merged. Merge processing continues with the next selected data set. System programmer response: Review your selection. The rules for merging data sets are described in Merging and unmerging data sets on page 102. CPP0605213E UNMERGE line command may only be used on a merged data set Explanation: You have attempted to unmerge a data set that is not a merged data set. System action: The UNMERGE command is ignored. System programmer response: Review your selection. If appropriate, choose a different data set for unmerging. CPP0605214I Component data set has been merged into merged-dsname Explanation: The selected data set has been successfully merged into data set merged-dsname. System action: None. System programmer response: None. CPP0605215E Component data set not found Explanation: The string you entered on the FINDCOMP command does not match any component data sets. System action: None. System programmer response: Review your selection. CPP0605216E Filesystem data set 1 could not be unmerged because component filesystem data set 2 includes its mount point. Explanation: You selected a file system data set to be unmerged from a target file system data set. However, a third file system data set has a mount point that is hierarchically below the first two data sets. For example, a data set with a mount point /a/b cannot be unmerged from a data set having mount point /a if another merged data set has a mount point of /a/b/c. In this example, /a would be the mount point of the merge target data set, /a/b would be the mount point of the data set you selected to cause the message to be issued, and /a/b/c would be the mount point of the third data set. System action: None.

System programmer response: Either: v Deselect the data set you selected for unmerging, or v Unmerge the data set, data set 2, first, before unmerging data set 1. Note: This message may appear more than once if you choose the second option above and there are one or more other data sets with dependant mount points. . CPP0605217W Remerge attempt canceled. Filesystem data set data set is unmerged. Explanation: You attempted to merge another filesystem into an existing file system data set, but the new component could not be merged because an intermediate filesystem mount point existed. The result is an unmerged filesystem due to the error not being corrected. System programmer response: Either: v Leave the filesystems unmerged, or v Retry the merge command, ensuring that you select all filesystems with intermediate mount points. Note: This message may appear more than once if you choose the second option above and there are one or more other data sets with dependant mount points. . CPP0606002E devname is an IBM Supplied Device Type and CANNOT be DELETED Explanation: You attempted to delete a device devname. This is a standard IBM device definition, which must be available to your order. System action: This device is not deleted. System programmer response: Review your selection. CPP0606003E devname is an IBM Supplied Device Type and CANNOT be UPDATED Explanation: You attempted to update a device devname. This is a standard IBM device definition, which must be available to your order. System action: This device is not updated. System programmer response: Review your selection.

210

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CPP0606004E devname is Assigned to at Least One Physical Volume and CANNOT be action Explanation: You attempted to delete or update a device, devname, which is currently referenced by data sets in the logical volume table. System action: Your request is ignored. System programmer response: Review your selection. CPP0606005E devtype is NOT a Known IBM Device Type, Enter the IBM DASD Family Name that is Being Emulated ... EG. 3390 Explanation: You attempted to insert a new device name and specified that this device name emulates the IBM device that belongs to the DASD family devtype. However, ServerPac does not support this DASD family. System programmer response: Enter a valid DASD family name, such as 3390-9. CPP0606006E devtype is Already a DEFINED Device, Byte/Trk and Trks/Cylinder have been FORCED to use the Existing Defined Values Explanation: You attempted to change the DASD family emulated by the selected device name to devtype. However the bytes per track and tracks per cylinder are not correct for this DASD family. System action: These attributes are reset to the correct values. CPP0607001E INVALID Production DATE Explanation: You entered a date with an incorrect format. The date must be in the format DD/MM/YY. System programmer response: Resubmit the request with the correct date format. CPP0607002I OUTPUT Command is NOT AVAILABLE for NON-IBM Orders Explanation: You entered the OUTPUT command for a non-IBM order. Non-IBM orders are not installed using the installation dialog; there is no information to display. CPP0607003I OUTPUT Command is NOT AVAILABLE for an Order with Status(RECEIVED) Explanation: You entered the OUTPUT command for an order in RECEIVED status. However, there is no information to display because the installation jobs have not been run.

CPP0607004E Order ordernum is IBM Supplied, it Cannot be Deleted Explanation: You attempted to delete an IBM-supplied order ordernum. You cannot delete an IBM-supplied order after you have received it. System programmer response: To delete the order, receive it again with the replace option. CPP0607005I Order is Customer Added, it Has NO Product Information Explanation: You attempted to display the product information for a customer added order. However, such orders have no product information. CPP0607006I Order has NO Product Information Explanation: The order you selected has no product information to display. CPP0607007I Order is Customer Added, it Cannot be Installed Explanation: You attempted to install a customer added order through the installation dialog. However, you cannot install such orders through the dialog. CPP0607008W Order ordernum is IN USE By Another User, Try Again Later Explanation: The order you are attempting to install, ordernum, is currently in use by another user or session. System programmer response: Try again later. CPP0607010W This order cannot be selected because its status is Installed. To change the status, use Edit. Explanation: On the Order List panel, you entered a Select line command for an order whose status was set to Installed. Only orders with a status of Received, Started, or **Error** may be selected. System action: None System programmer response: To change the orders status, use the Edit line command to display the ORDER DETAILS panel, and set the status to Received or Started. CPP0607011I Delete Of Report Data set was Cancelled by User Explanation: You attempted to print the details of an order. However one or both of the following conditions occurred: v You specified a disposition of NEW, but the report data set already exists.
Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

211

v The DCB attributes of the report data set have changed These conditions require that the existing report data set be deleted. This required confirmation, which was refused. System programmer response: Review the report data set. CPP0607012E Report Data set NOT Deleted, ERROR ENCOUNTERED, RETURN CODE WAS rc_code Explanation: The dialog cannot delete the report data set. The TSO/E DELETE command issued return code rc_code. System action: The report is not deleted. System programmer response: Review the return code. A list of possible causes follows: v Data set is in use by another user. v Data set is protected by a security product v Data set is cataloged but does not exist on the cataloged volume. v Data set is archived by a storage product. Specify a different report data set name and try the request again. CPP0607013I Report Written to dsname Explanation: The order information was successfully written to the specified report data set dsname. System programmer response: None. CPP0607014E Report Data set NOT Allocated, reason Explanation: The dialog could not allocate the report data set. In the message, reason is one of the following: v Allocate failed v Error processing data set v Invalid data set name v Missing data set name v Protected data set v Unavailable data set v Unknown return code v Volume not on system System action: The report is not produced. System programmer response: Review the return code. A list of possible causes follows: v Data set is in use by another user. v Data set is protected by a security product v Data set is cataloged but does not exist on the cataloged volume. v Data set is archived by a storage product.

Correct the problem. Or, specify a different report data set name and try the request again. CPP0607015E Report NOT Produced, DCB of Report File is NOT Compatible with the Report Record. Explanation: The DCB of the report data set is not compatible with the report record. The report is written using fixed length 80 byte records. System action: The report is not produced. System programmer response: Check the DCB of the report data set. The LRECL must be one of the following: v LRECL=80, if an FB file is used v LRECL=84 or greater, if a VB file is used. CPP0607016E Report Data set is PARTITIONED, a DISPosition of MOD is INVALID Explanation: Your report data set is partitioned; you cannot specify a disposition of MOD with a PDS. System programmer response: Review the report data set disposition. CPP0607017I Synchronization DELETE has Completed Successfully ordernum Explanation: The order you have selected, ordernum, has been deleted by another user. System action: When you entered the installation dialog, a table was created for the current orders. It is possible that, while you were logged on: v New orders were received v Old orders were updated or deleted. These changes are not automatically available to you within the current invocation of the installation dialog. System programmer response: Periodically, enter the REFRESH primary command to reflect any changes made by other users to the order database. CPP0607018I Synchronization UPDATE has Completed Successfully ordernum Explanation: The order you have selected, ordernum, has been updated by another user. System action: When you entered the installation dialog, a table was created for the current orders. It is possible that, while you were logged on: v New orders were received v Old orders were updated or deleted. These changes are not automatically available to you within the current invocation of the installation dialog. System programmer response: Review your request, and resubmit if still required. Periodically, enter the REFRESH primary command to reflect any changes

212

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

made by other users to the order database. CPP0607019I Installation Dialogs Version DATE version Explanation: This message indicates the current version of the installation dialog. System programmer response: None. CPP0607020E Status Of status is NOT VALID for the Selected Order Explanation: You attempted to change the status of an order to status, which is not valid for the order. System programmer response: Choose a valid status code, as follows: I Installed R Received (not valid for a customer-added order). S Started CPP0607021I NO Orders in the Order Inventory, INSERT Forced or press END to Cancel Processing Explanation: The order inventory does not contain any orders, the insert facility has been forced so that you can define a customer added order. System programmer response: Define a customer added order or press the End key to cancel processing. CPP0607022I NO Orders Matched Your Selection Criteria Explanation: The order inventory was searched for orders with a status that matched your selection criteria, none were found, there is nothing to display. System programmer response: Review your selection criteria. CPP0607023I No orders have been received yet. Use the Receive option to receive an order. Explanation: You selected either the Install or Display option on the CustomPac Order Management Menu. However, because no orders have been received yet, there are none to install or display. System programmer response: Use the Receive option to receive an order. After it has been received, the Install and Display options will be available. CPP0607024I NO Orders Waiting to be Installed Explanation: There are no orders to be installed. System programmer response: If you wish to reinstall an order, use the Order Information option to

reset the orders status to RECEIVED. CPP0607025I Change of Status CANCELLED by User Explanation: You attempted to change the status of an order which would have caused a jump in status. This required confirmation, which was refused. The status was not changed. System programmer response: None. CPP0607026E Field Value Cannot be Changed UNLESS the Order Number is ALSO Changed Explanation: When copying an order, you must maintain the association between the order number and its related field values in the Order panel. For example, you cannot keep the same order number, but change the SREL. You have changed at least one of the following fields and have not changed the order number: v Profile number v SREL v PAC type v Customer number v Customer name System programmer response: If you wish to use the values you have entered in the fields, you must change the order number. Or, press End to cancel your copy request. CPP0607030E Message and Help Inventories for this order must be converted to VSAM. Explanation: The Message Inventory data set (SCPPEENU) and Help Inventory data set (SCPPHENU) for the order you selected are not VSAM data sets. The dialog requires that both data sets be VSAM. System action: None System programmer response: Convert the data sets to VSAM data sets. There is a sample job to convert them to VSAM in the CPPCVINV member of the SYS1.order_number.DOCLIB data set you use to change them to VSAM. CPP0607040E Invalid data set name, or data set name not specified Explanation: The OFILE OPEN data set name you specified is not valid. System programmer response: Correct the OFILE OPEN data set name.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

213

CPP0607041E Invalid member name Explanation: You entered the OFILE OPEN command with an incorrect member name. System programmer response: Reenter the command with the correct member name. CPP0607042E Invalid data set disposition, or none supplied (OLD, SHR, MOD, NEW) Explanation: The OFILE OPEN data set disposition is not valid, or the default of OLD was used and the data set does not exist. System programmer response: Correct the OFILE OPEN data set disposition. You can use OLD, SHR, NEW, or MOD. By default, the disposition is OLD. CPP0607043E Invalid data set disposition, NEW and MOD are not allowed for a member Explanation: The OFILE OPEN data set disposition was NEW or MOD, and you specified a member as part of the data set name. You must use OLD or SHR if you specify a member name. System programmer response: Correct the OFILE OPEN data set disposition. CPP0607044E Data set attributes are not compatible with the OFILE command Explanation: The OFILE data set has DCB attributes that are incompatible with the output record. System programmer response: Review the DCB attributes of the data set you are trying to use for the output of the OFILE command. The OFILE data set must be compatible with RECFM=F LRECL=120. CPP0607045I Data Set open successful Explanation: The OFILE output data set is open and available for your use. System programmer response: To write the data set list to the OFILE data set, enter the OFILE command without parameters. CPP0607046E Data Set open failed Explanation: The OFILE output data set was not allocated or failed to open correctly. System programmer response: If you attempted to open the data set as NEW, verify that the data set does not already exist. If you tried to open the data set as SHR or OLD, verify that the data set exists and is not in use by another user or job. Also, review the DCB attributes of the data set that you are attempting to use for the output of the OFILE

command. The OFILE data set must be compatible with RECFM=F LRECL=120. CPP0607047I OFILE data set is active dsname Explanation: The OFILE output data set dsname is open and available for your use. System programmer response: None. CPP0607048I Data Set closed Explanation: The OFILE output data set is now closed, and can be accessed by other users or jobs. System programmer response: None. CPP0607049E Data Set operation invalid or not specified (OPEN CLOSE) Explanation: You entered the OFILE command with an invalid operation. System programmer response: Reenter the OFILE command correctly, as follows: v To open the OFILE data set, enter OFILE OPEN data set.name disposition v To write the OFILE data set, enter OFILE without parameters v To close the OFILE data set, enter OFILE CLOSE CPP0607050I OFILE data set is not active (use OPEN) Explanation: You entered the OFILE write output data set command, but the output data set is not open. System programmer response: Use the OFILE OPEN command to open the output data set. Enter OFILE OPEN data set.name disposition. CPP0607051I Order details saved to dsname Explanation: The data set list has been written to data set dsname. System programmer response: Close the output data set through the OFILE CLOSE command. CPP0607052I Order details sent to ISPF list data set Explanation: The data set list has been written to the ISPF list data set. System programmer response: You can dynamically close the ISPF list data set through the ISPF LIST command. Otherwise, the data set is freed when your ISPF session is ended.

214

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CPP0608001E Order ordernum Already Exists on the Order Inventory and Cannot be Re-Added Explanation: The order you are receiving, ordernum, already exists on the order inventory. System action: An existing order cannot be re-added. System programmer response: Check that the batch job to receive the order has not already been run, maybe because of a system failure it has been re-started. Check the order using the Order Information function of the installation dialog. You might have to rerun the Order Receive function, specifying a REPLACE of the current order. CPP0608002I Order ordernum Has been Added to the Order Inventory Explanation: The order you are receiving, ordernum, has been successfully added to the Order Inventory. System programmer response: None. CPP0608003I Order ordernum has been Deleted, it will be REPLACED by the Received Order Explanation: You are receiving an order that will replace an existing order. System action: The existing order is deleted before the new order is added. System programmer response: None. CPP0608004I Order ordernum Was Specified as REPLACE, but was not found on the Order Inventory. A NEW Order will be Added Explanation: You specified that an existing order, ordernum, was to be replaced by the received order, but the existing order was not found in the order inventory. System action: The received order is added as a new order. System programmer response: None. CPP0608005E Table table-id Does NOT Exist in the Order SCPPTENU Table Library Explanation: The table table-id, which forms part of your order shipment, is missing from the SCPPTENU library. table-id can be either of the following: CPPOTBL Order information table CPPNTBL Products table System action: The order cannot be installed. System programmer response: Check the receive

job to ensure the order libraries were allocated correctly and were loaded with data. If you cannot resolve the problem, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0608006E Product prodname, Already Exists on the Order Inventory for the Current Order and Cannot be Re-Added Explanation: Product prodname already exists in the order inventory of the order you are installing. You cannot re-add an existing product for the same order. System action: None. System programmer response: Check that the batch job to receive the order has not already been run (perhaps, it was restarted after a system failure). Check the order using the Order Information function of the installation dialog. You might need to rerun the Order Receive function, specifying a replacement the current order. CPP0608007I Product prodname Has been Added to the Order Inventory Explanation: For the received order, product prodname was added to the order inventory. System programmer response: None. CPP0608008I Order has NO Products for Package pac-type Explanation: Your received order has no products; this situation is normal situation when pac-type is one of the following: v CRMO v OMIS v SFS System programmer response: If you expected your order to have products, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0608009E Order Number ordernum1 Passed to Program Does NOT Match the Order Number ordernum2 From the Order Table CPPOTBL. Explanation: The order number you specified for receive processing ordernum1 does not match the order number ordernum2 shipped by IBM in the order table CPPOTBL. System programmer response: Try again to receive the order, specifying the correct order number.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

215

CPP0610001E Invalid ORDER Number, MUST be 2 Alpha plus 6 Numeric Characters Explanation: You entered an incorrect order number. System programmer response: Enter the IBM order number. This must be two alphabetic characters (A-Z), plus six numeric (0-9) characters. CPP0610002E MEMBER name is not Allowed Explanation: You entered a member name as part of the qualifier or data set name, this is not allowed. System programmer response: Correct your entry by removing the member name. CPP0610005I RECEIVE Job NOT SUBMITTED Explanation: You pressed the END key while using the Generate Jobstream panel. Doing so cancels the generation of the installation jobs. System action: The receive job was not submitted. System programmer response: To generate the receive job, press Enter in the Generate Jobstream panel. CPP0610006I RECEIVE Of Order CANCELLED Explanation: One of the following conditions exists: v Existing order records were found, and you entered the cancel command while in the Order Selection panel. v Existing order data sets were found which needed to be deleted. This required confirmation, which you refused. System action: The order was not received. System programmer response: None. CPP0610007I RECEIVE Job SUBMITTED Explanation: The receive job was correctly generated and automatically submitted to the JES execution queue. System programmer response: None. CPP0610009E HLQ is used for an existing Order, Specify another HLQ Explanation: You entered the same high level qualifier (HLQ) for more than one order, which is not allowed. System programmer response: Enter a unique HLQ that you can use to allocate the order libraries. IBM recommends that you include your order number as part of the qualifier to ensure that it is unique.

CPP0610014E Order qualifiers must be different from master dialog qualifiers. Explanation: The qualifier or qualifiers you entered for the orders dialog data sets was the same as the qualifiers for the master dialog data sets. The master and order dialog data sets must have different qualifiers. System action: None System programmer response: Choose a different qualifier for the orders data sets. IBM recommends using the order number as one of the qualifiers for the orders data sets and naming the master data sets without using an order qualifier. CPP0610016E Server name or address format not valid. Specify a fully-qualified server name or a valid server address. Explanation: You entered an invalid address or a server name. System action: None System programmer response: Either enter the name of an FTP server or specify a valid IPV4, IPV6, or mixed-style address. The valid format for URLs is documented in RFC 959 and RFC 1123. ServerPac supports only the entry of the hname part of the URL. IPV6 addresses are fully documented in RFC 1884, and have the general format: xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx, where each xxxx value is the character representation of a hexadecimal sixteen-byte value (for example, FFFF represents X'FFFF'). IPV4 addresses are in the general form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where each nnn value is a decimal number from 0-255. Mixed-style addressing is documented in the same topic of the RFC, and has the general format: xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where xxxx and nnn are defined as above. Abbreviated forms (as described by the RFC) are also acceptable. CPP0610018E Enter EITHER a volume serial or a STORCLAS. Explanation: On the Receive An Order Options panel, either: v You entered a volume serial and a STORCLAS, or, v You did not enter a volume serial or a STORCLAS. Data is required in one of these field. System action: None System programmer response: Enter data in one, and only one, of these two fields. For a

216

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

non-SMS-managed data set, enter the volume serial for an online volume and leave the STORCLAS field blank. For an SMS-managed data set, specify a STORCLAS that is defined on your system, and leave the Volume Serial field blank. CPP0610019E Not enough space on volume volser. nnnnn cylinders free, nnnnn cylinders required. Explanation: The volume you specified does not have enough space for the data set size you specified. The volume serial you specified, the volume free space, and the amount of space you specified are contained in the message. System action: None System programmer response: If you specified more space than is required, try specifying less space. Otherwise, specify a volume with enough free space to allocate the data set. CPP0610020E Volume not found online. Specify an online volume. Explanation: The volume you specified is not online. System action: None System programmer response: Either specify an online volume, or use the VARY command to bring the specified volume online. CPP0610021I Table in use. Try again in a few minutes. Explanation: One of the tables used on this panel is in use by another user or batch job. System action: None System programmer response: Wait a few minutes and try again. If the condition persists, determine which user or batch job is using the master dialog tables. Get the user or job to release the tables and then try again. CPP0610022E This data set already exists. Explanation: You entered Y for Allocate a new file system data set, but the data set name you specified already exists. System action: None System programmer response: Do one of the following: v Specify a unique name for the new data set v Delete or rename the existing data set and then return to the panel and proceed v Specify N for Allocate a new file system data set to use the existing data set.

CPP0610023E The target directory must be the same as the mount point or a subdirectory of the mount point. Explanation: The target directory cannot be created in the path specified by the mount point. System action: None System programmer response: Specify a target directory that is either the same as the mount point or a subdirectory of the mount point. CPP0611001E Cannot Change the Variable Contents, The Variable is CUSTOMISED Explanation: You attempted to change the value of a customized variable. These variables, as shipped by the CustomPac build process, contain fixed data, such as the order number. You cannot change the values of customized variables. System action: None; the original value is used. CPP0611002E You are NOT Allowed to Change the Variable Contents when a Line Command is Issued, Contents Preserved Explanation: You entered a line command and also attempted to change the data value of the variable, which caused a command conflict. The data value was not changed. System action: None. System programmer response: Enter the line command with the data value unchanged. CPP0611003E INVALID Status status Explanation: You entered the SHOW command with an incorrect status. Valid status values are: * All status values C CUSTOMIZED D DEFAULT E ERASED I INSERTED P PRE-DEFINED U USER-DEFINED System programmer response: Reenter the SHOW command with a valid status value. CPP0611004E Literal ==> is RESERVED for use by CustomPac, It Cannot be used in a User Defined Variable Explanation: You used the literal ==> within the Synonym field when defining a User Defined variable. This literal is reserved for use by CustomPac. System programmer response: Change the contents
Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

217

of the Synonym field so that it does not contain the literal ==>. CPP0611005I RESTORE Request Successful Explanation: You restored the variable to its shipped value. System programmer response: None. CPP0611006I RESTORE Request Cancelled Explanation: You requested that the variable be restored to its shipped value. This was not done, however, because you did not confirm your request. System programmer response: None. CPP0611007I Changes to the TABLE have been SAVED Explanation: Your changes to the installation variables were saved. System programmer response: None. CPP0611008I Processing CANCELLED by User <changes> Explanation: You entered the CANCEL command. Your changes to the installation variables were discarded. <changes> might show more information, such as the message: CHANGES TO THE TABLE WERE NOT SAVED. System programmer response: None.

CPP0612001W User JOB member-name EXISTS as a member of the File Tailoring Library, REVIEW The Contents of the Member Explanation: You attempted to insert a user-defined job into the order skeleton library. However, a member already exists with the same name as the one you are trying to add. The contents of the existing member are displayed. System action: This is not necessarily an error. It may be that the job previously existed, but was deleted without physically deleting the member. System programmer response: Review the contents of the member. Determine whether to use the existing member as the target of your inserted job. You will be prompted at a later stage to confirm that this member is to be used. CPP0612002W User JOB member-name EXISTS (with NO records) as a member of the File Tailoring Library Explanation: You attempted to insert a user-defined job into the order skeleton library. However, a member already exists with the same name as the one you are trying to add. An attempt was made to display the contents of the member, but it contained no records. System action: This might not be an error. The job might have existed previously, but was deleted without physically deleting the member. System programmer response: Determine whether to use the null member as the target for the inserted job. CPP0612003E Command is Only Valid for JOBs

CPP0611009E Enter an acceptable value for synonym. Explanation: The value you entered for the variable displayed on the panel is not allowed. It is displayed in the Current Value field. System action: None. System programmer response: Enter one of the acceptable values listed on the panel. CPP0611010E Enter value for synonym. Explanation: You entered a blank or null value for the variable displayed on the panel. This field cannot be left blank. System action: None. System programmer response: Enter one of the acceptable values listed on the panel.

Explanation: You entered a line command for an entry that is not a job. The command is valid for jobs only. System programmer response: Review your selection. CPP0612004I This JOB Does NOT Exist in the Backup Data set Explanation: You requested that the job stored in the backup library be used. However, the job does not exist in the backup library. System programmer response: Review your selection. CPP0612005S JOBCARD NOT FOUND OR INVALID Explanation: You attempted to file tailor a job, but the jobcard member is missing or incorrect. System programmer response: For the name of the jobcard member, check installation variable F90GXX04. If the jobcard member exists in the order skeleton

218

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

library, the skeleton probably contains incorrect file tailoring commands. In particular, look for < & | > in the jobcard programmer name field. CPP0612006S SEVERE ERROR Encountered Whilst Attempting to File Tailor JOB/DOC (STEP=stepname) Explanation: An error was encountered during file tailoring of a job for step stepname. System programmer response: Review the skeletons that you used to create the job. It is unlikely that the problem lies in a shipped CustomPac skeleton, so look first at user defined jobs. In particular, look for < & | > characters, which have a special meaning to ISPF. CPP0612007E INVALID Parameter parm, Command Format is SS$, SS$ INCLUDE or SS$ EXCLUDE Explanation: You entered the SS$ command with an incorrect parameter, which is indicated by parm. The following parameters are valid: v SS$ (which reverses the current value) v SS$ EXCLUDE v SS$ INCLUDE System programmer response: Enter the command with a valid parameter. CPP0612008E NO Other Commands may be entered when the SS Block Command is being used Explanation: You entered line command SS to select a sequence of jobs to build the installation jobstream, but you also entered other line commands, which caused a command conflict. System programmer response: Review your selection. CPP0612009I SS Block Command Processed, BUT NO JOBs were Selected Explanation: You entered line command SS to select a sequence of jobs to build the installation jobstream, but the sequence contained no jobs. Or, you specified EXCLUDE for the SS$ command and the sequence contained only user-defined jobs. System programmer response: Review your selection. CPP0612010I ENTER a Matching SS Command to Complete the Block Command Pair Explanation: You entered line command SS to select a sequence of jobs to build the installation jobstream, but you did not specify an ending SS command.

System programmer response: Enter an ending SS line command. CPP0612011I SS Command Conflicts with a Previous SS Command, DELETE ONE Explanation: You entered line command SS to select a sequence of jobs to build the installation jobstream, but you specified more than one pair of SS commands, which caused a command conflict. System programmer response: Review your selection. CPP0612012I NO Job Output Found in the Output Library Explanation: You entered the SUMMARY command before running any jobs. There is no output to browse. System programmer response: None. CPP0612013W A BACKUP Member ALREADY Exists for this JOB Explanation: The job you selected for file tailoring has a backup member in the SCPPBENU data set. System programmer response: Submit the job. Or, press the End key and enter line command B to display the backup version of the job. CPP0612014E ERROR Storing Output in SCPPOENU Explanation: The TSO/E OUTPUT command encountered an error while storing the held output for the selected job. Possible causes include: v The output from the job is too large. You entered line command SS to create a job with multiple steps. v The output library SCPPOENU is full or has run out of directory blocks. v The held output is incomplete. System programmer response: If you have a spool browsing utility, use it to investigate. If you use ISPF Option 3.8, it is possible that the error that caused this message will force an error in that utility also. CPP0612015E ERROR Browsing Output in SCPPOENU Explanation: An error occurred while trying to browse the member in SCPPOENU that contains the held job output from the selected job. System programmer response: This error has several possible causes: v An error occurred while storing the held job output.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

219

v The member that contains the job output exists, but is zero length (contains no records). CPP0612016E A Member Name is NOT Allowed Explanation: You entered the GENSKEL command, and on one of the subsequent panels, you specified an ISPF library name with a member name in parentheses. This is not allowed. System programmer response: Specify the library name without specifying a member. CPP0612017I GENskel Command Cancelled by USER Explanation: You entered the GENSKEL command to file tailor the installation jobs in batch mode; however, you ended GENSKEL processing prematurely by pressing the END key. System programmer response: To tailor the installation jobs in batch mode, enter the GENSKEL command. CPP0612020I Job removed from selection list and is deleted from the skeleton data set. Explanation: You deleted a user-defined job from the system. The dialogs Job Selection List panel is updated to show the deletion. Also, the job is deleted from the skeleton data set (SCPPSENU) in which it resided. System programmer response: None. CPP0612021I Job removed from selection list, but is retained in the skeleton data set. Explanation: You deleted a user-defined job from the dialogs Job Selection List panel. The job is retained in the skeleton data set (SCPPSENU) because you did not request deletion of the job. To delete a user-defined job, you must specify Y in the Delete Skeleton field when you confirm your deletion request (you cannot delete an IBMsupplied job). System programmer response: None, unless you also want to delete the job itself. Here, you must edit the SCPPSENU data set to remove the job. CPP0612022W Job removed from selection list, but could not be deleted. Data set is in use or allocated by another job or user. Explanation: You deleted a job from the Job Selection List, but the dialog could not delete the job from the SCPPSENU data set. A possible cause is that another user or job is currently accessing the SCPPSENU data set. To process this request, the dialog requires exclusive access to the SCPPSENU data set. System programmer response: If you want to delete

the job, exit the dialog and edit the SCPPSENU data set to remove the job. CPP0612040E INVALID Data set Name or Data set Name Not Defined Explanation: The OFILE OPEN data set name you have entered is not valid. System programmer response: Correct the OFILE OPEN data set name. CPP0612041E INVALID Member Name Explanation: You entered the OFILE OPEN command with an incorrect member name. System programmer response: Reenter the command with the correct member name. CPP0612042E INVALID Data set DISPosition or NOT Supplied (OLD, SHR, NEW, MOD) Explanation: The OFILE OPEN data set disposition is not valid, or the default of OLD was used and the data set does not exist. System programmer response: Correct the OFILE OPEN data set disposition. You can use OLD, SHR, NEW, or MOD. By default, the disposition is OLD. CPP0612043E INVALID Data set DISPosition NEW and MOD are NOT allowed for a MEMBER Explanation: The OFILE OPEN data set disposition was NEW or MOD, and you specified a member as part of the data set name. You must use OLD or SHR if you specify a member name. System programmer response: Correct the OFILE OPEN data set disposition. CPP0612044E Data set ATTRIBUTES are INCOMPATIBLE with the OFILE Command Explanation: The OFILE data set has DCB attributes that are incompatible with the output record. System programmer response: Review the DCB attributes of the data set you are trying to use for the output of the OFILE command. The OFILE data set must be compatible with RECFM=F LRECL=120. CPP0612045I Data set OPEN SUCCESSFUL Explanation: The OFILE output data set is open and available for your use. System programmer response: To write the data set list to the OFILE data set, enter the OFILE command without parameters.

220

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CPP0612046E Data set OPEN FAILED Explanation: The OFILE output data set was not allocated or failed to open correctly. System programmer response: If you attempted to open the data set as NEW, verify that the data set does not already exist. If you tried to open the data set as SHR or OLD, verify that the data set exists and is not in use by another user or job. Also, review the DCB attributes of the data set that you are attempting to use for the output of the OFILE command. The OFILE data set must be compatible with RECFM=F LRECL=120. CPP0612047I OFILE Output Data set IS ACTIVE dsname Explanation: The OFILE output data set dsname is open and available for your use. System programmer response: None. CPP0612048I Data set CLOSED Explanation: The OFILE output data set is now closed, and can be accessed by other users or jobs. System programmer response: None. CPP0612049E Data set OPERATION INVALID or NOT DEFINED (OPEN CLOSE) Explanation: You entered the OFILE command incorrectly. System programmer response: Reenter the OFILE command correctly, as follows: v To open the OFILE data set, enter OFILE OPEN data set.name disposition v To write the OFILE data set, enter OFILE without parameters v To close the OFILE data set, enter OFILE CLOSE CPP0612050I OFILE Output Data set is NOT ACTIVE (Use OPEN) Explanation: You entered the OFILE write output data set command, but the output data set is not open. System programmer response: Use the OFILE OPEN command to open the output data set. Enter OFILE OPEN data set.name disposition. CPP0612051I Installation Job List SAVED to dsname Explanation: You used the dialogs OFILE primary command to write a list of the installation jobs to the user-defined file, dsname. System programmer response: To close the output data set, use the OFILE CLOSE command.

CPP0612052I Installation Job List SENT to ISPF LIST Data Set Explanation: You used the dialogs OLIST primary command to write a list of the installation jobs to the ISPF LIST data set. System programmer response: To close the ISPF list data set now, use the ISPF LIST command. Otherwise, the data set will be released when you end the ISPF session. CPP0612099S A JOB WAS SUBMITTED BUT THE SUBMIT TRAP COULD NOT INTERPRET THE DATA. Explanation: On submission, your job issued a message that could not be read by the dialog. System action: The Installation Jobs function of the dialog cannot run. System programmer response: If you have a SUBMIT exit active, disable it, or submit the job outside of the dialog. Otherwise, contact IBM for assistance in determining the actual message text and cause of failure. CPP0615001I Order ordernum Status Set to INSTALLED Explanation: The status of order ordernum is now set to INSTALLED. You cannot reenter the dialog for this order until you reset its status to RECEIVED. System programmer response: None. CPP0615002I Order ordernum Status is Already INSTALLED or FINALIZED Explanation: The status of order ordernum was already set to INSTALLED or FINALIZED. You cannot re-enter the dialog for this order unless you reset its status to RECEIVED. System programmer response: None. CPP0616001S LIBRARY(library-name) Version Member member-name Does NOT Exist Explanation: In the Upgrade Installation Dialog panel, you specified Starter SET N, which requires that version members already exist from a previous upgrade. However, library library-name does not contain a version member member-name. System programmer response: In the Upgrade Installation Dialog panel, specify Starter SET Y to create the version member.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

221

CPP0616002S NO VERSION Date For LIBRARY(library-name) Explanation: The version member in library library-name does not contain a version date. You cannot install the order. System programmer response: The order shipment tape might contain corrupt libraries. Re-receive the order. If the problem reoccurs, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0616003S INVALID VERSION Date (version) For LIBRARY(library) Explanation: The version member in library has an incorrect version date, version. The order cannot be installed. System programmer response: The order shipment tape might contain corrupt libraries. Re-receive the order. If the problem reoccurs, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0616004S Order Libraries Have Different VERSION Dates Explanation: The version members shipped as part of your order have different version dates. The order cannot be installed. System programmer response: The order shipment tape may contain corrupt libraries. Re-receive the order. If the problem persists, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0616005S LIBRARY(library) Version Reference to Member member-name, Which DOES NOT EXIST Explanation: The version member in library references a member member-name, which does not exist. The order cannot be installed. System programmer response: If the library is one of your CustomPac master libraries, it may be corrupted. You might have to restore it from your system backups. If the library is one of the libraries unloaded from the order shipment tape, the order shipment tape might contain corrupt libraries. Receive the order again. If the problem reoccurs, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0616006E A Member Name is NOT Allowed Explanation: You defined the data set name of one of your installations ISPF libraries, but have included a member name as part of the data set name. A member name is not allowed. System programmer response: Enter the data set name without the member name.

CPP0616007I Version UPGRADE Cancelled, Order Can NOT be Installed Until the Upgrade Has Completed Explanation: The order you are trying to install requires that the installation dialog be upgraded to a later version. However, you canceled the upgrade. System action: You cannot install the order unless you the allow the upgrade to complete. System programmer response: Review your reasons for cancelling the upgrade. Select INSTALL again, or contact IBM for assistance. CPP0616009E Invalid DATE, must be YYYYMMDD . . . YYYY must be 1994 or Greater . . . MM and DD must be valid and compatible Explanation: You specified the date incorrectly, for example: v You did not enter the full year, such as 2003 v The month and day are not valid v You entered a date earlier than January 1, 1994. System programmer response: Specify a valid date in the format YYYYMMDD. Or, specify an * (asterisk) to use the current date. CPP0616010I Installation Dialogs Version Date version. Explanation: The current version of the installation dialog is displayed. System programmer response: None. CPP0621001S First parameter parm is invalid. Processing stopped. Explanation: An invalid parameter, parm, was specified for the CPPERCDS exec. System action: Processing stops. System programmer response: If the failure occurred in the VERIFY job, ensure that CHECK is the first parameter that is passed to the CPPERCDS exec. If the failure occurred in the RECATDS job, ensure that CREATE is the first parameter that is passed to the CPPERCDS exec. Rerun the step that invokes exec CPPERCDS. CPP0621002E High level qualifier hlq cannot be defined in both existing catalog oldcat and catalog configcat in the configuration. Explanation: High level qualifier, hlq, is currently defined in a user catalog, oldcat, that does not match the name of the catalog in your configuration, configcat.

222

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

System action: Processing continues. System programmer response: Do one of the following: v If the high level qualifier is defined in the correct existing catalog, use the Alias option of the installation dialog to change the catalog name identified for this high level qualifier. v If the high level qualifier is to be defined in the configuration catalog, delete the alias that points to the high level qualifier in the driving system. Restart the job that contains the step that failed. CPP0621003S The entry for target system master catalog tmcat could not be read successfully from dmcat. Explanation: Access method services issued a nonzero return code when CPPERCDS attempted to retrieve the entry for the target system master catalog. In the message, the variables are as follows: tmcat Target system master catalog name dmcat Driving system master catalog name System action: Processing stops. System programmer response: Determine whether the driving systems master catalog contains an entry for the target system master catalog. If no entry exists, use the access method services IMPORT CONNECT command to create an entry for the target system master catalog. If an entry exists for the target system master catalog, run the access method services VERIFY command for the driving system master catalog. If VERIFY detects problems, resolve the problems before continuing. Otherwise, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0621004E High level qualifier hlq cannot be in both existing target system master catalog tmcat and catalog configcat in the configuration. Explanation: High level qualifier, hlq, is currently defined in the master catalog, tmcat, which does not match the name of the catalog in your configuration, configcat. System action: Processing continues. System programmer response: Do one of the following: v If the high level qualifier is defined in the correct existing catalog, use the Alias option of the installation dialog to change the catalog name for the high level qualifier to match the name that was returned from the existing catalog entry.

v If the high level qualifier is to be defined in the configuration catalog, delete or move the data sets having this high level qualifier from the master catalog. Rerun the step that invokes exec CPPERCDS. CPP0621005I New high level qualifier hlq is associated with catalog configcat in the configuration. Explanation: High level qualifier, hlq, is new. In the message, configcat is the name of the configuration catalog. System action: Processing continues. System programmer response: Take any actions required for a new high level qualifier at your installation, such as creating a new security system definition. CPP0621006E Device type oldunit for data set dsname in catalog configcat does not match configuration volume device type configunit for physical volume configvol. Explanation: Unit in the catalog entry does not match the unit specified in the configuration for the specified physical volume. In the message, the variables are as follows: oldunit Device type from existing catalog entry dsname Data set name configcat Configuration catalog name configunit Unit from configuration configvol VOLSER from configuration System action: Processing continues. System programmer response: Do one of the following: v If the unit value in the configuration for the volume on which this data set resides is incorrect, use the installation dialog to change it. Observe the following: If this message was issued by the VERIFY job, you must file tailor all jobs again. If you used the GENSKEL primary command to file tailor the jobs, use GENSKEL again. Rerun the step that invokes exec CPPERCDS. If this message was issued by the RECATDS job, rerun the installation jobs starting with the VERIFY job. Otherwise, subsequent job steps will fail. v If the unit value is changing in the catalog entry, determine whether the change affects data set entries in catalogs on an active system. If so, determine whether to make copies of the affected catalogs and then change the copies.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

223

For information about making copies of catalogs, see z/OS DFSMS Managing Catalogs. CPP0621007E Volume oldvol for data set dsname in catalog configcat does not match configuration volume configvol. Explanation: The VOLSER in the catalog entry does not match the VOLSER specified in the configuration. In the message, oldvol dsname configcat configvol the variables are as follows: VOLSER from existing catalog entry Data set name Configuration catalog name VOLSER from configuration

v If the symbol specified in P2IMAP is incorrect, edit the P2IMAP member of the orderhlq.SCPPSENU data set and correct the symbol. Rerun the step that invokes exec CPPERCDS. v If the symbol specified in P2IMAP is correct, the catalog entry is changing. Determine whether the change affects any data set entries in catalogs on an active system. If so, determine whether to make copies of the affected catalogs and then change the copies. For information about making copies of catalogs, see z/OS DFSMS Managing Catalogs. CPP0621009E Data set dsname in catalog configcat was indirectly cataloged using symbol oldvol. However, the catalog entry will be changed from indirect because no symbol was defined for physical volume configvol in P2IMAP. Explanation: Indirect cataloging is used for existing entry dsname. However, a symbol was not specified in P2IMAP for the physical volume on which this data set resides. As a result, the data set entry is no longer cataloged with indirect referencing. In the message, dsname configcat oldvol configvol the variables are as follows: Data set name Configuration catalog name VOLSER from existing catalog entry VOLSER from configuration

System action: Processing continues. System programmer response: Do the following: v If the volume in the configuration on which this data set resides is incorrect, use the installation dialog to change it. Observe the following: If this message was issued by the VERIFY job, you must file tailor all jobs again. If you used the GENSKEL primary command to file tailor the jobs, use GENSKEL again. Rerun the step that invokes exec CPPERCDS. If this message was issued by the RECATDS job, rerun the installation jobs starting with the VERIFY job. Otherwise, subsequent job steps will fail. v If the volume value is changing in the catalog entry, determine whether the change affects data set entries in catalogs on an active system. If so, determine whether to make copies of the affected catalogs and then change the copies. For information about making copies of catalogs, see z/OS DFSMS Managing Catalogs. CPP0621008E Volume oldvol for data set dsname in catalog configcat does not match symbol symvol that was defined in P2IMAP for physical volume configvol. Explanation: An existing data set entry is indirectly cataloged. The symbol that is specified in the existing data set entry does not match the symbol specified in P2IMAP for the physical volume on which this data set resides. In the message, oldvol dsname configcat symvol configvol the variables are as follows: VOLSER from existing catalog entry Data set name Configuration catalog name Symbol for extended indirect cataloging VOLSER from configuration.

System action: Processing continues. System programmer response: Do one of the following: v If the physical volume in the P2IMAP member of the orderhlq.SCPPSENU data set requires a symbol, add one. Rerun the step that invokes exec CPPERCDS. v If no symbol is required, determine whether the change to direct catalog referencing affects any data set entries in catalogs on an active system. If so, determine whether to make copies of the affected catalogs and then change the copies. For information about making copies of catalogs, see z/OS DFSMS Managing Catalogs. CPP0621010S The entry for target system master catalog tmcat could not be read successfully from tmcat. Explanation: Access method services issued a nonzero return code when CPPERCDS attempted to retrieve the entry for the target systems master catalog, tmcat. System action: Processing stops. System programmer response: Ensure that the volume on which the target system master catalog resides is online and available. If so, run the access method services VERIFY command for the target

System action: Processing continues. System programmer response: Do one of the following:

224

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

systems master catalog. If VERIFY detects problems, correct the problems before continuing. Otherwise, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0621011S The user catalog entry for configcat could not be read successfully from the target system master catalog tmcat. Explanation: Access method services issued a nonzero return code when CPPERCDS attempted to retrieve the user catalog entry for the configuration catalog. In the message, the variables are as follows: configcat Configuration catalog name tmcat Target system master catalog name System action: Processing stops. System programmer response: Determine whether the target systems master catalog contains a user catalog entry for the configuration catalog. If no entry exists, use the access method services IMPORT CONNECT command to create an entry for the user catalog. Rerun the step that invokes exec CPPERCDS. If an entry exists for the user catalog, run the access method services VERIFY command for the driving system master catalog. If VERIFY detects problems, correct the problems before continuing. Otherwise, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0621012S Symbol symvol is not valid for a non-IPL volume. Explanation: Either ****** or &SYSR1 was specified for a physical volume that is not the IPL volume. symvol is the symbol that is used for indirect catalog referencing. System action: Processing stops. System programmer response: Edit the P2IMAP member of the orderhlq.SCPPSENU data set and specify the correct symbol. Rerun the step that invokes exec CPPERCDS. CPP0621013S Symbol symvol is not valid for physical volume configvol. Explanation: An invalid symbol was specified. In the message, the variables are as follows: symvol Symbol for indirect catalog referencing configvol VOLSER in configuration. The following syntax is checked for the symbol: v If the first character is an asterisk, the value must be six asterisks (******). v If the first character is an ampersand, the value must be between two and six characters long. The second character must be an alphabetic. Each subsequent character must be alphanumeric.

System action: Processing stops. System programmer response: Edit the P2IMAP member of the orderhlq.SCPPSENU data set and specify a valid symbol. Rerun the step that invokes exec CPPERCDS. CPP0621014S Physical volume configvol is not defined in P2IMAP. Explanation: Physical volume was not defined. configvol is the volumes VOLSER. System action: Processing stops. System programmer response: Edit the P2IMAP member of the orderhlq.SCPPSENU data set and add any necessary entries for volumes that were defined in your configuration and their associated symbols. Rerun the step that invokes exec CPPERCDS. CPP0621015S The user catalog entry for configcat could not be read successfully from the driving system master catalog dmcat. Explanation: Access method services issued a nonzero return code when CPPERCDS attempted to retrieve the user catalog entry for the configuration catalog. In the message, the variables are as follows: configcat Name of the configuration catalog dmcat Name of the driving systems master catalog. System action: Processing stops. System programmer response: Determine whether the driving systems master catalog contains a user catalog entry for the configuration catalog. If no entry exists, use the access method services IMPORT CONNECT command to create an entry for the user catalog. Rerun the step that invokes exec CPPERCDS. If an entry exists for the user catalog, run the access method services VERIFY command for the driving system master catalog. If VERIFY detects problems, correct the problems before continuing. Otherwise, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0621016S The entry for configcat could not be successfully read from configcat. Explanation: Access method services issued a nonzero return code when CPPERCDS attempted to retrieve the entry for the configuration catalog, configcat. System action: Processing stops. System programmer response: Ensure that the volume on which the configuration catalog resides is online and available. If so, run access method services VERIFY command against the configuration catalog. If VERIFY detects problems, correct the problems before
Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

225

continuing. Otherwise, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0621017S Data set SCPPSENU does not contain the P2IMAP member. Explanation: Member P2IMAP is not accessible. System action: Processing stops. System programmer response: Rerun the P2IMAP step in the VERIFY job. Then, rerun the step that invokes exec CPPERCDS. CPP0621018S Two parameters must be specified. Explanation: Two parameters were not specified as input to CPPERCDS. System action: Processing stops. System programmer response: Ensure that two parameters are specified on the invocation of exec CPPERCDS. Then, rerun the step that invokes exec CPPERCDS. CPP0621019I A new indirect catalog entry is being created for data set dsname in user catalog configcat. Explanation: A new indirect catalog entry is being created for data set dsname in user catalog, configcat. System action: Processing continues. System programmer response: Determine whether the indirect catalog entries should exist in the specified user catalog. If not, select the Alias Option of the dialog and change the name of the catalog for this data set high level qualifier to the name of the master catalog. Then, rerun the step that invokes exec CPPERCDS. CPP0621020S ISPF Table access error performing task. Explanation: ISPF issued a high return code when CPPERCDS invoked it through ISPF table command, task. System action: Processing stops. System programmer response: Contact IBM for assistance. CPP0621021S The entry for the driving system master catalog dmcat could not be successfully read. Explanation: Access method services issued a nonzero return code when CPPERCDS attempted to retrieve information about the driving systems master catalog, dmcat. System action: Processing stops. System programmer response: Determine whether

the driving systems master catalog name is correct. If so, run the access method services VERIFY command for the driving systems master catalog. If VERIFY detects a problem, correct it before continuing. Otherwise, contact IBM for assistance. If the driving system master catalog name is incorrect, do the following: v Use the VAR primary command in the Install option of the installation dialog. v Find the prompt for the driving system master catalog (OLD CAT). v Enter the correct driving system master catalog name. You must file tailor the job again (through line command S or the GENSKEL primary command) to use the new master catalog name. Also, file tailor any other jobs that use this variable. Rerun the job that failed. CPP0621022E An existing SMS-managed data set named dsname was found in catalog configcat. Explanation: A data set in the configuration has the same name as an existing SMS-managed data set, which is cataloged in the configuration catalog. A subsequent job step will uncatalog the existing SMS-managed data set, making it inaccessible. System action: Processing continues. System programmer response: You must do either of the following: v Rename the data set in the configuration v Rename the existing SMS-managed data set. If you change the configuration, you must rerun the installation jobs you created through the installation dialog. If you used the GENSKEL command to file tailor the jobs, you must use GENSKEL again before rerunning the jobs. CPP0621023E Data set dsname in catalog configcat was indirectly cataloged using symbol oldvol. However, this data set is SMS-managed in the configuration. Explanation: The catalog entry for this data set will be changed to a direct entry in a later jobstep because SMS-managed data sets cannot have indirect catalog entries. System action: Processing continues. System programmer response: If you want the existing data set dsname to remain indirectly cataloged, do one of the following: v Rename the existing data set. v Rename the data set in the configuration.

226

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

v Change the data set in the configuration from SMS-managed to non-managed. Then, in member P2IMAP, define the symbol for the volume on which this data set is to reside. Determine whether the change affects data set entries in catalogs on an active system. If so, determine whether to make copies of the affected catalogs and then change the copies. If you change the configuration, you must rerun the installation jobs you created through the installation dialog. If you used the GENSKEL command to file tailor the jobs, you must use GENSKEL again before rerunning the jobs. CPP0621024E A non-SMS entry was found for data set dsname in catalog configcat, but this data set is SMS-managed in the configuration. Explanation: The catalog entry for this data set will be changed to an SMS-managed entry in a later job step. System action: Processing continues. System programmer response: If you want the existing data set to remain accessible through the catalog, you must do either of the following: v Rename the existing data set v Rename the data set in the configuration. If you change the configuration, you must rerun the installation jobs you created through the installation dialog. If you used the GENSKEL command to file tailor the jobs, you must use GENSKEL again before rerunning the jobs. CPP0623001I Report output has been saved in data set dsname

the description of message IDC3009I in z/OS MVS System Messages, Vol 6 (GOS-IEA). Correct the problem and follow the failing jobs restart instructions. CPP0624002E Unexpected catalog entry found for data_set_name in catalog catalog_name Explanation: The CPPEDSN program found a catalog entry with the same name as a data set that is to be allocated. Because there is already an entry for data set data_set_name in catalog catalog_name, it would not be possible to catalog this data set if it were to be allocated. System action: CPPEDSN sets the return code to 8 and continues. System programmer response: Either the data set exists and is cataloged, or it does not exist and there is a catalog entry for it. The data set cannot already exist on the volume on which it is to be allocated, nor can there be a catalog entry for the data set in the catalog to be used to allocate the new data set. Use one of the following methods to resolve this error condition: v If the existing data set cannot be renamed or deleted along with its catalog entry, or the existing catalog entry cannot be deleted, do the following: Use the installation dialog to rename the new data set, change its SSA, or specify a different catalog for the data sets SSA or high level qualifier. If you previously used the GENSKEL command to tailor all of the jobs at one time, rerun the GENSKEL command. Rerun the installation jobstream from the beginning. v If the existing data set can be renamed or deleted along with its catalog entry, or the existing catalog entry can be deleted, correct the problem (for example, by renaming the data set and its catalog entry, or deleting it) and follow the failing jobs restart instructions. CPP0624003E Data set data_set_name to be allocated has already been allocated on volume volume. Explanation: The CPPEDSN program checked the volume on which the data set identified in the message was to be allocated, and found that a data set with the same name already exists on the volume. System action: CPPEDSN sets the return code to 8 and continues. System programmer response: Do one of the following: v If the data set can be renamed or deleted, do so and follow the failing jobs restart instructions.

Explanation: The current level of the CustomPac installation dialog is displayed. System programmer response: None. CPP0624001E Unexpected return code or reason code from the Catalog Search Interface. Catalog Return Code return_code, Catalog Reason Code reason_code. Explanation: The CPPEDSN program called the DFSMSdfp Catalog Search Interface (CSI), which encountered an unexpected return code or reason code from catalog processing. The catalog return and reason codes are shown in the message text. System action: CPPEDSN sets the return code to 8 and continues. System programmer response: For the meaning of the return code and reason code in this message, see

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

227

v If the data set cannot be renamed or deleted, take the following steps: Use the installation dialog to rename the new data set. If you previously used the GENSKEL command to tailor all of the jobs at one time, rerun the GENSKEL command. Rerun the installation jobstream from the beginning. CPP0624004E Unexpected return code or reason code from the Catalog Search Interface. GPR 15 = value, CSI Return Code return_code, CSI Reason Code reason_code Explanation: The CPPEDSN program called the DFSMSdfp Catalog Search Interface (CSI), which returned an unexpected value in general purpose register 15, or with an unexpected return code or reason code in the CSI return work area. System action: CPPEDSN sets the return code to 8 and continues. System programmer response: For the meanings of the contents of general purpose register 15, and the return code and reason code from Catalog Search Interface, see the Catalog Search Interface Users Guide appendix in z/OS DFSMS Managing Catalogs. Correct the problem and follow the failing jobs restart instructions. CPP0625001E Specified device is unknown. Press Enter to respecify or enter ? to display a list of known device types. Explanation: The device you entered in the Default Device Type field has not been defined to the installation dialog. System action: None. System programmer response: Take one of the following actions, as appropriate: v Specify a different device type: Press Enter; specify a valid device type in the Default Device Type field. v Query the list of defined device types: Specify a question mark (?) in the Default Device Type field and press Enter. From the resulting list of devices, select a device type and press Enter. v Define the device type to the dialog: Return to the Modify System Layout Options panel. Select Option D (or enter DEVT on the command line). Add the device type to the list of device types and press Enter. On return to the Automatic Data Set Assignment panel, repeat your scope selection for data set assignment (ALL, NEW, or PARTIAL), enter the device type in the Default Device Type field, and press Enter.

CPP0625002E This option cannot be used because all the target and DLIB data sets in the configuration are SMS-managed. Explanation: SMS-managed data sets are not eligible for automatic data set assignment. Because all target and DLIB data sets in this configuration are managed by SMS, you cannot use the Create a Recommended System Layout option. System action: None. System programmer response: Select an option other than Create a Recommended System Layout. CPP0625003E Option not available for lower-level orders. Explanation: Automatic Data Set Assignment cannot be used for this order. Because the order was created before the automatic assignment option was added to the dialog, the order lacks information required for automatic assignment. System action: None. System programmer response: None. CPP0625004E Initialize Volume was set to No for volume, but the volume could not be accessed. Explanation: The dialog attempted to retrieve used space from the volume volume for which Initialize Volume was specified, however, one or more of these volumes could not be accessed. If the volume is offline, for example, its used space cannot be retrieved. System action: None. System programmer response: Take one of the following actions, as appropriate: v Return to the previous panel and vary the needed volumes online. Retry this operation. v Change Initialize Volume to YES for this volume and continue. The dialog will not attempt to retrieve free space information from the volume. Use caution in resetting volumes from Initialize Volume NO to Initialize Volume YES. Doing so causes the volume to be initialized by the installation jobs. CPP0625005E Duplicate volume specified. Enter the name of a volume that is not in the configuration. Explanation: The volume you specified already exists in the configuration. System action: None. System programmer response: Specify a new volume for the configuration.

228

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CPP0625007E Only one Move, Before, or After is allowed. Explanation: You entered more than one MOVE command, or you entered the MOVE command with both the BEFORE and AFTER parameters. System action: None. System programmer response: Enter a single MOVE command with either BEFORE or AFTER specified, but not both. CPP0625008E One or more volumes could not be accessed. The volumes are marked with * in the Existing Data column. Explanation: The dialog attempted to access volumes with existing data to determine how much space was left on them. However, one or more of these volumes was inaccessible. These volumes are indicated by an asterisk (*) in the panel under the heading, Existing Data. When a volume with existing data is not accessible, the dialog cannot determine the amount of used space on the volume. As a result, the dialog displays only the amount of space required for the data sets being assigned to the volumes, plus any reserved space. If the data sets allocated to the volume will not fit on the volume (because of a lack of free space), the ALLOCDS job might fail to allocate some data sets. Subsequently, these allocation failures cause the RESTORE job to fail with a JCL error. System action: None. System programmer response: To avoid potential overallocation errors when the ALLOCDS job runs, it is recommended that you investigate the cause of this message and ensure that there is enough space on the volumes to contain the orders data sets. Leave this panel and return to the Modify System Layout Options panel to resolve the problems with the affected volumes (for example, vary the volumes online). Then, return to this panel and continue. CPP0625009E A volume can be moved only within volumes of the same type. Explanation: Your attempt to move a volume through line command M was rejected. Doing so would place the volume in a group of volumes of another type, which is not allowed. System action: None. System programmer response: You can move a volume only among other volumes of the same type. For example, you can move a target volume before or after other target volumes, but not into a group of DLIB volumes or BOTH volumes. To move a volume into a group of volumes of a different type, you must first change the volumes type to the

other type (target, DLIB, or BOTH) through the CHANGE PVOL command (see 173). You can then move the volume within the group of volumes with that type. CPP0625010E The IPL volume cannot be excluded or moved. Explanation: You cannot exclude the IPL volume from automatic data set assignment. System action: None. System programmer response: None. CPP0625011E Insert not allowed on this line. Explanation: You cannot enter line command I on this line. When NEW is specified, line command I is allowed only at the end of a list (that is, on the line for the last target, DLIB, or operational volume). System action: None. System programmer response: Use the correct syntax, as shown in the text of the message. CPP0625012E Sum of Reserved Space and Existing Data exceeds volume threshold. Explanation: You specified reserved space or Initialize Volume NO, or both, for the volume. However, the total amount of space exceeds the volumes space utilization threshold, as shown in the panel Current Volume Configuration. System action: None. System programmer response: Do one or more of the following, as appropriate: v Increase the size of the volume by specifying a different device type v If the volume has reserved space, reduce the amount of reserved space v If the volume has existing data, move some or all of these data sets to other volumes. CPP0625013E Incomplete selection. Specify M(move) with either B(efore) or A(fter). Explanation: You entered line command M, B, or A alone. System action: None. System programmer response: To move a volume among volumes of the same type, enter line command M (Move) for the volume to be moved, and line command B (Before) or A (After) to place the volume in a new position.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

229

CPP0625014I Automatic data set assignment complete. Explanation: Your assignment of data sets in the work configuration to DASD volumes completed successfully. System action: None. System programmer response: None. CPP0625015I No data sets found on volume volume_name. Explanation: You entered line command L to list the data sets on volume volume_name. However, the volume contains no data sets. System action: None. System programmer response: None. CPP0625016E dsname requires nnnnnnn cylinders and cannot be placed on volume volume name. Explanation: During an automatic data set assignment, the dialog could not place data set dsname on the next available volume volume name because doing so would have exceeded the volumes space utilization threshold. At the time of the error, there had been no other data sets assigned to the volume. System action: None. System programmer response: Take one or more of the following actions, as necessary: v If you specified reserved space for the volume, reduce the amount of reserved space. v If you specified Initialize Volume NO for the volume, move some of the existing data sets to other volumes. v If you increased the size of data set dsname, reduce the size of the data set. v Increase the size of the volume by specifying a different device type. When you have resolved the problem, reenter the CREATE command to create the configuration. CPP0625017E 99 volume type volumes exist. Unable to create more volumes. Explanation: Ninety-nine volumes of type TARGET, DLIB, or BOTH already exist. This is the maximum number of volumes permitted for a type. More data sets remain to be assigned to this type, however these data sets cannot fit on the existing volumes, and the dialog cannot create additional volumes. System action: None. System programmer response: Take one or more of the following actions to resolve the problem: v Increase the size of one or more volumes

v Reduce the size of the data sets to be assigned by the dialog v Reduce the number of data sets to be assigned by the dialog v If you specified Reserved Space, reduce the amount of Reserved Space specified for one or more volumes v If you specified Initialize Volume NO, move some data sets to volumes that are not eligible for automatic data set assignment. When you have resolved the problem, reenter the CREATE command to create the configuration. CPP0625018E No more volume type volume names available. Unable to create more volumes. Explanation: The dialog could not create another volume in the series indicated by volume type because all of the possible volume names for this series have been used. System action: None. System programmer response: A configuration should not occupy all of the volumes in any volume series (Target, DLIB, or BOTH). To resolve this problem, do either of the following: v Determine why automatic data set assignment is creating so many volumes. For example, the default volume size specified might be smaller than intended, or the primary space allocation specified for some of the data sets in the configuration might have been inadvertently increased by a large amount. v If you think the configuration should occupy a large enough number of volumes for this message to be issued, rename one or more volumes in the series identified in the message text. These volumes will be named TARGnn, DLIBnn, or BOTHnn. However, you should be aware that there is also a limit on the number of sequence numbers in each series. See message CPP0625017E for information about the sequence number limit. Therefore, renaming one or more volumes might only change which limit is encountered. When you have resolved the problem, enter the CREATE command to create the configuration. CPP0625019E All IPLVOL data sets could not be placed on first Target volume. Explanation: The dialog attempted to place the IPL volume data sets on the first target volume. Doing so, however, would exceed the volumes space utilization threshold. System action: None. System programmer response: The data sets

230

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

required on the IPL volume are usually not very large and should fit easily on any supported device type. To resolve this problem, do the following: v Display the IPLVOL logical volume. This volume contains all of the data sets that must be placed on the first target volume. v If you have placed other data sets on the IPLVOL logical volume, move some or all of them to different logical volumes. v If you have increased the primary space for data sets on the IPLVOL logical volume, either specify less primary space for these data sets or increase the size of the first volume in the configuration. When you have resolved the problem, enter the CREATE command to create the configuration. CPP0625020E Enter EITHER Default Device or Model-After Volume Explanation: You either entered no values for the default device type or model-after volume or entered both of them on the panel. You must enter one, and only one, value. System action: None. System programmer response: Specify only one default device type or one model-after volume. CPP0625021E Volume not found. Explanation: The Model after Volume was not found. If the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable is set to Yes, the volume was not available. If it was set to No, the volume does not exist in the current configuration. In either case, the information needed to use the volumes device as a model is not available. System action: None. System programmer response: If the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable is set to Yes, either enter a default device type rather than a model-after volume, or exit the panel and ensure that: v The volume is online and available v The correct volume serial was specified v The device and control unit are working correctly. Then, select the option again. Otherwise, if the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable is set to No, either enter a default device type rather than a model-after volume, or specify a volume that is already defined in the current configuration. CPP0625086I Device information updated Explanation: The dialog successfully retrieved device information for the volume for which you specified the volume serial. The device type and device number were set from the retrieved information. If you entered No in

the Initialize Volume field, available space on the volume was set using the amount of free space actually found. System action: None. System programmer response: None. CPP0625087W Device information could not be retrieved for volume volume. Explanation: Because the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable was set to Yes, the dialog attempted to retrieve device information for the volume for which you specified the volume serial. However, the information could not be retrieved. System action: None. System programmer response: If the volume does not exist or is intentionally offline, press the Enter key to bypass the warning. Then, use Option V (Physical Volume Summary) from the Modify System Layout Options panel to specify a device that has been defined in the Device Type Table. To display defined devices or to define a new device, select Option T (View and change device type table) from the Modify System Layout Options panel. If the required device is not defined, exit the panel, define the device, and then retry the operation. If the volume should be online, ensure that: v The correct volume serial is specified on the panel. v The volume is online and available (for example, not pending offline or boxed). If the volume is not online and available, exit the panel and make the volume available. Then, retry the operation. v The device and control unit are working correctly. For example, check the system log for IOS000I messages that might indicate a problem. If these actions do not resolve the problem, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0625088W Device number found for volume1 conflicts with device number found for volume2. Respecify volume serial or press Enter to continue. Explanation: You entered a volume serial on the panel while the DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable was set to Yes. The dialog retrieved the information for the volume, but found that its device number matches a device number already specified for another volume in the configuration. System action: None. System programmer response: Do either of the following: v Re-specify the volume serial v Press Enter to continue. The device number for the other volume will be set to CCUU. When you complete the panel, use Option V on the Modify
Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

231

System Layout Options panel to correct the device number for the other volume. CPP0626003W Member member-name has no SSI Information. Explanation: The indicated member has no SSI information in its directory entry. All of the IBM-supplied modules in the SCPPLOAD data set should have SSI information. System action: None. System programmer response: Remove any non-IBM modules from SCPPLOAD. If this message is issued for an IBM-supplied module, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0627001I The level of SMP/E is vv.rr.mm. Explanation: This message identifies the level of SMP/E installed on your system. In the message, vv.rr.mm indicates the following: v vv is the SMP/E version v rr is the SMP/E release v mm is the SMP/E modification level. System action: None. System programmer response: None. CPP0627002S Unrecognized parameter. Explanation: The CHKSMPLV program was called with an unrecognized parameter. System action: CPPSMPLV ends with return code 12. System programmer response: Contact IBM for assistance. CPP0627003E GIMAPI ended with an unexpected return code. The return code was return-code. Explanation: The CHKSMPLV called the SMP/E authorized programming interface routine, GIMAPI, which returned a non-zero return code. In the message, return-code is the GIMAPI return code. System action: CPPSMPLV ends with return code 8. System programmer response: Check the following sources for information related to the problem: v Contents of the GIMAPI message buffer in the SYSPRINT data set. v Messages in the job log. If this information is not sufficient for resolving the problem, contact IBM for assistance.

CPP0628001S Unable to ALLOCATEdataset-name RC=return-code Explanation: The dialog could not access the master SCPPLOAD data set dataset-name. System action: The dialog ends with the return code shown in this message. System programmer response: Contact IBM for assistance. CPP0628002E ISPF Dialog error function-name RC=return-code Explanation: An ISPF dialog error has occurred. System action: The dialog ends with the return code shown in this message. System programmer response: Contact IBM for assistance. CPP0639001I CustomPac ZONE Table has been INITIALISED With SHIPPED Values Explanation: You have restored all DLIB and target zone names to the original, shipped values. Any customization that you might have done has been discarded. System programmer response: None. CPP0639002I RESTORE Confirmation has been denied, SHIP Command will NOT be Executed Explanation: You requested that all DLIB and target zone names be restored to their shipped values. No names were restored, however, because you did not confirm your request. System programmer response: None. CPP0639003I Changes to the TABLE have been SAVED Explanation: Your changes to the zone configuration have been saved. System programmer response: None. CPP0639004I Processing CANCELLED by User <changes> Explanation: You entered the CANCEL command; your changes to the zone configuration were discarded. <changes> might show more information, such as the message: CHANGES TO THE TABLE WERE NOT SAVED. System programmer response: None.

232

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CPP0639005I No changes were made to the TABLE. Explanation: You pressed the END key to exit from the Define Installation Variables function of the installation dialog. No changes were saved. System programmer response: None. CPP0639006E DUPLICATE Zone Name Explanation: You attempted to rename a DLIB or target library zone to a name that is already used for another zone. Duplicate zone names are not allowed. The cursor indicates the first occurrence of the duplicate zone name. System action: Dialog processing stops. System programmer response: Change the zone name to a unique name. CPP0670001E The XML output data set could not be opened. Explanation: The CPPXMLG program could not open the XML output data set. System action: CPPXMLG processing ends. The content of the XML output data set is not valid. Programmer response: Ensure that the XML output data set has been allocated, and that the XMLGNR8 job is running under a user ID that has UPDATE access (or higher) to the output data set. If the problem persists, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0670002E The table-name table could not be read. Explanation: The CPPXMLG program could not read table table-name. System action: CPPXMLG processing ends. The content of the XML output data set is not valid. Programmer response: Ensure that data set SCPPTENU is concatenated to ISPTLIB in the BUILDXML step of the XMLGNR8 job. Also ensure that the XMLGNR8 job is running under a user ID that has READ access (or higher) to the SCPPTENU data set. If the problem persists, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0670003E Call to program-name failed. Explanation: The CPPXMLG program could not call program program-name. System action: CPPXMLG processing ends. The content of the XML output data set is not valid. Programmer response: Contact IBM for assistance.

CPP0670004E Bad return code from program-name. Explanation: The CPPXMLG program called program program-name, which ended with a return code that is higher than the value allowed by CPPXMLG. The called program might have issued a message to further explain the error. System action: CPPXMLG processing ends. The content of the XML output data set is not valid. Programmer response: v If the called program issued a message to further explain the error, respond as that message indicates. If the problem persists, contact IBM for assistance. v If the called program did not issue a message, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0670005E SMP/E API call failed. Explanation: The CPPXMLG program attempted to call the SMP/E authorized program interface (API), but the call failed. System action: CPPXMLG processing ends. The content of the XML output data set is not valid. Programmer response: Determine whether the joblog contains any messages that describe the failure. If so, respond as the messages indicate. Otherwise, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0670006E Unknown data set organization. Explanation: The CPPXMLG program could not create an XML tag to describe a data set or file, because the program does not recognize the organization of the data set or file. System action: CPPXMLG processing ends. The content of the XML output data set is not valid. Programmer response: v If you added the data set or file during the Modify System Layout function of the dialog, ensure that its organization is supported. The supported organizations are: PS (sequential) PO (PDS or PDSE) VSAM HFS zFS If the organization of the data set or file is not supported, you must change its organization (through the Modify System Layout function), or remove the data set or file from the order configuration. If you entered the GENSKEL command, you must rerun this command to update the installation jobs for the changed configuration. If the organization of the data set is supported, contact IBM for assistance.
Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

233

v If the data set or file was supplied by IBM, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0670007E Bad parameter list passed to program-name. Explanation: Program program-name was called with no parameters or with an unrecognized parameter. System action: program-name returns control to its caller with return code 12. Programmer response: Contact IBM for assistance. CPP0670008E package-type is not supported. Explanation: Package type package-type is not supported by the package routine called by the CPPXMLG program. System action: The package routine returns control to the CPPXMLG program with return code 8. Programmer response: If you are running the CPPXMLG program for a supported package type, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0670009W No <SOFTWAREELEMENT> found for SOFTWAREFEATURE-name Explanation: A SOFTWAREELEMENT could not be built for this SOFTWAREFEATURE. For an SMP/E-installed product, this condition occurs when program CPPXMLG cannot find the required SYSMOD entry in the orders target zones. CPPXMLG searched the zones for a SYSMOD entry with a status of APPLIED that matches an FMID subentry in the FEATURE entry for which this <SOFTWAREFEATURE> is being built. System action: CPPXMLG sets the return code to 4. Programmer response: If the feature is included in the package and was installed through SMP/E, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0670010E The DTD input data set could not be opened. Explanation: The CPPXMLG program could not open the DTD input data set. System action: CPPXMLG processing ends. The content of the XML output data set is not valid. Programmer response: Ensure that ddname DTDFILE refers to member, DTD, in data set SCPPSENU.

CPP0670011W type zone zone-name could not be opened. Explanation: CPPXMLG could not open the indicated zone, even though a ZONEINDEX entry for it was found. System action: None. Programmer response: If you want to create a product definition file to describe this zones products, ensure that the SMP/E CSI data set containing this data is available and can be allocated. Otherwise, ignore this message. CPP0670012E Lower-level order tables are not supported. CPPXMLG terminated. Explanation: CPPXMLG must be run with the same level of ServerPac data it was shipped with, or a higher level. CPPXMLG does not support lower-level data. System action: None. Programmer response: Run an appropriate level of CPPXMLG for the tables to be processed. CPP0670013W Unsupported DBCS data encountered in a PRODUCT entry needed to create tag for DDDEF name dddef-name. Explanation: CPPXMLG read the DESCRIPTION field of a PRODUCT entry in order to construct the file ID for a products data sets. The products description contains double-byte character set (DBCS) characters, which are not supported. System action: None. Programmer response: None. CPP0670014E FUNCTION SYSMOD sysmod-name found APPLIED in more than one target zone. Explanation: While attempting to identify the target zone for a product, CPPXMLG found the same function sysmod applied in more than one target zone. System action: None. Programmer response: In the CPPXMLIN data set, do not specify more than one target zone having a function sysmod in APPLY status. CPP0670015E Data set dsname has conflicting APF and RECFM attributes. Explanation: CPPXMLG found a data set that has a defined record format, but which must be APF-authorized. Only RECFM=U data sets can be APF-authorized. System action: None.

234

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Programmer response: Contact IBM for assistance. CPP0670016E Unknown CPPXMLIN control statement statement-name found. Control statement follows: text Explanation: CPPXMLG did not recognize the control statement shown. System action: None. Programmer response: Check the syntax of the control statement. CPP0670017E Invalid value specified for statement-name. Control statement follows: text Explanation: CPPXMLG encountered a control statement with an incorrect value specified. System action: None. Programmer response: Check the CPPXMLIN data set for the erroneous control statement. Correct the statement and rerun the job that you use to execute program CPPXMLG. CPP0670018E Zone name too long on TARGETZONE statement: zone-name Explanation: CPPXMLG encountered a zone name that exceeds the 7 character limit on a TARGETZONE control statement. System action: None. Programmer response: Check the CPPXMLIN data set for the incorrect TARGETZONE control statement. Correct the zone name and rerun the job that you use to execute the CPPXMLG program. CPP0670019W Duplicate DDDEF name for product product-name found in zone: zone-name The first DDDEF name found was used. Explanation: CPPXMLG encountered a DDDEF name for the same product in two different zones. CPPXMLG used the DDDEF encountered in the first target zone specified on a TARGETZONE control statement, or the DDDEF encountered in the first DLIB zone associated with the first zone specified on a TARGETZONE statement. System action: None. Programmer response: If the DDDEFs in both zones are for the same product and the same data set, no action is required. For example, if the JES2 zone has a DDDEF for the MACLIB data set in the BCP zone, the DDDEFs would both refer to the same products data set. If the DDDEFs in both zones are for different levels of the same product or represent different data sets,

remove one of the TARGETZONE control statements from the CPPXMLIN data set and rerun the program that you use to execute CPPXMLG. CPP0670020E Expected continuation not found after control statement starting with text. Explanation: A continuation character (+) was found after the control statement indicated in the message. However, the remainder of the control statement was not found in the CPPXMLIN data set before the next control statement or the end of the data set was encountered. System action: None. Programmer response: Add the remainder of the control statement or remove the continuation character. CPP0670021W No PRIME control statement found in CPPXMLIN data set. Explanation: A CPPXMLIN data set, other than a dummy data set, was allocated but no PRIME control statement was found. Any other control statements in CPPXMLIN data set are ignored. CPPXMLG will run in package mode. System action: None. Programmer response: If you did not want CPPXMLG to run in priming mode, disregard the message. If you want CPPXMLG to run in priming mode, add a PRIME control statement to the beginning of the CPPXMLIN data set and rerun CPPXMLG. CPP0670022E Priming mode was specified, but the first CPPXMLIN control statement was not PRIME. Explanation: CPPXMLG found a PRIME control statement in the CPPXMLIN data set, but it was not the first control statement, or, the PRIME control statement was missing and other data is present in the data set. The PRIME control statement must be the first control statement in the CPPXMLIN data set. System action: None. Programmer response: If you do not want CPPXMLG to run in priming mode, disregard the message. Otherwise, move the PRIME control statement so that it appears first in the CPPXMLIN data set and rerun CPPXMLG. CPP0670023W No target zones were processed. Explanation: No TARGETZONE statements were found in the CPPXMLIN data set, and, therefore, none were processed. System action: None.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

235

Programmer response: If you intended to include TARGETZONE statements in the CPPXMLIN data set, add the statements and rerun CPPXMLG. Otherwise, disregard this message. CPP0670024E Zone not found in ZONEINDEX: zone-name Explanation: The named target zone was specified on a TARGETZONE control statement. However, there was no ZONEINDEX entry for the specified target zone in the global zone. System action: None. Programmer response: Do one of the following: v Specify a global zone containing a ZONEINDEX entry for the specified target zone on the SMPCSI DD statement v Specify a target zone for which there is a ZONEINDEX entry on the TARGETZONE control statement v Add a ZONEINDEX entry to the global zone for the specified target zone v Remove the TARGETZONE control statement. CPP0670025E Duplicate CPPXMLIN control statement text found. Explanation: CPPXMLG encountered a duplicate statement in the CPPXMLIN data set. System action: None. Programmer response: Remove the duplicate statement from CPPXMLIN and re-run the job. CPP0670026E NO valid zones were available to process. Explanation: CPPXMLG did not find any zones to process in the CPPXMLIN data set. System action: None. Programmer response: If you ran the XMLGNR8 job in package mode, ensure that the required zone can be opened. If you ran CPPXMLG job in priming mode, ensure that the TARGETZONE statement is specified correctly and that the required zone can be opened. CPP0670027E Missing CPPXMLIN control statement. Control statement follows: text Explanation: CPPXMLG did not find the required statement in the CPPXMLIN data set. System action: None. Programmer response: Check the syntax of the required statement to ensure that it is coded correctly.

CPP0670028W The CPPXMLIN input data set could not be opened. Explanation: CPPXMLG could not open the CPPXMLIN data set. CPPXMLG continues processing in package mode. System action: None. Programmer response: For package mode, either ignore the message or remove the CPPXMLIN DD statement. For priming mode, edit the CPPXMLIN data set, adding the control statements required for priming mode processing. CPP0670029W DLIBZONE statement ignored since no targetzones available to process. Explanation: The DLIBZONE statement is being ignored because no target zones are available for processing. System action: None. Programmer response: You have specified that related DLIB zones are to be processed, however, no valid target zones exist to be processed. Check that the target zones have been correctly specified in the CPPXMLIN control statements and the zones are correctly defined in the CSI. CPP0670030E Targetzone name was specified but Dlibzone found with that name in ZONEINDEX: zone-name. Explanation: TARGETZONE name zone was specified as a zone to be processed, however, a DLIB zone was found with that name in ZONEINDEX. System action: CPPXMLG processing ends. The content of the XML output data set is not valid. Programmer response: Either correct the spelling of the TARGETZONE name to be processed in the CPPXMLIN control statement or in the CSI definitions. CPP0670091W Warnings have been issued by GIMAPI; messages follow: Explanation: The CPPXMLG program called the SMP/E authorized program interface (API), which issued warning messages. System action: None. Programmer response: For information, see SMP/E Messages, Codes, and Diagnosis. Respond as the messages indicate. Otherwise, contact IBM for assistance.

236

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CPP0670092E Errors were encountered by GIMAPI; messages follow: Explanation: The CPPXMLG program has called the SMP/E authorized program interface (API), which has issued error messages. System action: CPPXMLG processing ends. The content of the XML output data set is not valid. Programmer response: Contact IBM for assistance. CPP0699001S Flow Table CPPFLOW NOT Found in Order Table Library Explanation: The table CPPFLOW, which forms part of your order shipment, was not found in the SCPPTENU library. As a result, the order is not installable. System programmer response: Check the receive job to make sure the order libraries were allocated correctly and were loaded with data. If you cannot resolve the problem, contact IBM for assistance. CPP0995001S DDname ddname Is NOT a Partitioned Dataset Explanation: The data set that is allocated to DDname ddname is not a partitioned data set. This utility only supports the conversion of partitioned data sets. System programmer response: Report this problem to IBM. CPP0995002S DDname ddname Has an incompatible RECFM Explanation: The data set allocated to DDname(SYSUT1) is not RECFM=FB, or the data set allocated to DDname(SYSUT2) is not RECFM=VB. System programmer response: Report this problem to IBM. CPP0995003S DDname ddname Has an Incompatible LRECL Explanation: The data set allocated to DDname(SYSUT1) is not LRECL=80, or the data set allocated to DDname(SYSUT2) has an LRECL < 72. System programmer response: Report this problem to IBM. CPP9999901X Unsupported SERVICE (service-call) Explanation: This message is issued by the CPPCMSG interface. The program calling the interface has specified an incorrect service service-call.

System programmer response: Report this problem to IBM. CPP9999902X FILE (file-name) MISSING DD STATEMENT Explanation: The CPPCMSG interface cannot open the file file-name because it is missing a DD statement. System action: The system responds in either of two ways, depending on when the error occurred, as follows: v If the problem occurred during an INIT service call, the message inventory is not allocated. v If the problem occurred during a MSG service call, the ddname to which the message is to be written is not allocated, and a PL/1 ONCODE(1016) abend occurs. System programmer response: Note which dialog function you were using, and, if possible, the sequence of events that caused the message to be issued. Report the problem to IBM. CPP9999903X FILE (MSGINV) CORRUPT, NO Module Table Record Explanation: The message inventory is corrupt and is unusable. You cannot install the order until this problem is corrected. System programmer response: Note which dialog function you were using, and, if possible, the sequence of events that caused the message to be issued. Report the problem to IBM. CPP9999904X INIT Failed for UNKNOWN Module (module-name) Explanation: The calling program specified a module that is not defined to the message inventory. System programmer response: Note which dialog function you were using, and, if possible, the sequence of events that caused the message to be issued. Report the problem to IBM. CPP9999905X STACK Overflow Condition for STACK stack-name Explanation: This message is issued by the CPPCMSG interface. One of the internal stacks used by the message interface is not large enough. System programmer response: Report this problem to IBM.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

237

CPP9999906X RESTORE Failed, SAVE STACK is empty Explanation: This message is issued by the CPPCMSG interface. The program calling the interface has specified a RESTORE service call, however no preceding SAVE has taken place. There is nothing to restore. System programmer response: Report this problem to IBM. CPP9999907X Invalid Output Destination (output-destination) Explanation: This message is issued by the CPPCMSG interface. The program calling the interface has specified a service call that specifies an incorrect output destination. System programmer response: Report this problem to IBM. CPP9999908X Unknown MESSAGE (message-id) Issued By MODULE (module-name) Explanation: The calling program specified a message ID that is not defined in the message inventory. System programmer response: Note which dialog function you were using, and, if possible, the sequence of events that caused the message to be issued. Report the problem to IBM. CPP9999909E Valid options are F or S Explanation: You entered an incorrect value for the installation type. System action: Dialog processing stops. System programmer response: For the installation type, enter in the Option field either F for a full system replacement or S for a software upgrade, and press Enter. For information about these installation types, see Chapter 5, Creating a work configuration for the order, on page 41). CPP9999910E Valid values are Y or N Explanation: You specified an incorrect value. System action: None; the panel values are not processed. System programmer response: Specify a valid value.

CPP9999911E Valid characters A-Z, 0-9, #, @, $. The first cannot be 0-9. Explanation: You specified an incorrect value. System action: None; the panel values are not processed. System programmer response: Specify a valid value. CPP9999950I Module was Compiled On compile-date Explanation: You entered the COMP primary command to display the date and time at which this module was compiled. System programmer response: None. CPP9999951W INVALID Primary Command command-name Explanation: The command shown is not a valid primary command for the current panel, or it contains incorrect syntax. System programmer response: Enter a valid command. CPP9999952W INVALID Line Command command-name Explanation: The line command shown is not valid for the row being selected. System programmer response: Enter a valid command. CPP9999953E Invalid PARM Information parm. Explanation: The external PARM information parm supplied to the program was missing or in error. System programmer response: Report this problem to IBM. CPP9999954I Table REFRESHED Explanation: The current panel was refreshed. System programmer response: None. CPP9999955I Field NOT KNOWN field-name Explanation: You entered a SET command for a field that is not available on the current panel. System programmer response: Enter a valid SET command.

238

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CPP9999956I SORT Completed Explanation: Your SORT command has completed successfully. System programmer response: None. CPP9999957I SET Successful for field field-name Explanation: Your SET command has completed successfully; the field has been set. System programmer response: None.

search from the bottom of the list, enter the PREVIOUS command again. CPP9999965I NO Search Criteria Explanation: You entered a LOCATE, FIND, NEXT or PREVIOUS command for the current SET field, but you did not specify any search criteria. System programmer response: Enter the command again with search criteria. CPP9999966E Ending QUOTE is missing

CPP9999958I Display MODE now set to mode-name Explanation: You changed the display mode of the current panel to mode-name. Display modes are explained, as follows: TE Terse mode; only summary information is shown. VE Verbose mode; all information is shown. System programmer response: None. CPP9999961I Data FOUND Explanation: You entered a LOCATE, FIND, NEXT or PREVIOUS command for the current SET field and the search string was found. The matching list entry is positioned at the top of the scrollable area. System programmer response: None. CPP9999962I Data NOT FOUND Explanation: You entered a LOCATE or FIND command for the current SET field, but no matches were found. System programmer response: None. CPP9999963I BOTTOM of Table Explanation: You entered a NEXT command for the current SET field. The list was searched from the last entry with a match to the bottom of table, but no other matches were found. System programmer response: To resume the search from the top of the list, enter the NEXT command again. CPP9999964I TOP of Table Explanation: You entered a PREVIOUS command for the current SET field. The list was searched from the last entry that matched to the top of table, but no other matches were found. System programmer response: To resume the

Explanation: You entered a LOCATE or FIND command for the current SET field. However, the search criteria you specified contains embedded blanks and you did not enter a closing quote. System programmer response: Add an ending quote to the search criteria. CPP9999967I NO Data Updated By User Explanation: You displayed a panel with changeable values. However, you either: v Ended processing without changing any data. v Continued processing, using the displayed data. System programmer response: None. CPP9999968I Synchronization DELETE Has Completed Successfully text Explanation: You attempted to delete a data object that was already deleted. The display of the data was created when you invoked the function, and is likely now unsynchronized with the physical database. This is not an error. The data object has been deleted from your display (synchronized). text might show more information. System programmer response: None. CPP9999969I Synchronization INSERT Has Completed Successfully text Explanation: You attempted to insert a data object that has already been created. The display of the data was created when you invoked the function, and is likely now unsynchronized with the physical database. This is not an error. The data object created has been inserted in your display (synchronized). text might show more information. System programmer response: None.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

239

CPP9999970I DELETE Request Successful text Explanation: You successfully deleted the data object. text might show more information. System programmer response: None. CPP9999971I DELETE Request Cancelled text Explanation: Your request to delete the data object was canceled for one of the following reasons: v You did not confirm your request. v You ended the request by pressing the END key. text might show more information. System programmer response: None. CPP9999973I INSERT Request Successful text Explanation: You successfully inserted or created the data object. text might show more information. System programmer response: None. CPP9999974I INSERT Request Cancelled text Explanation: Your request to insert or create the data object was canceled for one of the following reasons: v You did not confirm your request. v You ended the request by pressing the END key. text might show more information. System programmer response: None. CPP9999976I UPDATE Request Successful text Explanation: Your attempt to update or edit the data object was successful. text might show more information. System programmer response: None. CPP9999977S UPDATE Request Cancelled additional text Explanation: You canceled an update to the work configuration, either by pressing the End key or by responding negatively to a request for confirmation. If there is additional text, it includes more information: Device type nnnn-nnn indicates that the device type that was not added to the device type table. System programmer response: None. CPP9999979I This Already EXISTS, DUPLICATES are Not Allowed Explanation: You attempted to insert or create a data object that already exists. Duplicate data objects are not permitted.

System programmer response: None. CPP9999985S MULTIPLE Selection is NOT Available, ONLY the FIRST Selection is VALID (ALL OTHER Selections have been CLEARED) Explanation: You selected more than one data object, which is not allowed in this display. System action: Only the first data object is selected; the other selections are ignored. System programmer response: Review the selection. CPP9999987E Enter a valid volume serial. Explanation: The volume serial entered on the panel is not valid. System action: None System programmer response: Specify a valid volume serial. A volume serial has 1 through 6 alphanumeric, national ($, #, @), or special characters. There are special rules for specifying special characters. For more information, see z/OS MVS JCL Reference, SA22-7597. CPP9999988E INVALID Primary Command command-name Explanation: The command shown is not a valid primary command for the current panel, or the command has invalid syntax. System programmer response: Enter a valid command. CPP9999990I NO Dynamic HELP Available Explanation: You requested help for a panel that does not have any help information. System programmer response: Contact IBM for assistance. CPP9999991I Date(date) Time(time) Explanation: You entered the TIME or DATE primary command. The current time and date are displayed. System programmer response: None. CPP9999992W Table table-id Not Found Explanation: The currently executing dialog function required access to table table-id, which was not found. System programmer response: Exit the dialog. Log off, log on again, and retry the failing function. If the problem persists, contact IBM for assistance.

240

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CPP9999993I Enque for Table table-id Failed, this is NOT Normally a Problem, the Table May be IN USE by Another User Explanation: The currently executing dialog function requires access to table table-id, which is in use by another user. This is not usually a problem. System programmer response: Wait until the other user has finished using the table. CPP9999994S Table table-id, INPUT/OUTPUT Library (library-name) Was NOT Allocated Explanation: The currently executing dialog function could not access table table-id because library library-name was not allocated. System programmer response: Exit the dialog. Log off, log on again, and retry the failing function. If the problem persists, contact IBM for assistance. CPP9999996S Unexpected DIALOG ERROR Explanation: The currently running dialog function detected an ISPF error while issuing a program call. System programmer response: Exit the dialog. Log off, log on again, and retry the failing function. If the problem persists, report the following information to IBM: v The sequence of events leading to the error. v A screen print of the displayed information.

Appendix B. Diagnostic messages

241

242

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the USA. IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the users responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service. IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to: IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk, NY 10504-1785 USA For license inquiries regarding double-byte (DBCS) information, contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to: IBM World Trade Asia Corporation Licensing 2-31 Roppongi 3-chome, Minato-ku Tokyo 106, Japan The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

243

Notices
Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact: IBM Corporation Mail Station P300 2455 South Road Poughkeepsie, NY 12601-5400 USA Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases, payment of a fee. The licensed program described in this information and all licensed material available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement, IBM International Program License Agreement, or any equivalent agreement between us. If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations may not appear.

Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both: v AFP v BookManager v CICS v DB2 v DFSMS v DFSMSdfp v DFSMSdss v DFSMShsm v IBM v IBMLink v IMS v MVS v OS/390 v ProductPac v RACF v SystemPac v TotalStorage v WebSphere v z/OS v zSeries Adobe, Acrobat, and Portable Document Format (PDF) are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States, other countries, or both. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

244

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Index Special characters

? command description of 183 CHANGE command description of 165 CHANGE DSNAME *HLQ* command description of 168 CHANGE DSNAME command description of 167 CHANGE DSNTYPE command description of 169 examples 170 CHANGE LVOL command description of 171 example 171 restrictions 171, 174 CHANGE MCAT command description of 171 CHANGE PVOL command description of 173 used with automatic assignment 74, 75, 86 CHANGE RENAME command description of 174 CHANGE SECOND command description of 175 CHANGE SMS command description of 176 CHANGE SPACE command description of 178 examples 179 restrictions 179 color changing the dialog settings 9 commands for list panels 11, 38, 60, 98, 100, 119, 130, 135, 143, 146, 158, 161, 162 ISPF Edit commands CREATE 36, 82, 88, 165, 190 END 148 REPLACE 148 SAVE 148 SUBMIT 35, 148 line commands B (Back-up) 141, 144, 146 B (Browse) 61 block select (SS) 144 C (CONFLICT) 98 D (Delete) 61, 130, 144, 151 E (Edit) 61, 144, 151 F (FMIDs) 161 FEATURES 71 I (Insert) 61, 80, 130, 144 L (List) 80 L (Log) 144 M (MCAT) 131 M (Merge) 98 M (Move) 80 merge-related 98 N (NoMCAT) 131 O (Output logging) 144 overview of 11

A
about this document xiii alias associating with a user catalog 131 defined in master catalog 125 defining for catalog data set 129 deleting 130 inserting 131 relationship to catalog 125 system-specific specifying 133 ALL scope description 78 using the eXclude line command 81, 88 Allocate New DS attribute displayed in the View and Change Facility 96 ALTER access requirement for data sets in your order 2 APF authorization listing data sets that require APF authorization 96 attribute for a data set modifying 109 Auto-Upgrade job description 13 automatic assignment examples 83, 86, 89, 92 excluding data sets from 75 role of volumes 75 setting the scope of 77 volume sequence numbers 76 volume types 76

B
BACKUP command description of 165 restrictions 165 BOTH volume used in automatic assignment 76

C
CAPS setting for dialogs ISPF editor 9 catalog data defining 135 catalog data set name defining aliases for 129 catalog structure default for 127

245

commands (continued) line commands (continued) P (PRODUCTS) 161 R (Repeat) 61, 130 S (Select) 80, 98, 144, 147 S (Ship) 61 SS (block select) 144 T (FEATURES) 71 U (Unmerge) 98 V (VARS) 144 X (eXclude) 80, 81 X (eXpand) 98 primary commands ? 183 BACKUP 165 CHANGE 165 CHANGE DSNAME 167 CHANGE DSNAME *HLQ* 168 CHANGE DSNTYPE 169 CHANGE LVOL 171 CHANGE MCAT 171 CHANGE PVOL 74, 173 CHANGE RENAME 174 CHANGE SECOND 175 CHANGE SMS 176 CHANGE SPACE 178 CREATE 44, 180 FIND 181 FINDCOMP 181 GENSKEL 141, 145, 182 HELP 183 LOCATE 184 MERGE 185 NEXT 186 OFILE 187 OLIST 189 overview of 11 PREVIOUS 189 REPLACE 190 SET 190 SORT 191 SS$ 143 SUMMARY 143, 146 SUMP 54, 193 syntax of 165 TERSE 193 VAREDIT 143 VERBOSE 194 standard list handling commands 11 TSO commands PROFILE INTERCOM 35 component data set displaying 108 finding after a merge 107, 181 configuration creating 44, 180 deleting 46, 155 displaying 79 merging from a previous order 45 reports for 49

configuration (continued) saving 153 selecting for the order 44 types of configurations 4 CONFLICT line command displaying member name conflicts 98 considerations maintenance system versus IPL-able system 101 CPPCISPF CLIST using 22 CPPP6011 panel 44, 45 CPPP6012 panel 46 CPPP6013 panel 46 CPPP6015 panel 41 CPPP6016 panel 43 CPPP6021 panel 129, 131 CPPP6023 panel 131 CPPP6031 panel 134 CPPP6033 panel 136 CPPP6035 panel 137 CPPP6036 panel 138 CPPP6041 panel 154 CPPP6042 panel 155 CPPP6050 panel 99, 173 CPPP6052 panel 117 CPPP6057 panel 100 CPPP6058 panel 123 CPPP605D panel 110 CPPP605E panel 113, 114 CPPP605F panel 114 CPPP605I panel 118 CPPP605J panel 121 CPPP605K panel 118 CPPP605M panel 103 CPPP605Q panel 122 CPPP605R panel 96 CPPP605S panel 97 CPPP605T panel 73 CPPP605U panel 97, 108 CPPP605V panel 105 CPPP605W panel 109 CPPP605X panel 108 CPPP606# panel 115 CPPP606D panel 117 CPPP606I panel 116 CPPP6071 panel 38, 158 CPPP6076 panel 161 CPPP6077 panel 162 CPPP6079 panel 162 CPPP607B panel 157 CPPP607C panel 163 CPPP6101 panel 28 CPPP6103 panel 34 CPPP610A panel 26 CPPP610B panel 30 CPPP610C panel 31 CPPP610D panel 32 CPPP610E panel 35 CPPP610G panel 29 CPPP6111 panel 59 CPPP6114 panel 64

246

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

CPPP6115 panel 63, 65 CPPP6116 panel 65 CPPP6117 panel 66 CPPP6118 panel 67 CPPP611D panel 67 CPPP611S panel 68 CPPP6121 panel 142 CPPP6122 panel 149 CPPP6123 panel 150 CPPP6124 panel 152 CPPP6126 panel 145 CPPP625B panel 77, 83, 87, 90, 93 CPPP625C panel 80, 84, 86, 88, 89, 91, 92, 94 CPPP625D panel 82 CPPP625E panel 85, 88 CPPP6391 panel 69 CPPP6393 panel 71 CPPPEDIF panel 148, 151 with firewall commands 33 with JOB statement 34 with RECEIVE job 35 CPPPFLOW panel 7, 39 CPPPMLOG panel 85 CPPPPOLI panel 25, 37 CREATE ISPF Edit command 36, 82, 88, 165, 190 CREATE command creating saved configuration with 44 description of 180 CSIVOL name reserved for systems use 171 current volume configuration displaying 79 CustomPac dialog See installation dialog cylinder size listing data sets by cylinder size 96 Cylinders/Device field specifying a value for 116

D
DASD device specifying the manner in which it is defined 116 specifying the number of cylinders for 116 specifying the number of tracks per cylinder 116 specifying the unit type of 116 using with CustomPac 114 data set assigning automatically 74, 75, 76 assigning to logical volume 111, 171 assigning to SMS-managed volumes 6 attributes modifying 109 changing an individual data set 109, 112 changing groups of data sets 98 Data Set Merge Report 55 directory blocks modifying the number of 112 excluding from automatic assignment 75

data set (continued) high level qualifier changing 168 list creation 95 logical volume changing 111, 171 making changes to 165 master catalog requirement changing 171 member name conflicts displaying 98 merging considerations 106 description 102 displaying components of 108 effects of 106 restrictions for 103 using caution 106 modifying attributes 109 name changing 110, 167, 174 new data sets in your order viewing and changing 96 physical volume changing 173 primary tracks modifying 112 product, element, or feature modifying the number of 112 renaming restrictions 168, 169, 174 secondary space changing 175 removing 179 restrictions 175 secondary tracks modifying 112 SMS status changing 111, 176 space modifying 112 space allocation changing 178 type changing 110, 169 unmerging 107 unrenameable potential name conflict 51 renaming 174 viewing and changing 95 data set list creating 95 data set member name conflicts 98 Data Set Merge Report for merged configurations 55 status for an SMS-managed data set 56 data set name changing 110 Data Set Name field specifying a value for 110
Index

247

Data Set Selection List pop-up window description 107 data set space modifying 112 data set type changing 110, 169 listing data sets by type 96 Data Set Type field specifying a value for 110 DDDEF name listing data sets by DDDEF name 96 default catalog structure description 127 Default Device Type field setting 79, 87 Define Alias to Catalog Relationships function description 125 worksheet for 125 Define Installation Variables function description 59 Define SSA to Catalog Relationships function description 133 worksheet for 133 Defined Device Types pop-up window description 121 device type defining for use with CustomPac 114 deleting 116 editing 115 inserting 115 listing data sets by device type 96 setting a default for automatic assignment 79, 87 specifying 116 Device Type field specifying a value for 116 device type table displaying 114 diagnosing problems messages for ServerPac 12 directory blocks modifying for a data set 112 Directory Blocks field specifying a value for 112 DLIB volume used in automatic assignment 76 DLIB zone renaming 69 DSNTYPE attribute listing data sets by DSNTYPE 96 DYNAMIC DASD INFO variable description 62 use of 173 DYNAMNBR parameter in logon proc recommendation 20

Edit Session E description 151 Edit Session S description 147 edit the default jobcard 142 element type listing data sets by element type 96 used in assignment of data sets 76 elements and features displaying FMIDs for 161 error messages described 195 EUPDATE job copying from FTP server 16 eXclude line command description 81 used with the ALL scope 81, 88 used with the NEW scope 81, 91 used with the PARTIAL scope 81, 93, 94 existing configuration deleting 46, 155 existing data shown in Merge Report 54 specifying for a physical volume 122 Expanded Merged Data Set pop-up window description 108

F
FACILITY class profile for STGADMIN.IGG.DIRCAT READ access requirement 3 feature displaying FMIDs for 161 in a zone 71 FEATURES line command displaying features for a zone 71 FIND command description of 181 FINDCOMP command description of 181 using to locate a component data set 107, 181 FMID for products, elements and features 161

G
GENSKEL command description of 182 using 145 global change for data set names 167 for data set space values 178 for data set types 169 for high level qualifiers 168 for logical volume names 171 for master catalog data sets 171 for physical volume names 173 for SMS management status 176

E
Edit Session B description 146

248

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

H
HELP command description of 183 HFS data set changing to zFS 169 hierarchical file system (HFS) data sets for restrictions for merging 103 high level qualifier changing 168 defined in master catalog 125 relationship to catalog 125 worksheet 125 How Defined field specifying a value for 116

I
information about ServerPac related publications xiv terms xiii Initialize Volume specifying for a physical volume 122 INSTALL DIRECTORY variable description 62 installation of subsystem products related publications 1 of the z/OS operating system overview of major tasks 3 related publications 1 type of choosing 41 installation dialog alternate invocation for 20 CAPS setting for ISPF editor 9 color usage 9 description of 1 environment setting up 16 features of 8 format of panels 9 help facility for 12 installing the dialog 13 languages supported 9 line commands 11 logon proc for starting 19 messages for 12 overview of major tasks 3 primary commands overview of 11 syntax of 165 region size required 19 starting 19, 20, 21, 22 synonyms 191, 192 table columns 191, 192 installation job generating with GENSKEL command 145 saving in the SCPPBENU data set 148 submitting 141

installation jobstream description 141 Installation Menu overview of functions 7 IPL-able system versus maintenance system considerations 101 IPLVOL name reserved for systems use 171 ISPF Edit CAPS setting default for dialog 9 ISPF Edit commands CREATE 36, 82, 88, 165, 190 END behavior altered by dialog 148 REPLACE behavior altered by dialog 148 SAVE disabled by dialog 148 SUBMIT 35 behavior altered by dialog 148

J
JES element merging zones 43 selecting for the configuration 43 job copying UPDATE 15 for copying the LOADRIM job 16 user-defined deleting 151 inserting into the jobstream 149 job name setting a variable for 145 job output capturing in SCPPOENU data set 145 job selection list displaying 141 JOBNAME variable setting 145

L
line commands B (Back-up) on Job Selection List 141, 144, 146 using 146 B (Browse) on Variable Selection List 61 block select (SS) on Job Selection List 144 C (CONFLICT) in View and Change Facility 98 D (Delete) on Define Catalog Data Set Names panel 130 on Job Selection List 144, 151 on Variable Selection List 61 E (Edit) on Job Selection List 144, 151 on Variable Selection List 61
Index

249

line commands (continued) F (FMIDs) on Shipped PRODUCTS/FEATURE panel 161 FEATURES in Define Zone Configuration 71 I (Insert) on Current Volume Configuration panel 80 on Define Catalog Data Set Names panel 130 on Job Selection List 144 on Variable Selection List 61 L (List) on Current Volume Configuration panel 80 L (Log) on Job Selection List 144 M (MCAT) on Define Catalog Data Set Names panel 131 M (Merge) in View and Change Facility 98 M (Move) on Current Volume Configuration panel 80 merge-related in View and Change Facility 98 N (NoMCAT) on Define Catalog Data Set Names panel 131 O (Output logging) on Job Selection List 144 overview of 11 P (PRODUCTS) on Order List panel 161 R (Repeat) on Define Catalog Data Set Names panel 130 on Variable Selection List 61 S (Select) on Current Volume Configuration panel 80 on Job Selection List 144, 147 using 147 S (Ship) on Variable Selection List 61 SS (block select) on Job Selection List 144 T (FEATURES) in Define Zone Configuration 71 U (Unmerge) in View and Change Facility 98 V (VARS) on Job Selection List 144 X (eXclude) on Current Volume Configuration panel 80, 81 X (eXpand) in View and Change Facility 98 link list eligible data set displaying 96, 97 merging restriction 103 secondary space removing 179 viewing and changing 96 list panel standard commands 11, 38, 60, 98, 100, 119, 130, 135, 143, 146, 158, 161, 162 LOADRIM job copying from FTP server 18

LOADRIM job (continued) copyingfrom the system and distribution tape 17 LOCATE command description of 184 logical record length (LRECL) listing data sets by LRECL 96 logical volume for a data set changing 111, 171 listing data sets by logical volume 96 Logical Volume field specifying a value for 111 logon panel 19 logon proc allocating data sets adding SCEERUN to search order 20 DYNAMNBR setting 20 starting the dialog example 22 used to start the dialog 21 LPA eligible data set effect on size of the private area below 16MB 101 moving from LPA list 101 viewing and changing 96 LPA required data set merging restriction 103 viewing and changing 96

M
maintenance system versus IPL-able system considerations 101 master catalog associating with an alias 129, 130, 131 data set list 96 data set placement requirement 51 defining HLQs for 125 referencing the target system 127 referencing user catalogs 14 referred to by name 129 requirement overriding the value 171 master catalog authority required for driving system 134 master dialog data sets allocating 13 description 13 Members pop-up window description 98 merge candidates displaying 102 MERGE command description of 185 Merge Report conflict for an unrenameable data set 51 for merged configurations 49 status for an SMS-managed data set 52 merged configuration data set merge report for 55 from a previous order 45

250

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

merged configuration (continued) merge report for 49 SMS-managed data sets 52 merged data set description 102 displaying components of 108 effects of 106 finding 181 link list eligible restrictions for 103 LPA required restrictions for 103 report for 55 restrictions for 103 saving 109 unmerging 107 using caution 106 messages for ServerPac described 195 introduction 12 migration step updating dialogs 25 Modify System Layout function description 73 mount point UNIX file system viewing and changing 96

order inventory updating 5 order number recording 1, 2 specifying for DOCLIB data set 17, 18 when copying the LOADRIM job 17, 18 order report description 162 output from installation jobs capturing 145 output logging setting a variable for 145 OUTPUT LOGGING variable setting 145 over-allocated condition resolving 120 overridden attribute for master catalog data sets 171

P
Package Type field values for 159 packaged products types of 159 panel Assign a Storage Class 122 Automatic Assignment Confirmation 85, 88 Automatic Assignment Progress Panel 85 Automatic Data Set Assignment 77, 83, 87, 90, 93 Browse Existing User Job 150 Browse Variable Definition - Usage 64 Candidate List for Data Set Attributes 99 Candidate List for Data Set Space Values 100 Catalog Selection List 134 confirm processing requirements 132 Confirm Processing Requirements 71, 123, 139 Current Volume Configuration 80, 84, 86, 88, 89, 91, 92, 94 Data Set Attributes 1 110 Data Set Attributes 2 113 Data Set Attributes 2 for a shipped VSAM Data Set 114 Data Set Attributes 2 for a UNIX file system data set 114 Data set list for: 97 Data Set Merge Candidates 103, 105, 108 Define a USER Data Set 118 Define Catalog Data Set Names 129, 131 Define SSA and Catalog Data for full system replacement 136 for software upgrade 137, 138 Define Zone Names 69 Delete a User Defined Job - Confirmation 152 Delete a User Variable 67 Delete an Existing Configuration 155 Delete User Defined Alias 130 Device Type Deletion 117 Device Type Insertion/Edit 116
Index

N
new data set in your order viewing and changing 96 NEW scope description 78 disadvantages 78 using the eXclude line command 81, 91 when to use 78 NEXT command description of 186 Notices 243

O
OFILE command description of 187 format of output 188 using 158, 161 OLIST command description of 189 order displaying 157 displaying products, elements and features 161 editing 159 inserting 159 installing 37 receiving 25 overview 4 report for 162 selecting 157 updating 157

251

panel (continued) Device Type Table 115 Display and Change Volume Attributes 82, 121 Download Server Information 30, 31 Edit Backup Member 147 Edit JOB Statement 34 Edit Jobstream 148 Edit Order 159 Edit RECEIVE Job 35 Edit Source Member 151 Firewall Commands 32 Generate File-Tailored Installation Jobs 145 Insert a User Variable - Usage 67 Insert a User Variable - Value 66 Insert a User-Defined Job - Confirmation 150 Insert User Defined Alias 131 Insert User Defined Job 149 Installation Menu 39 Installation Options for Order 7 ISPF Edit with firewall commands 33 with JOB statement 34 with RECEIVE job 35 JES Element Selection 43 Job Selection List 142 Main Installation 25 Merge Component Data Sets 109 Merge Configuration 45 Merge Configurations - Confirmation 46 Modify System Layout 117 Modify System Layout Options 73 Order List 38 Order List (Terse Mode) 158 Order Processing 37 Order Selection 157 Processing Log 146 Receive an Order 26 Receive an Order From Tape 28 Receive an Order From the File System 29 Report File Details 162 Restore a Variable to the Shipped Value: Confirmation 68 Select a Data Set List View 96 Select Configuration 43, 44, 45 Select Values to Display 97 Shipped FMIDs for a Product/Feature 162 Shipped Products/Features 161 Specify Save Library 154 Status Verification 163 Summary of Physical Volumes 118, 121 TSO/E logon 19 TSO/E options processor 23 Type of Installation 41 Update Variable Definition - Usage 65 Update Variable Definition - Value 63, 65 Variable Selection List 59 panel display areas of 10 format 10 panel ID CPPP6011 44, 45

panel ID (continued) CPPP6012 46 CPPP6013 46 CPPP6015 41 CPPP6016 43 CPPP6021 129, 131 CPPP6023 131 CPPP6031 134 CPPP6033 136 CPPP6035 137 CPPP6036 138 CPPP6041 154 CPPP6042 155 CPPP6050 99 CPPP6052 117 CPPP6057 100 CPPP6058 123 CPPP605D 110 CPPP605E 113, 114 CPPP605F 114 CPPP605I 118 CPPP605J 121 CPPP605K 118 CPPP605M 103 CPPP605Q 122 CPPP605R 96 CPPP605S 97 CPPP605T 73 CPPP605U 97, 108 CPPP605V 105 CPPP605W 109 CPPP605X 108 CPPP606# 115 CPPP606D 117 CPPP606I 116 CPPP6071 38, 158 CPPP6076 161 CPPP6077 162 CPPP6079 162 CPPP607B 157 CPPP607C 163 CPPP6101 28 CPPP6103 34 CPPP610A 26 CPPP610B 30 CPPP610C 31 CPPP610D 32 CPPP610E 35 CPPP610G 29 CPPP6111 59 CPPP6114 64 CPPP6115 63, 65 CPPP6116 65 CPPP6117 66 CPPP6118 67 CPPP611D 67 CPPP611S 68 CPPP6121 142 CPPP6122 149 CPPP6123 150 CPPP6124 152

252

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

panel ID (continued) CPPP6126 145 CPPP625B 77, 83, 87, 90, 93 CPPP625C 80, 84, 86, 88, 89, 91, 92, 94 CPPP625D 82 CPPP625E 85, 88 CPPP6391 69 CPPP6393 71 CPPPEDIF 148, 151 with firewall commands 33 with JOB statement 34 with RECEIVE job 35 CPPPFLOW 7, 39 CPPPMLOG 85 CPPPPOLI 25, 37 PARTIAL scope advantages 78 description 78 example 92 using the eXclude line command 81, 93, 94 when to use 78 PDS data set changing to PDSE 169 PDSE data set changing to PDS 169 merging 106 physical volume adding additional 120 assigning 121 for a group of data sets changing 173 initializing 122 listing data sets by physical volume 96 specifying whether data already exists on it 122 pop-up window Data Set Selection List 107 Defined Device Types 121 Expanded Merged Data Set 108 Members (in conflict with) 98 preface xiii PREVIOUS command description of 189 primary commands ? description of 183 BACKUP description of 165 CHANGE description of 165 CHANGE DSNAME description of 167 CHANGE DSNAME *HLQ* description of 168 CHANGE DSNTYPE description of 169 CHANGE LVOL description of 171 CHANGE MCAT description of 171 CHANGE PVOL description of 173

primary commands (continued) CHANGE PVOL (continued) used with automatic assignment 74, 75, 86 CHANGE RENAME description of 174 CHANGE SECOND description of 175 CHANGE SMS description of 176 CHANGE SPACE description of 178 CREATE creating saved configuration with 44 description of 180 FIND description of 181 FINDCOMP description of 181 GENSKEL description of 182 on Job Selection List 141, 145 recommended use of 141 HELP description of 183 LOCATE description of 184 MERGE description of 185 NEXT description of 186 OFILE description of 187 OLIST description of 189 overview of 11 PREVIOUS description of 189 REPLACE description of 190 SET description of 190 SORT description of 191 SS$ on Job Selection List 143 SUMMARY on Job Selection List 143, 146 SUMP description of 193 forcing space recalculation with 54 syntax of 165 TERSE description of 193 VAREDIT on Job Selection List 143 VERBOSE description of 194 primary tracks modifying for a data set 112 Primary Tracks field specifying a value for 112
Index

253

private area below 16MB LPA-eligible data set 101 processing log description 146 processing requirements confirming 71, 123, 132, 139 product listing data sets by product 96 product packages types of 159 product, element, or feature modifying for a data set 112 PRODUCTS line command displaying products and features of an order 161 products, elements and features displaying data sets for 96 displaying FMIDs for 161 displaying logical volumes for 73 PROFILE INTERCOM TSO command 35 publications for ServerPac xiv

report (continued) for merged configurations Data Set Merge Report 55 Merge Report 49 reserved space specifying for a physical volume 122 restrictions for merging data sets 103

S
saved configuration creating 153 description 5 SCEERUN data set adding to search order 20 scope of automatic assignments setting 77 SCPPBENU data set saving the installation jobs 148, 165, 190 SCPPOENU data set writing job output to 145 secondary space removing 179 viewing and changing 96 secondary tracks modifying for a data set 112 Secondary Tracks field specifying a value for 112 security for ServerPac orders 2 ServerPac installation of xiii related publications xiv terms xiii ServerPac dialog See installation dialog SET command description of 190 shipped name changing 110 shipped configuration description 4, 5 shipped name changing 110 Shipped Name field specifying a value for 110 SMP/E SYSLIB concatenation data sets not recommended for merging 106 viewing and changing 96 SMPTLIB VOLSER variable description 62 SMS eligible data set viewing and changing 96 SMS status for a data set changing 111, 176 for merged data sets 104 in the Data Set Merge Report 56 in the Merge Report 52

R
RACF definitions for installing the data sets in your order 2 RACFDRV job used to create security definitions 2 RACFTGT job used to create security definitions 2 RECEIVE job notification message from 35 requirements for running 35 saving a copy 36 submitting 35 Recommended System Layout option assigning data sets to volumes 76 changing volumes 82 description 75 displaying the current configuration 79 examples 83, 86, 89, 92 excluding volumes from automatic assignment 81 overview 74 setting the scope of 77 use of volume sequence numbers 76 use of volume types 76 use of volumes 75 record format (RECFM) listing data sets by RECFM 96 region size minimum required by the dialog 19 related information xiv renameable data set viewing and changing 96 REPLACE command description of 190 restrictions 190 report for an order 162

254

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

SMS storage class assigning 122 SMS-managed data set FACILITY class access requirement 3 in a merged configuration 52 status in the Data Set Merge Report 56 status in the Merge Report 52 viewing and changing 96 SMS-Managed field specifying a value for 111 SMS-managed volume installing an order on 6 installing the dialog on 14 storage class for 122 SMS-required data set viewing and changing 96 SORT command description of 191 space for a data set modifying 112 SPOOL VOL PREFIX variable description 62 SREL field See also system release values for 160 SSA See system-specific alias SST attribute listing data sets by SST 96 SST field in the Merge Configuration report 50 STA field possible values for 130 status of an order verifying 163 STGADMIN.IGG.DIRCAT FACILITY class profile READ access requirement 3 SUBMIT ISPF Edit command 35 subsystem product installation of 1 subsystem type (SST) listing data sets by subsystem type 96 SUMMARY command listing submitted jobs with 146 Summary Display commands overview 74 summary of physical volumes displaying 118, 193 SUMP command description of 193 forcing space recalculation with 54 switchable data set viewing and changing 96 synonym used with SET command 191, 192 SYSLIB concatenation viewing and changing 96

SYSNAME variable description 62 system layout modifying 73 SYSTEM LOGGER HLQ variable description 62 system release (SREL) types of 160 system-specific alias (SSA) specifying 133

T
table columns in panels description 191, 192 target volume listing data sets by target volume 96 used in automatic assignment 76 target zone renaming 69 TERSE command description of 193 Tracks/Cylinder field specifying a value for 116 TSO commands PROFILE INTERCOM 35 TSO/E logon panel 19 TSO/E options processor panel used to start the dialog 23 TVOL attribute listing data sets by TVOL 96

U
unit listing data sets by unit 96 Unit Type field specifying a value for 116 UNIX file system mount point viewing and changing 96 unmerging a merged data set 107 unrenameable data set name conflict in the Merge Report 51 renaming restrictions 174 viewing and changing 96 user catalog associating with an alias 131 cataloging dialog data sets 14 defining HLQs for 125 defining the dialog data sets to 13 user variable deleting 67 inserting 66 repeating 67 user-defined job deleting 151 inserting into the jobstream 149

Index

255

V
variable browsing 63 defining 59 editing 64 planning values for 61 restoring to shipped value 68 user-defined deleting 67 inserting 66 repeating 67 variable selection list description 59 VERBOSE command description of 194 View and Change Facility description 95 overview 74 virtual storage management LPA-eligible data set 101 volume adding additional 120 assignment of data sets 76 role in automatic assignment 75 selecting for changes 82 sequence number 76 storage class assigning 122 volume configuration displaying 79 volume sequence number listing data sets by volume number 96 used in automatic assignment 76 volume type used in automatic assignment 76

Z
z/OS operating system installation of xiii zFS data set changing to HFS 169 zone displaying features for 71 JES element merging 43 merging 43 renaming 69, 70 zone name changing 69 used in your order 70

W
work configuration creating 44, 180 creating for the order 41 deleting 46 description 5 saving 153 worksheet for the Define Alias to Catalog Relationships function 125 for the Define SSA to Catalog Relationships function 133

X
X line command description 81 used with the ALL scope 81, 88 used with the NEW scope 81, 91 used with the PARTIAL scope 81, 93, 94

256

ServerPac: Using the Installation Dialog

Readers Comments Wed Like to Hear from You

ServerPac Using the Installation Dialog Dialog Level: 20(September 2007) Publication No. SA22-7815-14 We appreciate your comments about this publication. Please comment on specific errors or omissions, accuracy, organization, subject matter, or completeness of this book. The comments you send should pertain to only the information in this manual or product and the way in which the information is presented. For technical questions and information about products and prices, please contact your IBM branch office, your IBM business partner, or your authorized remarketer. When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. IBM or any other organizations will only use the personal information that you supply to contact you about the issues that you state on this form. Comments:

Thank you for your support. Submit your comments using one of these channels: v Send your comments to the address on the reverse side of this form. v Send your comments via e-mail to: [email protected] If you would like a response from IBM, please fill in the following information:

Name Company or Organization Phone No.

Address

E-mail address

___________________________________________________________________________________________________

Readers Comments Wed Like to Hear from You

SA22-7815-14

Cut or Fold Along Line

Fold and _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold and_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Please _ _ _ _ _ staple _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Tape _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Tape _ _ _ _ do not _ _ _ _ NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

IBM Corporation MHVRCFS, Mail Station P181 2455 South Road Poughkeepsie, NY 12601-5400

_________________________________________________________________________________________ Please do not staple Fold and Tape Fold and Tape

SA22-7815-14

Cut or Fold Along Line

Program Number: 5751-CS9

Printed in USA

SA22-7815-14

Basic Information For Suppliers BMW
100% (1)
Basic Information For Suppliers BMW
56 pages
THE LTSPICE XVII SIMULATOR: Commands and Applications
From Everand
THE LTSPICE XVII SIMULATOR: Commands and Applications
Gilles Brocard
5/5 (1)
MVS System Commands
No ratings yet
MVS System Commands
858 pages
Programming FPGAs: Getting Started with Verilog
From Everand
Programming FPGAs: Getting Started with Verilog
Simon Monk
3.5/5 (2)
CMOD Backup, Recovery, and HA-sg246444 PDF
No ratings yet
CMOD Backup, Recovery, and HA-sg246444 PDF
384 pages
SH20-9161-0 Document Composition Facility Users Guide Jul78
No ratings yet
SH20-9161-0 Document Composition Facility Users Guide Jul78
391 pages
DB2 V9 Utility Guide Dsnugk13
No ratings yet
DB2 V9 Utility Guide Dsnugk13
1,099 pages
DB2 V9 ZOS Utility Guide
No ratings yet
DB2 V9 ZOS Utility Guide
1,131 pages
DB2 Utility Guide and Reference PDF
No ratings yet
DB2 Utility Guide and Reference PDF
1,137 pages
Forceware Networking and Firewall Administrator'S Guide: Software Version 1.0 Fifth Edition Nvidia Corporation June 2004
No ratings yet
Forceware Networking and Firewall Administrator'S Guide: Software Version 1.0 Fifth Edition Nvidia Corporation June 2004
158 pages
User Guide - Cognos Transformer
No ratings yet
User Guide - Cognos Transformer
153 pages
SDSF
100% (1)
SDSF
212 pages
IBM OS 390 Server User Manual
0% (1)
IBM OS 390 Server User Manual
76 pages
DS4000
No ratings yet
DS4000
170 pages
DB2 Universal Database For z/OS: Application Programming and SQL Guide
No ratings yet
DB2 Universal Database For z/OS: Application Programming and SQL Guide
1,284 pages
Instalacion HMC
No ratings yet
Instalacion HMC
291 pages
Cimco Edit 6 (En)
No ratings yet
Cimco Edit 6 (En)
194 pages
G8264 Ag 8-3
No ratings yet
G8264 Ag 8-3
670 pages
TPC For System Z
No ratings yet
TPC For System Z
588 pages
CakePHPCookbook PDF
No ratings yet
CakePHPCookbook PDF
1,077 pages
Installation Guide: DB2 Universal Database For OS/390
No ratings yet
Installation Guide: DB2 Universal Database For OS/390
576 pages
Nvidia Forceware Networking and Firewall Administrator'S Guide
No ratings yet
Nvidia Forceware Networking and Firewall Administrator'S Guide
149 pages
As 400 Book
No ratings yet
As 400 Book
165 pages
DB2 Table Editor For Multi Platforms
No ratings yet
DB2 Table Editor For Multi Platforms
378 pages
What's New in V10
No ratings yet
What's New in V10
211 pages
IBM Informix-Ent Repl Guide
No ratings yet
IBM Informix-Ent Repl Guide
415 pages
IBM Virtual Fabric 10Gb Switch Module For IBM BladeCenter Application Guide
No ratings yet
IBM Virtual Fabric 10Gb Switch Module For IBM BladeCenter Application Guide
485 pages
PVCS Version Manager 8.4.5
No ratings yet
PVCS Version Manager 8.4.5
94 pages
Informix DBAccess Utility
No ratings yet
Informix DBAccess Utility
208 pages
SAP Business Information Warehouse On The As 400 System
No ratings yet
SAP Business Information Warehouse On The As 400 System
132 pages
Backup and Restore Informix
No ratings yet
Backup and Restore Informix
156 pages
Connect-It 4.10 User's Guide
No ratings yet
Connect-It 4.10 User's Guide
298 pages
IBM Virtualization Engine TS7510 Tape Virtualization For Open Systems Servers Sg247189
No ratings yet
IBM Virtualization Engine TS7510 Tape Virtualization For Open Systems Servers Sg247189
172 pages
Tuser
No ratings yet
Tuser
442 pages
Zo S Commands
No ratings yet
Zo S Commands
722 pages
TWS 8.4 Reference Guide
No ratings yet
TWS 8.4 Reference Guide
627 pages
7.6.04 SP2 - Upgrade Tips PDF
No ratings yet
7.6.04 SP2 - Upgrade Tips PDF
116 pages
Transformation Server For AS400 - Version 6.1
100% (1)
Transformation Server For AS400 - Version 6.1
168 pages
Planning For Installation (v1.11)
No ratings yet
Planning For Installation (v1.11)
192 pages
CICS Resource Definition
No ratings yet
CICS Resource Definition
617 pages
IMS DB Application Programming - IBM Manual
No ratings yet
IMS DB Application Programming - IBM Manual
421 pages
HP Storage Management Utility User Guide: Active/active Firmware v2.x
No ratings yet
HP Storage Management Utility User Guide: Active/active Firmware v2.x
99 pages
C 2738510
No ratings yet
C 2738510
104 pages
ICKDSF
No ratings yet
ICKDSF
554 pages
IP Plan - IBM
No ratings yet
IP Plan - IBM
737 pages
OpenSuse12 1 Reference
No ratings yet
OpenSuse12 1 Reference
450 pages
Lan Console
No ratings yet
Lan Console
124 pages
00d2331 Application Guide EN4093
No ratings yet
00d2331 Application Guide EN4093
488 pages
DaVis D72
No ratings yet
DaVis D72
316 pages
Osd Developers Guide
No ratings yet
Osd Developers Guide
180 pages
G8124-E Ag 8-3 PDF
No ratings yet
G8124-E Ag 8-3 PDF
526 pages
IBM AIX Enterprise Edition System Administration Guide
No ratings yet
IBM AIX Enterprise Edition System Administration Guide
318 pages
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
From Everand
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
Çağatay Şanlı
5/5 (1)
Programming the Intel Galileo: Getting Started with the Arduino -Compatible Development Board
From Everand
Programming the Intel Galileo: Getting Started with the Arduino -Compatible Development Board
Christopher Rush
5/5 (1)
ChatGPT for Business: Strategies for Success
From Everand
ChatGPT for Business: Strategies for Success
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
Programming the Photon: Getting Started with the Internet of Things
From Everand
Programming the Photon: Getting Started with the Internet of Things
Christopher Rush
5/5 (1)
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
From Everand
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
Smart Card Applications: Design models for using and programming smart cards
From Everand
Smart Card Applications: Design models for using and programming smart cards
Wolfgang Rankl
No ratings yet
Advanced Multiplayer Game Development with Ureal Engine 5: A Comprehensive Guide to C++ Scripting
From Everand
Advanced Multiplayer Game Development with Ureal Engine 5: A Comprehensive Guide to C++ Scripting
Vladimir Kiselev
No ratings yet
The IT Factory
From Everand
The IT Factory
H.J.C. van Aken
No ratings yet
CNC Machining Handbook: Building, Programming, and Implementation
From Everand
CNC Machining Handbook: Building, Programming, and Implementation
Alan Overby
No ratings yet
OCP Oracle Database 11g Administration II Exam Guide: Exam 1Z0-053
From Everand
OCP Oracle Database 11g Administration II Exam Guide: Exam 1Z0-053
Bob Bryla
No ratings yet
Plain JavaScript: Learning the Front-End
From Everand
Plain JavaScript: Learning the Front-End
Roger Beans-Rivet
No ratings yet
Installation Guide: Cics Transaction Server For OS/390
No ratings yet
Installation Guide: Cics Transaction Server For OS/390
479 pages
Acronyms
No ratings yet
Acronyms
167 pages
Sr. Mainframe DB2 Database Administrator
No ratings yet
Sr. Mainframe DB2 Database Administrator
5 pages
RDZ Search Options
No ratings yet
RDZ Search Options
74 pages
STROBE DB2 Feature, Form Number STF004
No ratings yet
STROBE DB2 Feature, Form Number STF004
58 pages
Reportes Tds Cics Lookasides
No ratings yet
Reportes Tds Cics Lookasides
442 pages
MVS Messages
No ratings yet
MVS Messages
872 pages
LE Migration Cookbook v4.3
No ratings yet
LE Migration Cookbook v4.3
19 pages
IBM User's Guide, Thirteenth Edition: 13 General Programming Languages On MVS
No ratings yet
IBM User's Guide, Thirteenth Edition: 13 General Programming Languages On MVS
39 pages
Hitachi Unified Storage VM Block Module: Hitachi High Availability Manager User Guide
No ratings yet
Hitachi Unified Storage VM Block Module: Hitachi High Availability Manager User Guide
164 pages
Mvs 0506
No ratings yet
Mvs 0506
74 pages
JCL+ VSAM Programming Guide
100% (1)
JCL+ VSAM Programming Guide
109 pages
Programmer References
No ratings yet
Programmer References
328 pages
Mvs Commands
No ratings yet
Mvs Commands
2 pages
Epst Polydoros 80s Rev4
100% (1)
Epst Polydoros 80s Rev4
179 pages
Mainframe Resume (04!25!2016)
No ratings yet
Mainframe Resume (04!25!2016)
2 pages
Iea1a421 PDF
No ratings yet
Iea1a421 PDF
340 pages
OPC Training Agenda
100% (1)
OPC Training Agenda
61 pages
RMF Monitor III
No ratings yet
RMF Monitor III
23 pages
Mainframe Developer COBOL Java in NYC Resume Peter Rosenblum
No ratings yet
Mainframe Developer COBOL Java in NYC Resume Peter Rosenblum
3 pages
Automation Using Tivoli NetView OS-390 V1R3 and System Automation OS-390 V1R3 Sg245515
No ratings yet
Automation Using Tivoli NetView OS-390 V1R3 and System Automation OS-390 V1R3 Sg245515
280 pages
Using CA-File Master
No ratings yet
Using CA-File Master
6 pages
REXXTOOLS V7 Basic Services
No ratings yet
REXXTOOLS V7 Basic Services
316 pages
DB2 Unit 2
No ratings yet
DB2 Unit 2
33 pages
CICS Day 1
No ratings yet
CICS Day 1
50 pages
Narendra Reddy Arani: Experience Overview
No ratings yet
Narendra Reddy Arani: Experience Overview
2 pages
DFSORT Application Programming Guide
No ratings yet
DFSORT Application Programming Guide
846 pages